Monash Design and Construction Standards Rev07

1611103 - Master Copy - Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE) - 4.
MDCS
Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

4. Monash Design and Construction Standards (MDCS)
Revision 7 (August 2016)
Monash input field Have you created your own filter view for this tab yet?
Design Team input field Go to the "Data" menu > Hover over "Filter views" > Select "Save as filter view" > In the top left corner, rename the filter to your name
> Use this filter whenever you use this tab of ENSURE.
Relevant Space type Resource directory reference Acknowledged Compliance Completed Date Date of
Section Heading Category Item no. Requirement Non-compliance explanation Comments Monash authorisation Monash feedback Feedback by
discipline specific (* = contained within MDCS) (Section A only) response by completed feedback
The purpose of the Monash Design and Construction Standards (MDCS) is to
establish consistent minimum design, construction and performance
standards for built works at all of Monash’s Australasian Campuses. The
MDCS is divided into sections for ease of use but must be considered in its
entirety, regardless of specific discipline or responsibilities.
The MDCS is to be utilised by all parties associated with:

- Project briefing,
- Design, development and preparation of project specifications,
- Project management,
A-
All Introduction Purpose A 01.01 - Delivery of projects, and
Introduction
- Maintenance activities.
Extracts from the MDCS may be incorporated in specifications, however it

must remain the consultant's responsibility to fully investigate the needs of the
University and produce designs and documents that are entirely ‘fit for
purpose’ and which meet the ‘intent’ of the project brief. The MDCS must not
negate or reduce the requirement for all parties to fully comply with current
editions of relevant Australian Standards, the Building Code of Australia,
Disability Discrimination Act (DDA), Accessibility Aspiration Design Factors
and local council and authority requirements.
The MDCS is divided into disciplinary based sections, each setting out the
A- Structure of design principles which include minimum sustainability and performance
All Introduction A 01.02
Introduction Document requirements. Referenced Schedules also form the MDCS which nominates
University standardised systems or products.
The MDCS and its requirements are to be read in conjunction with other
A- Related
All Introduction A 01.03 relevant University documents as listed in the Resource Directory, imbedded Resource Directory
Introduction documents
in this Tool.
Approval to depart from the requirements of this document can only be issued
by the Executive Director, Buildings & Property Division or representative
A- Variance from after careful consideration as to the best interests of the University. Those
All Introduction A 01.04 Design Dispensation (from MDCS)
Introduction Requirements seeking departure approvals will do so in writing using the Design
Dispensation (from MDCS) form. Else, non-compliance must be declared for
all relevant requirements in the MDCS.
Current Issue:
August 2016: Revision 07 - Monash Design & Construction Standards
(MDCS)
Previous Issues:
March 2015: Revision 06 - Monash Design & Construction Standards
(MDCS) - Superseded
May 2014: Revision 05 - Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards
(MLDCS) - Superseded
April 2014: Revision 04 - Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards
A- February 2013: Revision 03 - Minimum Level Design & Construction
All Introduction Revision Log A 01.05
Introduction Standards (MLDCS) - Superseded
August 2011: Revision 02 - Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards
March 2010: Revision 01 - Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards
March 2005: Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards (MLDCS) -
Superseded
Specifications:
Sept 2003: Monash Project Design and Management Guidelines –
Superseded
April 2003: Standard Specification for use with Minor Works and
Refurbishment of Existing Building Infrastructure - Superseded
A- Revision It is envisaged that revisions to this document will be undertaken at intervals
All Introduction A 01.06
Introduction Management of not more than three (3) years.
A-
All Introduction Endorsement body A 01.07 Executive Management Group, Buildings and Property Division
Introduction
A-
All Introduction Owner A 01.08 Executive Director, Buildings and Property Division
Introduction
Planning
A- Projects
All Introduction Author(s) A 01.09
Introduction Security and
OHS
A-
All Introduction Contact Person A 01.10 Manager, Engineering and Sustainability
Introduction
The MDCS has been prepared by the Buildings and Property Division of
Monash University to guide staff, consultants and contractors involved in the
project design and procurement process. The Standards were intended to
establish minimum requirements for Monash projects. The Standards are not
intended to explain all matters associated with projects, or to call up all
specific contractual or detailed design requirements, these things being
covered more properly by the individual project brief and contract documents.
A-
All Explanatory A 02
Introduction Where references to applicable codes, laws and regulations and other
matters or things which must already be known by qualified staff, consultants
and contractors are superseded, the newer version must apply. The work
must be carried out strictly in accordance with the latest relevant Australian
Standards, Codes and Practices and associated published specifications.
The version of Standards referenced must be the current version upon the
date of works. Where Standards referenced are superseded by other
Australian Standards, the newer standard must apply.
1
1611103 - Master Copy - Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE) - 4. MDCS

The objectives of the MDCS are:
- To explain the University’s preferred systems, elements and components in
simple terms.
- To help achieve project outcomes which support the University’s core
A-
All Explanatory Objectives A 02.01 business of innovative teaching and research of international quality.
Introduction
- To ensure the University develops sustainably and delivers environmentally
sustainable outcomes as per the University Masterplan.
- To standardise systems and building elements for consistency, operation
and maintainability across all campuses.
This MDCS describes generic requirements. Requirements specific to a
A- particular project, campus or other variable, will be covered by the project
All Explanatory Application A 02.02
Introduction brief. The Standards do not take precedence over any contract document,
although they will typically be cross-referenced in such documentation.
The MDCS is the property of Monash University and may not be copied
without the approval in writing of the Divisional Director, Buildings & Property
A- Copyright and
All Explanatory A 02.03 Division. Application to copy and distribute all, or sections of this document, is
Introduction circulation
to be made through the University Project manager/coordinator assigned to
the project.
The MDCS was prepared with the assistance of Monash University staff,
A- Acknowledgement
All Explanatory A 02.04 external consultants, contractors and colleagues from other education
Introduction s
institutions. The University conveys its thanks.
Strategic and facilities planning for Projects works and building refurbishment
is driven by:
- Monash Directions 2025,
- Campus Master Plans, Caulfield Campus Masterplan
- Strategic Asset Management Plan (SAM Plan), (2011-2030)
- Monash University Guide for Design & Management of Environmentally
A- Strategic Planning & Strategic &
All A 03.01 Sustainable Buildings: the Eco-Accord Clayton Campus Masterplan (2011-
Introduction Development Facilities Planning
2030)
To ensure compliance with these documents, reference must be made early
in the project feasibility stage. Faculty and space planning is carried out by Eco-Accord
the Buildings and Property, Strategic Planning & Information, and is to be
utilised as a precursor to the design and construction phase, to which these
guidelines refer.
The MDCS sets minimum standards for new buildings, building
refurbishments and maintenance asset replacements. These standards must
be adhered to in all Construction & Maintenance projects at the University.
The intent is to set a standard for University facilities, however, consultants

are expected to propose ‘best practice/state of the art’ construction
techniques, and introduce technological changes that support pragmatic,
innovative design. In recognition of this, any variation from these minimum
standards must declared in the Tool under the appropriate compliance
response with an accompanying detailed explanation. All variations will be
authorised by the appropriate Buildings and Property Officer.
The design must comply with the requirements of the current relevant
legislation, including but not limited to:
Statutory
A- Strategic Planning & - Standards, (Australian and New Zealand, and were not locally available
All Compliance & A 03.02
Introduction Development British)
Standards
- Local Supply Authority,
- Occupational Health and Safety Legislation,
- Disability Discrimination Act & Access to Premises,
- Insurance Council of Australia,
- Metropolitan and other Regional Fire Brigades and authorities,
- Building Act,
- Building Regulations Building Code of Australia, and
- Federal, State and Statutory Authority having jurisdiction over the works or
building during the construction of the works.
All works must be designed in accordance with relevant Australian Standards

and Building Regulations, Codes of Practice and the Specifications. All
refurbishment works must be designed to meet all current statutory and
standard requirements.
2

Monash University Project Managers, Officers and Supervisors have a
responsibility to ensure the works they are managing or supervising do not
negatively impact on the aesthetics, architecture or Public Realm.
Key Design Criteria must include, though not be limited to:

- Functional and safe for the intended use,
- Economical design that also eliminates wasteful use of space,
- Avoidance of expensive exterior and interior finishes, unless sufficient
justification exists with regard to maintenance, character, etc., and without
compromising the agreed University identity where appropriate,
- The avoidance of building services and equipment on façades and roof
tops, must be placed out of the ‘line of sight’ (particularly when viewed from
ground level),
- Flexibility of future use of building and roof spaces,
- Engineering Services must also be considered in relation to future change
A- Strategic Planning & Key Design
All A 03.03 of use and precinct benefits,
Introduction Development Criteria
- Design for resource efficiency (energy, water and materials),
- Delivery of high Indoor Environment Quality,
- Design to minimise the university’s exposure to Litigation,
- Pipework, conduit and services must be concealed, yet readily accessible
where possible unless otherwise approved by the Monash University Project
Manager, Officer or Supervisor having responsibility for the works,
- Ventilation and exhaust systems or fresh air exhaust and intakes must take
into account the height of adjoining buildings and air flows,
- Performance based solutions may be adopted under the BCA, providing the
solution identifies any additional ongoing maintenance costs,
- DDA compliance,
- Waste minimisation in design, construction and demolition.
Note: the University does not accept materials and products that are
environmentally, socially and economically non-beneficial.
The design should endeavour to promote, co-ordinate and unify materials,
plant and equipment in accordance within the Standards established by the
University. Such elements must permit interchangeability of spares and
simplify maintenance and operation. Straightforward, cost efficient and low
maintenance procedures are of paramount importance, and must be
A- Strategic Planning & Ease of
All A 03.04 reviewed before going to tender.
Introduction Development Maintenance
All fabric, structural and service components must be readily accessible and
not labour intensive to repair. Buildings that exceed three floors must include
or accommodate approved building access systems for the maintenance and
cleaning of the external façades.
The University aims to achieve the optimum balance between capital outlay
and operating costs for buildings, consistent with a continuing level of quality
and service throughout their agreed lifetime. All built form design, product and
material selection must consider the likely ongoing costs to the university and
their fitness for use.
Lifecycle costing must be undertaken in accordance with The Australian/New

Zealand Standard Life Cycle Costing – An Application Guide (AS/NZS. 4536:
A- Strategic Planning & 1999).
All Life Cycle Costing A 03.05
Introduction Development
To ensure development sustainability, financially and environmentally all
projects must be discussed with Buildings & Property:
- Strategic Planning and Development
- Engineering and Sustainability; and
- Campus Design Quality & Planning
Consultation with these groups is to occur in the early stages of each project
and the agreed strategy outlined in the Architect’s return brief.
When designing whole or sections of built forms and landscaping for the
University, the designer must consider this to be a workplace. Therefore
BCA Definition of
under section 28 of the Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004, the
A- Strategic Planning & Building and
All A 03.06 designer must ensure that hazards and risks that may exist in the design are
Introduction Development Structure
eliminated or controlled at the design phase, so far as is reasonably
Categories
practicable, and that it is designed to be safe and without risks to the health of
persons using it as a workplace, for the purpose for which it was designed.
Building ages and construction techniques vary considerably, both within and
across campuses, reflecting the materials and techniques in use at the time
they were built. Buildings are a mix of low, medium and high rise, adopting
linear and deep space floor plates, as well as asymmetrical, ‘circular’ and
A- Built Form, Size &
All Generally A 04.01 other geometric shapes.
Introduction Orientation
Refer to the Design and Development Controls and Master Planning
documents for campus growth, height governance and site or precinct
densities.
In addition to supporting the immediate needs of clients, buildings must
respond to the perceived future needs of the university for the anticipated life
A- Built Form, Size & of the building. Any new building must be delivered with a minimum GBCA
All New Buildings A 04.02
Introduction Orientation certified Green Star 5 Star As-Built rating. Any guidance related to
environmentally sustainable development must be sought from Buildings &
Property Engineering and Sustainability.
Proposed building and landscaping design must be consistent with the
University’s Overall and Campus Master Plan and Landscape Design and
A- Built Form, Size & Development Controls. Where a Campus Master Plan does not exist,
All Master Plan A 04.03
Introduction Orientation direction must be sought from Building and Property Division - Strategic
Planning and Development and Campus Design Quality & Planning by
submission of a briefing document.
3

Ecological sustainability is to be maximised throughout design regardless of
B- Planning & Ecological
Architect B 01.01 project size or type. The principles of the EcoAccord model and those
Design Controls Sustainability Sustainability
detailed in the GBCA Green Star suite of tools must be used.
All new buildings with a construction budget exceeding $10m must be
certified by an independently assessed sustainable building certification
system as recognised through the World Green Building Council. The
B- Planning & relevant certification system will seek As-built certification to levels of ‘Local
Architect Green Star B 01.02
Design Controls Sustainability Excellence’ or ‘World Leadership’ standards. Building developments under
this budget threshold and any refurbishment works not eligible for certification
will apply principles consistent with best practice to guide and deliver
sustainable outcomes.
B- Planning & All new buildings and major refurbishments are required to complete a
Architect Eco-Accord B 01.03 Eco-Accord
Design Controls Sustainability response to the Monash University Eco-Accord (imbedded in this Tool)
Consultants must be well versed on the principles of passive design, noting
B- Planning &
Architect Passive Design B 01.04 that building orientation, footprint and façade design are critical aspects of
Design Controls Sustainability
passive design.
Construction materials, in both building design and operation that are
environmentally benign, non-toxic and non-allergenic shall be considered.
B- Planning & Construction Living Building Challenge - Declare
Architect B 01.05 Preference for materials that are easy to install without a requirement for
Design Controls Sustainability Materials Product Database
protective clothing for installers. Adoption of materials from the Living Building
Challenge - Declare Product Database is preferred.
Provide building facilities that support physical activity and good health,
specifically:
B- Planning & - Easily accessible drinking fountains throughout the building
Architect Facilities B 01.06
Design Controls Sustainability - Stairs for everyday use in multi-level buildings
- Other opportunities to enhance physical activity should be considered,
where advice is available from the University OHS team.
Water
Hydraulic B- Planning & Opportunities to connect to and "fit for purpose use" of campus non-potable
Conservation & B 01.07
Engineer Design Controls Sustainability water supplies must be investigated.
Quality
Hydraulic B- Planning & Landscape All new landscaping projects require irrigation to be sourced from a rainwater
B 01.08
Engineer Design Controls Sustainability Irrigation harvesting system.
Mechanical B- Planning & Water Use in Air cooled condensers with pre-cooler arrangements to be considered instead
B 01.09
Engineer Design Controls Sustainability Mechanical Plant of conventional cooling towers.
Metals, such as copper pipe, tap ware, troughs and electrical cables are high-
value materials that can and must be recycled. Concrete, ceramics and
Waste and
B- Planning & plasterboard must be segregated from general waste and managed
Contractor Recycling During B 01.10
Design Controls Sustainability appropriately. A target of 95% diversion from landfill should be set, with a
Construction
minimum requirement of 80% (by weight). Monthly waste and recycling data
must be provided and forwarded to the Planning team.
The Building Contractor must submit an Environmental Management Plan
(EMP) for review by the Sustainability Compliance & Integration Officer
(SCIO). The EMP will include all environmental risks and impacts associated
with the project works and management controls to address these. The EMP
must also specifically address waste and recycling, stormwater protection and
Waste
management and refer to the following EPA Victoria Best Practice
B- Planning & Management
Contractor B 01.11 Management Guidelines:
Design Controls Sustainability during
- Construction techniques for sediment pollution control, EPA Vic Best
Construction
practice environmental management series, Pub No. 275;
- Environmental guidelines for major construction sites, EPA Vic Best
practice environmental management series, Pub No. 480.
The EMP will include an environmental incident definition and notification
process to the Monash project manager and SCIO
Independent
Design Review & Use an Independent Design Reviewer and/or Independent Commissioning
B- Planning &
Architect Independent B 01.12 Agent to provide third-party technical engineering design review and
Design Controls Sustainability
Commissioning verification of commissioning.
Agent
Details relating to existing location, type, size and invert levels of
B- Underground underground services are to be established prior to any excavation works.The
Architect Site B 02.01
Design Controls Services Project Architect, Lead Consultant and/or Services Consultants must transfer
the above information into the contract documentation.
A feature and level survey, if required, will need to be delivered by external
B- Feature & Level
Architect Site B 02.02 engagement within the project and provided electronically to the University for
Design Controls Survey
its records and data management.
The Project Architect, Lead Consultant and/or Services Consultants must
B- Dilapidation carry out a joint inspection with the Contractor of existing roads, services and
Architect Site B 02.03
Design Controls Reports building conditions, and record any damage to the University Project
manager/coordinator prior to commencement of onsite works.
The Project Architect, Lead Consultant and/or Services Consultants must
(unless otherwise agreed), arrange for soil testing and investigation to be
B- Soil Testing and
Architect Site B 02.04 carried out and provide copies of the report (in digital PDF or Word document
Design Controls Investigation
formats) to the University for record purposes. A copy of the report must be
issued to the University Project Manager/coordinator.
Within the parameters of the site and the required operational activities, the
building must be positioned such that it maximises the penetration of natural
B-
Architect Orientation B 03 light to the inner occupied zones whilst minimising potential heat loads from
Design Controls
the east and west to provide comfortable environmental conditions and
minimise running costs.
4

Circulation and access paths need to consider varying degrees of traffic and
be categorised into the following, with minimum widths for each:
- Arterial: major access routes between buildings or from car parking or set
B- Site Access & down areas. Minimum width 1800mm,
Architect Access Ways B 04.01
Design Controls Approach - Main: access routes which carry less traffic than arterial routes while still
being seen as important thoroughfares. Minimum width 1500mm,
- Secondary: access routes which serve only one building or a small area
within a building. Minimum width 1200mm.
B- Site Access & Gradients must not be steeper than 1 in 20 unless fitted with a handrail and
Architect Gradient B 04.02
Design Controls Approach kerb.
Provide accessible set down locations and bicycle parking close to the main
B- Site Access & Set Down Areas & entrances of buildings, undercover wherever possible. Also provide additional
Architect B 04.03
Design Controls Approach Car Parks accessible parking bays, where space permits and as required by needs of
building occupants.
Provide a Disabilities Discrimination Act (DDA) compliant continuous path of
B- Site Access & Continuous Path
Architect B 04.04 travel, with appropriate directional aids, from car park and set down locations
Design Controls Approach of Travel
to the main entry of the building.
B- Site Access & Kerbs and gutters must have “accessible” kerb crossovers to allow
Architect Kerbs and Gutters B 04.05
Design Controls Approach continuous path of travel to building.
B- Overall building height must be considered within the context of the
Architect Structure Building Height B 05.01
Design Controls surrounding buildings and the Campus Master Plan.
Slab to Slab floor heights must be designed for future proofing and flexibility
B- Slab to Slab Floor of use, facilitate operations, equipment, the inclusion or exclusion of
Architect Structure B 05.02
Design Controls Height suspended ceilings, clearance and access to engineering services (both
immediate and for the perceived life cycle of the building).
Special facilities such as laboratories requiring additional height due to
B-
Architect Structure Additional Height B 05.03 equipment, auditoria, tiered lecture theatres and religious centres & sports
Design Controls
facilities etc. must be considered on an individual basis.
B-
Architect Structure Canopies B 05.04 Canopies must be provided as additional protection to building entries.
Design Controls
The size, shape and number must be considered to best facilitate the
B- operational needs, flexibility of use, circulation and ‘crush’ spaces, minimise
Architect Floor Size & Shape B 06
Design Controls distances and journey times for occupants, and balance the penetration of
natural light while minimising solar heat gains.
Spaces which require a:
- high level of acoustic separation to be designed to a minimum sound
reduction loss of 40dB(A), characterised by low level of audible sounds from
adjoining spaces.
- medium level of acoustic separation to be designed to a minimum sound
B-
Architect Acoustics B 07 reduction loss of 32dB(A), characterised by intelligible but not distracting
Design Controls
sounds from adjoining spaces.
- low level of acoustic separation is adequate to be designed to a minimum
sound reduction loss of 27dB(A).
- two different acoustic separation requirements, adopt the higher level of
separation."
Levels to be at or below:
B- - NR30 in lecture theatres and conference rooms
Architect Acoustics Ambient Sound B 07.01
Design Controls - NR35 in individual offices and tutorial rooms
- NR 40 in open planned offices, waiting areas and circulation spaces."
Separate all sources of vibration to avoid transmission into building interiors.
B-
Architect Acoustics Vibrations B 07.02 Requirements for special purpose facilities such as laboratories will be
Design Controls
specified in the project brief.
Acoustics to comply with any special purpose facilities such as audio and
B-
Architect Acoustics Special Purpose B 07.03 visual arts recording studios, medical and counselling suites, lecture theatres,
Design Controls
libraries and plant rooms specified in the project brief.
Architects and Interior Designers must refer to the Monash University 'How to
B- University Approved Monash University 'How to Buy
Architect B 08 Buy Guides' for the panel of 'Approved Suppliers' for incorporation into project
Design Controls Suppliers Guides'
documentation.
When specifying materials, components and products, Architects and Interior
B- University Standardised Monash University 'How to Buy
Architect B 09 Designers must refer to the 'How to Buy Guides' to identify products that are
Design Controls Products Guides'
standardised for use.
Specified products and materials must meet the following conditions:
- Equipment must not be used unless spare parts are currently available
within Australia, and reasonable ongoing continuity guaranteed.
B- University Standardised - Australian Made Products from renewable sources must be used.
Architect Conditions B 09.01
Design Controls Products - Any timber or timber products should be Forestry Stewardship Council
(FSC) certified.
- All materials to be low off gassing. All engineered wood products to be
certified E0 for formaldehyde and its derivatives.
Alternative products may be proposed if they are considered to be superior
B- University Standardised
Architect Alternatives B 09.02 (both in performance and environmental impact) and readily available. Written
Design Controls Products
agreement to use such products must be obtained from the University.
All consultants, contractors and subcontractors must ensure that its
B- Occupational Health &
Contractor General B 10.01 employees, agents and subcontractors comply at all times with Monash
Design Controls Safety
University’s OHS policies and procedures.
The Head Contractor will be required to have in place an OHS management
Safety system that must, as a minimum requirement, demonstrate compliance with
B- Occupational Health &
Contractor Management B 10.02 OHS AS 18001:2007 or equivalent occupational health and management
Design Controls Safety
Systems systems. This management plan is required prior to commencement of works
on site.
5

The Principal Contractor for the construction work must provide the University
with a Premises specific Occupational Health and Safety Management Plan
for the works prior to the work commencing. The Contractor must ensure that
B- Occupational Health & OHS Management the plan is maintained and kept up to date during the course of the work. This
Contractor B 10.03
Design Controls Safety Plan management plan is required prior to commencement of works on site. If
there is a requirement to temporarily relocate emergency egress paths or
assembly areas, consultation must take place between the Project Manager /
Coordinator and affected entities and changes communicated appropriately.
All buildings must maximise opportunities for thermal insulation:
- Thermally broken facades and window elements must be used. Standard
window frames must be thermally broken and bespoke designs must be
thermally enhanced as a minimum.
B- Thermal Insulation
Architect B 11 - Double-glazed windows are a minimum requirement for new buildings and
Design Controls Performance
refurbishments.
- Effective building sealing to minimise air infiltration is mandatory.
- Ensure all main entries are air locked at the appropriate scale to be
effective.
B- Animal, Vermin & Pest All cavities/apertures must be sealed/closed off such that all vermin are
Contractor Vermin B 12.01
Design Controls Infestation unable to gain access to internal spaces.
B- Animal, Vermin & Pest Wherever possible façade detailing must avoid ledges or protrusions, such
Architect Animal B 12.02
Design Controls Infestation that birds are unable to perch, roost or nest.
Anti-termite treatment must be provided to all new buildings. All workmanship
and materials must conform to the requirements of the Australian Standard
for protection of buildings from subterranean termites with the following
considerations:
- Physical barriers must be provided in preference to chemical treatments
B- Animal, Vermin & Pest
Architect Termite Control B 12.03 requiring cyclic applications.
Design Controls Infestation
- Minimise disruption to adjacent building users where treatment is required.
- All tree roots which have been exposed during excavation, including
stumps, logs and other timber must be fully excavated and removed from the
building site. Tree roots from adjacent trees must be reported to the
University Project manager/coordinator prior to removal.
B- Anti-graffiti coatings must be applied to all vulnerable surfaces as directed by
Architect Vandalism (graffiti) B 13
Design Controls the University.
An alcove must be provided for recyclable waste streams on each floor. The
B-
Architect Waste Recycling B 14 provision of recycling (co-mingled, cardboard, paper and organics) waste
Design Controls
bins, storage and collection must be included in project scope and budget.
Circulation and access paths need to consider varying degrees of traffic and
be categorised into the following, with minimum widths for each:
- Arterial: major access routes between buildings or from car parking or set
B- down areas. Minimum width 1800 mm,
Architect Service Provision Penetrations B 15
Design Controls - Main: access routes which carry less traffic than arterial routes while still
being seen as important thoroughfares. Minimum width 1500 mm,
- Secondary: access routes which serve only one building or a small area
within a building. Minimum width 1200 mm.
Monash Brand Guidelines
Signage must be designed to:
- Monash University’s Branding, as outlined in the Monash Brand Guidelines
Monash Design and Development
- the Signage Palette, as outlined in the Monash Design and Development
Controls - Landscape (DDCL) - Part
Controls - Landscape (DDCL) - Part 4
B- MDCS 4
Architect Signage B 16.01 - the Internal Signage Policy
Design Controls Supplementary
- the Internal Signage Master Palette and Guidelines (currently in
Internal Signage Policy
development)
Specific requirements and approval must be sought from the Campus Design
Internal Signage Master Palette and
Quality & Planning team where applicable.
Guidelines
Internal signage to give building users and visitors, clear and precise
Generally - directions from point of entry in building, to point of arrival i.e. individual
B-
Architect Signage Directional & B 16.02 room/area. Ensure positioning of signs/notices are undertaken in a co-
Design Controls
Informative ordinated and logical manner and that the materials and do not detract from
quality of finishes in the adjacent environment.
Building & Level Directories to be located in main entry and arrival points and
must have interchangeable font style, size and colour. They must describe
the:
B- Building & Level
Architect Signage B 16.03 - Faculties/Departments
Design Controls Directories
- Activities
- Areas/rooms etc.
- Advise level/direction.
Individual room signage requirements are as advised by
Stakeholders/University Project manager/coordinator. The consultants need
B- Individual Rooms / *Section B - Design Controls - Item
Architect Signage B 16.04 to follow University’s Branding and Signage Guidelines, but room numbering
Design Controls Areas B 16.13
will need to be approved/agreed by the Strategic Planning and Information
team as described in *Section B - Design Controls - Item B 16.13.01.
Directions to toilets and similar amenities will also be given either on the floor
B- Other Directional
Architect Signage B 16.05 directories or separately signposted as appropriate. Use widely recognised
Design Controls Signs
graphics in lieu of wording for toilet applications.
B- Statutory Signage The display and containment of Building Occupancy Permit must not detract
Architect Signage B 16.06
Design Controls - Generally from the overall appearance of the adjacent environment.
Emergency
B- All new works Evacuation diagrams must be prepared to the standard
Architect Signage Evacuation B 16.07.01
Design Controls outlined in AS 3745-2010 section 3.5.
Diagrams
Evacuation diagrams identifying egress points, fire protection equipment and
Emergency
B- assembly areas must be located at access points, lobby areas and corridors
Architect Signage Evacuation B 16.07.02
Design Controls as recommended by Monash OHS consultants. Assembly areas are to be
Diagrams
elected and endorsed through consultation with Monash OHS.
6

Emergency Consultants are required to provide construction floor plan drawings including
B-
Architect Signage Evacuation B 16.07.03 all electrical, fire and security drawings that are required to produce the
Design Controls
Diagrams Evacuation diagrams.
Emergency The Emergency Evacuation diagrams must be produced in A3, by BPD's
B-
Architect Signage Evacuation B 16.07.04 Evac specialist contractor. The diagrams are to be mounted in designated
Design Controls
Diagrams locations in accordance with the signage policy guidelines.
Safety Hazards Signage:
- Generally clearly document and coordinate with the various occupiers of
B- Safety / Hazards the building as required.
Design Controls Signage - Identify all safety equipment and facilities in accordance with the relevant
standards.
- A safety notice board is required to highlight safety issues.
Laboratory
Operations Ensure positioning of signs / notices is undertaken in a coordinated and
B- Certification / logical manner that complies with the requirements of the Accreditation
Design Controls Accreditation Authority and the University, and do not detract from quality of the adjacent
Certification environment
Notices
B- Accessibility All areas to be accessible to disabled users, unless directed otherwise by
Design Controls Signage building entry signs.
Plant Rooms:
- must identify room function and notify restricted access. Signage to be
B- Plant Room/
Architect Signage Plant Rooms B 16.11 located on door(s), with wording in accordance with Safety Regulations.
Design Controls Enclosure
- The University should be consulted as to the final requirement of plant room
signage prior to installation by the Head Contractor.
For new buildings, consultants also need a Monash University Building
Address / Asset Number requested via the University Project
manager/coordinator. These Building names and addresses are allocated by
B-
Architect Signage Building Identifier B 16.12.01 Planning Information and Analytics and is used in Monash Accounting and
Design Controls
Finance System (SAP), Timetables (Room Booking system for teaching),
BAS (Building Automation system), BEIMS (CRM system), Remedy (IT asset
allocation) and Security monitoring systems.
Monash has a university-wide room/space database that maintains rooms as
a unique identifier of all spaces. This room database tracks the occupying
Department or Faculty, number of occupants, room use, quality and many
other indicators used for maintenance, space charging, room bookings, asset
locations, security etc. Therefore all room numbering has to be approved or
B-
Architect Signage Building Identifier B 16.12.02 agreed by the Planning Information and Analytics team as they maintain this
Design Controls
database and room numbers. The room numbering Guideline describes how
room numbers are determined. The consultants are requested to provide
CAD/PDF proposed plan by the Project Officer at Tender stage to Planning
Information Team for Room Numbering to the new spaces and inform PIA
everytime a major change absorbed in the room layout.
B- Building and Room numbering must be approved by the Planning Information and
Design Controls Room Numbering Analytics team and incorporated into the drawing by construction stage.
All documentation must be provided in electronic formats. For documents

other than drawings, Microsoft Word and Excel formats should be provided.
B- Documentation & Architectural drawings must also be provided in AutoCAD (DWG) format for
Architect General B 17.01
Design Controls Drawings updating of the current University CAD floor plans that are needed to maintain
room database, Monash maps, lab certifications, building certifications,
evacuation diagrams, way finding etc.
All design documentation (with drawings) and for construction documentation
(with drawings) must be issued to the University Project Manager/Coordinator
Supplier Shop
B- Documentation & for comment, prior to issue for Quotation or Tender or construction
Contractor Documentation & B 17.02
Design Controls Drawings (respectively) in both CAD and PDF format. Any change made during
Drawings
construction must be issued to University Project Manager/Coordinator for
information and comment.
The electronic files submitted must:
- be transmitted via a file sharing system or be submitted on a CD or DVD to
the Buildings and Property Division
B- Documentation & - be grouped by discipline in separate directories, i.e. architectural,
Architect CAD Drawings B 17.03.01
Design Controls Drawings mechanical, electrical, etc.
- be assigned electronic file names that match the hard copy drawing names
(see 17.03.02)
- be in AutoCAD 2012 or earlier version.
The Monash University naming convention for CAD Drawings must be
followed, containing the following fields – CL 40 01 A 1234 2 16102008 2008
Description – where the fields shown from left to right are as follows:
- Campus Code (2 digit - alpha characters, eg. CL)
- Building Number (2 digit - numerical characters, e.g. 40)
B- Documentation & - Floor Level (gnd or 2 digit, depending on campus, e.g. gnd or 01)
Design Controls Drawings - Discipline Code (up to 2 alpha, e.g. ‘A’ for architectural)
- Drawing Number (4 digit, e.g. 1234)
- Revision (1 digit, e.g. 2)
- Date of revision (8 digit, day, month, year, e.g. 16102008)
- Year of construction (4 digit, e.g. 2008)
- A short description of content.
7

The Title block must include:
- Original issue date, which must not be changed once the drawing has been
issued
- Drawing name that follows Monash University naming convention (see
B- Documentation &
Architect CAD Drawings B 17.03.03 17.03.02)
Design Controls Drawings
- Drawing phase (e.g., For Construction, As Built, etc.)
- Consultant/s or general contractor/s involved in the project
(contractors/consultants may add their company logo as an image, but
business name and address must be displayed as text).
The electronic drawing files submitted must:
- be drawn to current construction drawing standards and be dimensionally
accurate. Drawings marked ‘Not to scale’ are not acceptable.
- be drawn in Model Space and the entities within the drawings must have
colours and line types set to BYLAYER
- be purged of all unnecessary data including unused layers, line types,
blocks, fonts and entities
- not include Xrefs and be bound unless they are e-transmitted. If drawings
are e-transmitted, they should contain all the base plans needed to view the
drawing elements, or they will be invalid.
- have line style, line thickness or symbols, and all symbol fonts libraries
B- Documentation &
Architect CAD Drawings B 17.03.04 included in the supplied data (if not included in the standard AutoCAD
installation)
- have Colour Dependent Plot Style Tables (CTB) provided with each drawing
submission
- have overall plans, sections and elevations drawn in actual (full) size in
Model Space (1:1), so that true distance will be reported in any enquiry of any
drawing item
- contain only one floor plan of a building per building plan CAD drawing file
(**.dwg). Multiple floor plans on one drawing file are not acceptable.
- have entities in all Blocks within a CAD drawing file drawn on LAYER 0 and
inserted into their discipline layer.
Monash University can provide a Detailed Drawing Standard if required.
All drawings sets must utilise a consistent, relevant object-based layering
system that uses plain language naming conventions, so that the type of
B- Documentation & object on each layer is clearly understood, i.e., whether a particular drawing
Design Controls Drawings object is part of the ceiling or floor. The number of layers used in a drawing
must range between 10-20 main layers for standard construction drawings.
Any drawings with more than 60 total layers will not be accepted.
As Built CAD drawing files produced from BIM models must comply with the
drawing requirements above before submission. We will not accept pure
B- Documentation &
Architect CAD Drawings B 17.03.06 export drawings that haven’t been ‘cleaned up’. All 2-D BIM-exported
drawings must be flattened with accurate and ‘unbroken’ linework and closed
polylines.
For projects that are developed in BIM software, a copy of the federated
model (including all disciplines such as Mechanical, Hydraulic and Electrical)
B- Documentation &
Architect BIM Files B 17.04 must be handed over as part of the documentation deliverables, in REVIT
format (unless otherwise agreed). BIM documentation is a mandatory
handover requirement for all large-scale new build projects.
Australia now uses the GDA94 datum (Geocentric Datum of Australia 1994)
for latitude / longitude and the MGA94 map grid (Map Grid of Australia 1994)
B- Documentation &
Architect GIS Files B 17.05.01 for UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator) coordinates. The UTM Zone 55
applies for the locations of Monash University’s campuses at Clayton,
Caulfield, Parkville and Peninsula.
The use of GPS positioning and measurements of new buildings and services
B- Documentation & relative to existing buildings or other services is not acceptable since
Architect GIS Files B 17.05.02
Design Controls Drawings buildings and services may be removed or roads redirected in time leaving
these reference dimensions irrelevant.
All constructed underground and above ground services must be mapped
accurately on the Campus Site Plan CAD drawing with coordinates obtained
B- Documentation & using GPS equipment of 50mm horizontal accuracy and converted to the
Architect GIS Files B 17.05.03
Design Controls Drawings GDA94 coordinate system (Easting and Northing) to minimise the risk of
accidental disruption of services, damage and injury in the process of
maintenance and building works.
All external above-ground features must be recorded by a licensed surveyor
B- Documentation &
Architect GIS Files B 17.05.04 who must follow the layer naming convention outlined in the Monash
University CAD Standards (which can be provided on request).
CAD
B- Documentation & Contractors/consultants must provide asset information in a spreadsheet to
Architect Drawings/GIS B 17.06
Design Controls Drawings complement all CAD-drawn service elements.
Files
Ensure the works are done in accordance with AIRAH DA 27 (refer to CIBSE
Project B- Commissioning &
Standards B 18.01 Commissioning Codes or ASHRAE Commissioning Guideline 1-1996 for
Manager Design Controls Handover
mechanical services only).
Independent
Use an Independent Review-Commissioning Agent (IR-CA) for technical
Project B- Commissioning & Review-
B 18.02 design review, pre-commissioning, commissioning and quality monitoring of
Manager Design Controls Handover Commissioning
all building services (BMS, mechanical, electrical and hydraulic).
Agent (IR-CA)
All requirements outlined in the BPD Handover Requirements checklist must
be included as part of the handover package for project closeout, including
Project B- Commissioning & BPD Handover
B 18.03 O&M Manuals, assets lists, As Built drawings etc. All requirements must be BPD Handover Requirements
Manager Design Controls Handover Requirements
provided six (6) months before the end of DLP to a central location for access
by all BPD departments.
A commissioning plan must be produced for all building services, for review,
Project B- Commissioning & Commissioning at completion of design documentation. The design intention of each system
B 18.04
Manager Design Controls Handover Plan must be outlined to inform the commissioning process of how systems are
intended to function.
Project B- Commissioning & University representatives (Projects and/or Engineering and Sustainability
Witness Testing B 18.05
Manager Design Controls Handover Planners) must be present at witness testing for all systems.
8

Final commissioning results must be approved by the representative from
Project B- Commissioning & Commissioning Services and/or Planning team prior to granting of practical completion. The
B 18.06
Manager Design Controls Handover Results commissioning results must be collated and form a section in the Operation &
Maintenance Manual.
B- Commissioning & Essential Fire The essential fire safety measures, as detailed by the Occupancy Permit,
Contractor B 18.07
Design Controls Handover Safety Measures must be supplied in the Manuals.
B- Commissioning & The head contractor must organise supplier induction session(s) with
Contractor Induction Sessions B 18.08
Design Controls Handover operators and technical staff from the University.
During the Defects Liability Period the contractor must have qualified and
B- Commissioning & Defects Liability
Contractor B 18.09 suitably equipped service staff available, to respond to defective items in the
Design Controls Handover Period
agreed response times documented.
B- All building fabric, structural and service components must be readily
Architect Maintenance General B 19.01
Design Controls accessible and must not be labour intensive to repair/maintain.
The responsibility for undertaking and recording of statutory and preventative *Section B - Design Controls - Item
maintenance during the DLP for newly constructed buildings is borne by the B 19.04
B- New Construction
Contractor Maintenance B 19.02 head building contractor. The minimum requirements for statutory and
Design Controls DLP
preventative maintenance are detailed in *Section B - Design Controls - Item *Section B - Design Controls - Item
B 19.04 and B 19.05 respectively. Annual Certification to be provided B 19.05
In a part building refurbishment or extension, Statutory maintenance during
the DLP must be performed under the University’s existing statutory
Building
B- maintenance contract. The preventative maintenance activities remain the *Section B - Design Controls - Item
Contractor Maintenance Refurbishment B 19.03
Design Controls responsibility of the head building contractor. The minimum requirements for B 19.05
DLP
preventative maintenance are detailed in *Section B - Design Controls - Item
B 19.05
The contractor is required to complete the relevant Univerversity Regulatory
Compliance Monitoring System (RCMS) logs for each of the services. Failure
to fill in and submit the relevant log for each of the services will render the test
incomplete. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure all records are
received by the RCMS. At the expense of each new building project, RCMS
B- Statutory
Contractor Maintenance B 19.04 logs are required to be supplied and utilised for the statutory services and/or
Design Controls Maintenance
Essential Fire Safety system. The University RCMS must be utilised for the
duration of the 12 month defect liability period, delivering full compliance with
the University’s statutory obligations. 12 monthly statutory testing items are to
be included in all defects liability periods. Copies/Certification is to be
provided on completion of each test.
Preventative maintenance during the DLP must be performed in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and industry best practice as a
B- Preventative minimum level. Service sheets for these Preventative maintenance activities
Contractor Maintenance B 19.05
Design Controls Maintenance must remain on-site and a complete set of client copies of the services sheets
provided and are required for final certification of the project upon successful
completion of the DLP.
The requirements for building facilities will be outlined in the Project Brief,
with specific requirements to be set and approved by the BPD Strategic
C-
Planning and Information Team. Ensure that the design of all relevant spaces
Architect Building General C 01
meet the conditions set by the relevant Strategic Planning and Information
Facilities
Coordinator, with consideration of the general requirements of any space
types mentioned in Section C - Building Facilities.
Ensure all new atria and balconies are designed to maximise benefits whilst
C- Foyers & minimising possible impacts of heat loss/gain, wind tunnel effects/draughts
Atria and
Architect Building General Spaces Common C 02.01.01 from prevailing winds, impersonal building scale, etc. Undertake a full risk
Balconies
Facilities Areas assessment for balconies to determine if area must be controlled (secure), or
uncontrolled.
Atria and balconies may be introduced as part of the design brief, by
agreement, where:
- They will contribute to the internal environmental quality of the building, with
respect to provision of shade, natural/day lighting, passive ventilation, areas
for social interaction and physical connectivity, etc.
- The overall site and building footprint will support such a feature, i.e. where
deep floor plates are required/proposed.
- The location and design is aligned with the campus masterplan, in
particular, movement networks and meeting places.
- The design is in keeping with the campus character and building image /
C- Foyers & intent.
Atria and
Architect Building General Spaces Common C 02.01.02 - The appropriate building modelling has been undertaken by a suitably
Balconies
Facilities Areas qualified consultant, and confirms acceptable thermal comfort and natural
lighting levels will be achieved within the space, using passive (ideal) or
mixed mode means.
- The design considers its obligations with respect to OH&S requirements and
does not compromise the safety of occupants or workers, including accidental
and / or wilful harm or injury, in the use of the space/s provided.
- The ease / cost of maintenance of glazing and other high level elements and
materials are fully considered, and shown in the life cycle costing forecast.
- Planters, planting species and watering systems, are agreed with the
university project representative.
- Complete technical details of any custom equipment is provided.
C- Foyers &
Atria and Balconies: undertake full risk assessment, determine if area must be
Architect Building General Spaces Common C 02.01.03
Balconies controlled (secure), or uncontrolled.
Facilities Areas
Ensure foyer locations are aligned with the Masterplan and located adjacent
to the primary pedestrian pathways. As foyers are often large, open spaces
with expanses of glazing and immediate access to the outdoors, heat loss
C- Foyers &
can be an issue, particularly where airlocks are insufficient or not present at
Architect Building General Spaces Foyers Common C 02.02.01
all. Ensure foyers are appropriately scaled and sufficiently designed to negate
Facilities Areas
the need for excessive mechanical heating and cooling. Where mechanical
systems are specified, ensure air locks are designed with sufficient clearance
to minimise transfer of treated air to the outdoors.
9

C- Foyers & Ensure access to foyers is DDA compliant. In addition provide a different floor
Architect Building General Spaces Foyers Common C 02.02.02 surface/colour (e.g. carpet) such that it leads visitors to the reception area or
Facilities Areas customer service point, as the first point of call.
C- Foyers &
Determine pedestrian numbers at briefing stage. Ensure waiting and inquiry
areas are appropriately sized.
Facilities Areas
C- Foyers & Where requested allow for display facilities to accommodate:

Architect Building General Spaces Foyers Common C 02.02.04 - examples of work/research, memorabilia, models and the like,
Facilities Areas - promotional/information literature, posters etc.
C- Foyers &
Provide furniture/equipment as required e.g. seating, waste receptacles, and
a chilled water dispenser.
Facilities Areas
C- Foyers &
Architect Building General Spaces Foyers Common C 02.02.06 Provide an appropriate cabinet to display required compliance data.
Facilities Areas
C- Foyers &
Architect Building General Spaces Foyers Common C 02.02.07 Avoid low clearances created by stairs and other features.
Facilities Areas
C-
Architect Building General Spaces Vestibules Vestibules C 02.03 Size to facilitate disabled access, with unobstructed wall space at entrances.
Facilities
For corridors:
- Size to accommodate anticipated volumes of pedestrian movements and
adjacent room functionality.
- Width: use following dimensions as a minimum guide:
- Arterial & Teaching - 2100 mm
- Main Corridors - 1500 mm,
C- Foyers &
Corridors & - Secondary Corridors - 1200 mm.
Architect Building General Spaces Common C 02.04
Circulation - Length: if greater than 100 m, to provide rest stops and seating.
Facilities Areas
- Protrusions and/or objects: avoid or recess
- Wheelchairs: widths and passing places comply with DDA Gradients: to be
less than 1:20.
- Ambulatory aids: provide to facilitate movement. Protection to surfaces:
provide where damage is likely i.e. trolleys minimum clear headroom comply
with BCA.
For toilets and amenities:
- Generally: Provide appropriately sized and fitted accessible toilets to all
buildings
- Size: to be compliant with DDA and building occupant numbers.
C- - Location: close to main circulation space.
Toilets &
Architect Building General Spaces Toilets C 02.05.01 - Distance: to any accessible toilet must not exceed 120 m.
Amenities
Facilities - Gender: Individual accessible toilets to be unisex.
- Accessible Shower: Provide to each toilet group within each building,
(minimum one unisex compartment at ground level).
- Configuration: ensure sight lines at entrances create privacy (including the
siting of mirrors).
Toilets and amenities must be energy efficient, minimise water and resource
C-
Toilets & consumption, incorporate natural light and ventilation where possible. Utilise
Architect Building General Spaces Toilets C 02.05.02
Amenities energy efficient fittings and fixtures. Capitalise on opportunities to harvest
Facilities
rainwater for flushing.
Lighting in accordance with minimum levels of the relevant Australian
C- Standard. High quality LED luminaires in conjunction with occupancy and
Toilets &
Architect Building General Spaces Toilets C 02.05.03 acoustic sensors with local switching. Use of natural light and ventilation
Amenities
Facilities where possible is desirable. Avoid lighting designs/layouts that have high
energy demands.
For tea preparation areas, the following conditions apply:
- Site according to floor plate and minimise occupant journey times, where
possible site adjacent to other wet areas e.g. amenities.
- Materials to ensure moisture resistant/impervious substrates and finishes
are used adjacent to wet areas.
C-
Kitchen/ - Allow sink, benches and other equipment as required and ‘signed off’ in
Architect Building General Spaces Tea Preparation C 02.06
Kitchenettes brief
Facilities
- Provide shelving at heights for a wheelchair user access.
- Tea rooms for the use of 6 or more people must use a programmable
Boiling Water Unit (Zip Hydroboil), programmed to shut down during
unoccupied periods.
- A kettle is sufficient for low-use tea rooms
C- The requirements for parenting and sick rooms are set by the BPD Strategic
Parenting / Sick Parenting/
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.07 Planning and Information team, where specific requirements and approval
Rooms Sick Rooms
Facilities must be sought from.
When lockers and showers are required by the project brief, provide sufficient
quantity of lockers and showers to meet the needs of building occupants
C- requiring change or bag storage facilities, in a secure location. Ensure
Lockers &
Architect Building General Spaces Toilets C 02.08 electronic access lockers and in locations where people change clothes,
Showers
Facilities provide a seat adjacent to the lockers. Unisex shower facilities off the general
access corridor should be considered, with appropriate fittings in the shower
recesses.
When storage and cleaner rooms are required by the project brief, provide a
storeroom sized to accommodate spare furniture and audio visual aids and
C- other housekeeping items. Provide minimum one cleaner’s room per floor
Storage & Cleaners
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.09 min. 4m² with cleaner's sink and shelving, provide hot and cold water taps.
Cleaners Rooms Room
Facilities Provide minimum one storage room per bldg min. 12m² for storage of
cleaning items toilet rolls/paper towels/chemicals and equipment including
shelving.
10

Plant rooms must provide protection for equipment from:
C-
Plant Rooms / Plant Room/ - mechanical damage;
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.10.01
Enclosures Enclosure - entry by unauthorized personnel;
Facilities
- weather
The plant rooms are to be located at roof top or basement level of the
C-
Plant Rooms / Plant Room/ building, avoiding the main body of the building where possible. Also locate
Enclosures Enclosure plant room close to most direct point of vehicular access, avoid extensive
Facilities
service road connections.
C-
Plant Rooms / Plant Room/ Basement plant rooms must minimise the possibility of flooding. Provide a
Enclosures Enclosure pump pit, alarmed to BAS. Pit pump out directed to sewer.
Facilities
The plant room layout at the design stage must provide for future expansion if
C-
Plant Rooms / Plant Room/ required. Sizing must accommodate all mechanical, electrical and other plant.
Enclosures Enclosure Allow sufficient space for additional equipment, for perceived functionality
Facilities
during the life cycle of the building.
C- Allow adequate space for removal and maintenance of equipment in
Plant Rooms / Plant Room/
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.10.05 accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Where permitted by the
Enclosures Enclosure
Facilities manufacturer's these access spaces may ‘overlap’.
Direct access from corridors to roof areas, plant rooms, tunnels etc. must be
C- provided where possible. Where plant rooms are built on a number of levels,
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.10.06 compliant access ladders with safety cages, must be provided. All access
Facilities clearances shall permit existing and future equipment to be removed and
installed.
C-
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.10.07 Ground Level Roller door and / or full door access must be provided.
Facilities
C- Provision for lifting of equipment must be made in elevated plant rooms, for
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.10.08 hatches and lifting equipment to facilitate conveyance of equipment to
Facilities ground.
C-
Plant Rooms / Plant Room/ Full concrete plinths must be provided under all floor mounted equipment.
Enclosures Enclosure Partial concrete pads are not permitted.
Facilities
C- Floors must be graded to drain and provided with floor outlets not less than
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.10.10 80 mm diameter, and have 100 mm high coved upstands to the perimeter
Facilities walls to permit washing down.
C-
Plant Rooms / Plant Room/ Floor finishes must be sealed against spillages and flooding by approved
Enclosures Enclosure building methods with a seamless flooring coating system.
Facilities
Plant rooms must be designed such that the noise level, when measured with
C- all equipment operating under full load, does not exceed the current exposure
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.10.12 standard, less 3DbA. Where this cannot be achieved the University Project
Facilities manager/Coordinator must be consulted, and the performance criteria agreed
in writing.
Plant room signage required to identify room function and notify restricted
access. Signage must be located on door(s) with the following message:
NO ENTRY
C-
Plant Rooms / Plant Room/ Authorised Personnel Only
Enclosures Enclosure Contact Buildings & Property Division
Facilities
9905 1200
or in accordance with Safety Regulations and as advised by Monash Project
Manager/Coordinator and Asset Planning Engineer.
The plant must have:

- Floor grates (Use chrome plate on brass),
C-
Plant Rooms / Plant Room/ - Water tap,
Enclosures Enclosure - Double GPO’s,
Facilities
- The main plant room must have a 3 phase power outlet,
- Light must be operated via wall switch
C- All Plant rooms must be fitted with visual warning equipment connected to the
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.10.15 Emergency Warning Intercommunications System or Fire Indicator panel as
Facilities appropriate.
C-
Plant Room/ The useable area of service riser’s must be designed 30% oversized to
Architect Building General Spaces Service Cores C 02.11.01
Enclosure accommodate future expansion of services.
Facilities
C- Services access to be located at regular intervals, and at any point where
Plant Room/
Architect Building General Spaces Service Cores C 02.11.02 regular maintenance is required. Provide minimum openings of 600 mm x 600
Enclosure
Facilities mm.
C-
Plant Room/ Duct covers must be durable, easily cleaned and secure where required, and
Enclosure easily removed for access without damage to the cover or adjacent surfaces.
Facilities
C- Conduits where cabling may potentially prove difficult to be pulled through,
Plant Room/
Architect Building General Spaces Service Cores C 02.11.04 especially around bends, straight access, with large radius curves and
Enclosure
Facilities without obstructions, must be provided.
C-
Plant Room/ New buildings must be connected to adjoining buildings by crawl culverts or
Enclosure tunnels for the distribution of services
Facilities
11

For delivery bays:
- Materials: must minimise visual impact, use materials that match or are
sympathetic to building.
- Location: Site discreetly away from the Main Entry, and as close as
C-
possible to existing service routes, minimise construction of new service
Architect Building General Spaces Delivery Bay C 02.12
roads.
Facilities
- Loading dock: Where required from dock to facilitate handling of goods in a
safe manner.
- Security: Provide secure enclosure / measures, such that unauthorised
persons may not enter.
For rubbish removal:
- Mandatory Requirement: Easy removal of waste is mandatory.
- Location: Site away from main entry and near the service entrance.
- Waste bins: Allow adequate provision for - recyclable waste, & refuse
C- (include one of each for each floor, if no lift is provided).
Architect Building General Spaces Rubbish Removal C 02.13 - University recycling and waste management requirements: must be
Facilities included in all projects.
- Security: all bins must be secured to prevent theft or vandalism.
- Hazardous waste bins: must all be secured to prevent theft or vandalism
- Drainage: from waste holding and storage areas must be discharged to
sewer.
C-
Ensure adequate park and change facilities exist at all buildings and
Architect Building General Spaces Bicycles C 02.14.01
configure supporting infrastructure to enable cycling ‘to the door’.
Facilities
C- Provide storage facilities at convenient locations ideally close to entrances
Architect Building General Spaces Bicycles C 02.14.02 and undercover to each building, based on 1 bicycle bay per 1,000 m² of floor
Facilities area, and adequately designed to prevent theft.
C-
Bike rails to be flat top, visible, well lit protected from the weather and meet
the requirements of class 3 (secure) parking facilities of AS 2890.3.
Facilities
C-
Architect Building General Spaces Bicycles C 02.14.04 Rails to be spaced a minimum 1 m apart and 1 m from any wall.
Facilities
The University Project manager/Coordinator with the Campus Design Quality
C-
& Planning team will confirm the number of security bicycle lockers required.
Shower and change facilities must be considered for cyclists for all new
Facilities
building developments.
Indoor
C- Centralised car parking facilities are required over building specific solutions.
Carparks &
Architect Building General Spaces Car Parking C 02.15.01 Design to each campus plan noting the requirements of the relevant Town
External
Facilities Planning overlay and campus master plan.
Carparks
Indoor
C-
Carparks & Allow sufficient visitor, loading and disabled bays, according to DDA, BCA &
Architect Building General Spaces Car Parking C 02.15.02
External building occupancy
Facilities
Carparks
C- Rainwater harvesting and reuse must be considered for all projects and
Rainwater Run-off
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.16.01 applied where feasible. Ensure system design allows for future upgrade and
& Harvesting
Facilities expansion. Opportunities to integrate education must be explored.
An underground water harvesting reservoir must be provided, such that it
captures and distributes the maximum amount of dispersed runoff rainwater.
C-
Rainwater Run-off Pre-filtering of water to ensure that storage facilities do not become fouled by
& Harvesting organic and other matter is essential and preferred to any post-storage
Facilities
treatment. Requirements for post-storage treatment will be determined on a
case-by-case basis and will be dependent on the end use of the water.
C-
Rainwater Run-off Provision for interconnection with other on-site storages and reticulation must
& Harvesting be planned for all installations.
Facilities
C- Hard Standing - Where required provide sufficient hard standing at base of building, such that
Architect Building General Spaces Cleaning & C 02.17 it supports the weight of any vehicle / device required to clean, maintain,
Facilities Maintenance repair the building’s exterior, and gives safe access to all parts of the façade.
Locate out of ‘line of sight’, when viewed from ground level. Ensure safe
C-
Antennae, Satellite access via walkways for maintenance. Compliance with the relevant
Architect Building General Spaces C 02.18
Dishes etc. regulations and procedures with respect to radiation must be achieved.
Facilities
Approval must be sought by the Campus Design Quality & Planning team.
Offices:
Ceilings (suspended) preferred, module 1200 x 600mm, (refer section G
schedules).
Screens (partitions) - performance: specify to meet loading & noise reduction
requirements.
Screens (partitions) - type: solid glazed or half glazed as required.
Screens (partitions) - finishes: paint approximately 20% may be contrast
colour, (refer section G schedules), see also Doors.
C- Doors (type) : Hinged or sliding, solid painted, fully or partially glazed as
Architect Building Workplaces Offices Offices C 03 agreed.
Facilities Paint: if a contrast colour is required, apply to the door rather than the screen/
partition.
Noise reduction: must meet performance requirements lay insulation above
ceiling
Furniture: must be compatible with that in flexible space, and must comply
with the Strategic Procurement web-site ‘How to Buy Guide’ (refer link below):
http://intranet.monash.edu.au/finance/buy/index.html must be compatible with
that in flexible space
Flooring - finish: must be carpet tiles (refer section G schedules).
12

Meeting & Conference Rooms:
Use: small, medium and large meetings, seminars, audio visual
presentations, video conferencing.
Ownership: Size & Location are to comply with the University’s Space
Management Policy.
schedules), feature ceilings may be included.
requirements.
Screens ( partitions) - type: solid, glazed or half glazed as required.
C- Meeting &
Architect Building Shared Facilities Conference Offices C 04.01
Facilities Rooms
Doors (type) : Hinged or sliding, solid painted, fully or partially glazed as
agreed.
Paint: if a contrast colour is required, apply to the door rather than the screen/
partition. Paints must be low VOC.
ceiling
Furniture: must comply with the Strategic Procurement web-site ‘How to Buy
Guide’ (refer link below):
http://intranet.monash.edu.au/finance/buy/index.html
Quiet Rooms
Ownership: non-assigned
Use: for persons in flexible zones providing acoustic separation to facilitate
intense individual work or sensitive telephone calls.
Size & Location: must comply with the University’s Space Management
Policy.
requirements.
C- Screens ( partitions) - type: solid, glazed or half glazed as required.
Architect Building Shared Facilities Quiet Rooms Offices C 04.02 Screens (partitions) - finishes: paint approximately 20% may be contrast
Facilities colour, (refer section G schedules), see also Doors.
agreed.
partition.
ceiling
Furniture: desk, task chair - note: if room size permits it may also be used for
small short meetings, in which case include meeting chair(s).
Break-out Spaces
Use: work and social interaction, ad hoc / informal meetings, an alternative
temporary workplace, and the consumption of meals and refreshments.
Location: adjacent natural light, conference / meeting spaces (useful for
refreshment breaks). Consider noise generated within area, and possible
disturbance to nearby work zones.
Finishes, materials and colours: vary and provide different environment from
main workplace zones.
C- Screens (partitions) - performance: specify to meet loading & noise reduction
Kitchen/
Architect Building Shared Facilities Break-out Spaces C 04.03 requirements.
Kitchenettes
Facilities Screens ( partitions) - type: solid, glazed or half glazed as required.
required.
partition.
ceiling
Flooring - finish: to general areas must be carpet tiles (refer section G
schedules). To wet areas must be resilient.
Utility/Photocopy rooms :
Use: dedicated for stationery, photocopying, stores, faxes, printers and the
like.
Configuration: enclose to minimise disruption to work-zones.
Ceilings (suspended): must match main work-zones.
C-
Utility & Photocopy Screens (partitions) – performance: must meet noise reduction & imposed
Architect Building Shared Facilities Offices C 04.04
Rooms load requirements.
Facilities
Flooring – finish: resilient or carpet tiles, subject to anticipated use.
Security: provide locking as required.
Ventilation: must meet Australian Standard.
Equipment: as agreed (note items to be provided as part of building contract
to be clearly identified at early stage of briefing).
13

Filing Rooms/Spaces:
Use: generally shared and reserved for records to be accessed by team or
departmental members.
Location: site to inner floor areas and as close as possible to the centre of
work-zones to minimise travel distances.
Heavy loads: if imposed (e.g. compactus) the advice of a structural engineer
must be sought. The ability of the structure to withstand the loadings may
C-
Filing Rooms & define the location of the filing / compactus unit(s).
Architect Building Shared Facilities Offices C 04.05
Spaces Ceilings (suspended): to match main work-zones.
Facilities
Screens (partitions) – performance must meet agreed performance outcomes
including imposed loads.
Flooring- finish: to be resilient finish or carpet tiles subject to anticipated use.
In built joinery: must be avoided, if dispensation is granted, design to be
modular and relocatable.
Furniture: must be modular / freestanding / relocatable units for ongoing
flexibility.
Storage space within the University is at a premium. Stakeholders must have
a clearly defined storage policy that avoids ‘hoarding’. The Architect must
have a clear understanding of the storage policy, and specify the safest and
most space efficient system to contain the range / variety of items to be
stored.
- Subject to adequate circulation space, rooms may be irregular shapes, to
C- provide regular planning zones to remaining floor.
Architect Building Shared Facilities Storage Offices C 04.06 - Ceilings to match main work-zones.
Facilities - Screens (partitions) to meet agreed performance outcome (subject to
imposed loads).
- Flooring to be resilient finish or carpet tiles subject to anticipated use.
- In built joinery must be avoided, if included design to be modular and
relocatable.
- Furniture to be Modular freestanding / relocatable units for ongoing
flexibility.
C- Reception, mail room, library, information display areas are specific to each
Architect Building Shared Facilities Other Spaces Offices C 04.07 project, and must be as briefed and agreed with the Strategic Planning &
Facilities Information team.
Design standards for generic requirements for bench height, bench spacing
and design, fume cupboards, laminar flow hoods, safety showers and
C-
Research and eyewash fountains, basins, sinks, gas reticulation, storage (including
Architect Building Design Principles Labs C 05.01
Laboratory Rooms hazardous materials and waste) and other specific requirements for particular
Facilities
types of science laboratory, and animal holding facilities are to be discussed
with the occupants and/or key stakeholders.
Laboratories in Monash University must be of the following types:
- Wet Labs - which utilise, test and analyse chemicals, drugs or other
biological matter,
C- - Dry Labs - which contain dry-stored materials, electronics and/or large
Research and Types of
Architect Building Labs C 05.02 instruments,
Laboratory Rooms Laboratory
Facilities - Clinical Labs - which involve work with infectious agents, and typically
require higher levels of containment,
- Teaching Labs - which require space for teaching equipment, and typically
hold less instrumentation.
All opportunities to minimise energy consumption must be explored. These
C- include but are not limited to: fume cupboard design and specification (VAV
Research and Energy
Architect Building Labs C 05.03.01 are preferred), minimisation of tempered air supply to fume hoods, HVAC
Laboratory Rooms Management
Facilities design, cool and hot room location and design and lighting design
consideration that must be addressed.
C- The placement of freezers and other heat-generating appliances and the
Research and Energy
Architect Building Labs C 05.03.02 necessary extraction of the heat produced by such appliances is a significant
Laboratory Rooms Management
Facilities design consideration to be addressed.
C-
Research and
Architect Building Elements Labs C 05.04.01 Preparation space must be 25% of the total laboratory area.
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities
C-
Research and
Architect Building Elements Labs C 05.04.02 Use island benches.
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities
C-
Research and
Architect Building Elements Labs C 05.04.03 Light fittings to be flush with ceiling.
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities
C-
Research and
Architect Building Elements Labs C 05.04.04 Provide a residual current device to power outlets.
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities
C-
Research and
Architect Building Elements Labs C 05.04.05 Reticulate power from above working areas.
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities
C-
Research and Ensure emergency egress is not obstructed by any equipment or dangerous
Architect Building Elements Labs C 05.04.06
Laboratory Rooms goods storage cabinets.
Facilities
C-
Research and
Architect Building Elements Labs C 05.04.07 Provide recycle bins for paper and other recyclables to all rooms.
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities
Provide emergency stop button and gas isolation valves adjacent to the
C- laboratory exit for emergency laboratory isolations. Ensure the emergency
Research and
Architect Building Elements Labs C 05.04.08 laboratory isolation button can only be released to reinstate the power via a
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities controlled lockout process (for example: a key is required to release the
button and re-instate the power).
14

C- The provision of adjustable or of varied height benches to accommodate

Research and
Architect Building Elements Labs C 05.04.09 standing and seated users of all abilities and range of human dimensions
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities should be considered and discussed with key stakeholders.
C-
Research and Work surfaces to have equipment, shelves within the zone of reach for a
Laboratory Rooms seated user.
Facilities
C-
Research and Provide shelving at heights for a wheelchair user to reach a range of
Laboratory Rooms equipment needed for laboratory work.
Facilities
C- Walls, ceilings and floors to be impermeable to liquids, slip resistant and

Research and
Architect Building Elements Labs C 05.04.12 suitable for chemicals, and resistant to damage from impact and temperature
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities variation.
Safety Stations:
- Site at the entrance to each main laboratory, or laboratory complex.
- The safety shower and actuating mechanisms, must be positioned such
Safety Stations inc
C- that the approach is unimpeded.
Research and Safety Showers &
Architect Building Labs C 05.05 - Emergency eye washes are to be permanently fixed aerated type, which
Laboratory Rooms Emergency Eye
Facilities can be foot operated without using hands
Wash
- Make provision to drain or restrain any excess water from these devices.
Water pressure testing is to be carried out to ensure the discharge is in
accordance with the specific requirements.
Gas Cylinder Storage:
- Locate store in a loading bay or discrete area away from main entry, with
C- one or more sides open to the atmosphere.
Research and Gas Cylinder
Architect Building Labs C 05.06 - Ensure segregation is provided with the necessary separation of particular
Laboratory Rooms Storage
Facilities gases, and means of securing cylinders against falling.
- Safe guard from external accidental damage and provide protection against
sunlight.
Design considerations must be confirmed with the University project
C- Radioactive manager/ coordinator and University OHS Representative. Any system
Research and
Architect Building Substance Labs C 05.07.01 capable of emitting ionizing radiation or radioactive materials shall not be
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities Storage used without the specific written permission from the University Project
representative.
C- Radioactive Any system capable of emitting ionizing radiation or radioactive materials
Research and
Architect Building Substance Labs C 05.07.02 shall not be used without the specific written permission from the University
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities Storage Project representative.
External Radiation:
- Radiation sources ( e.g. x-ray unit, sealed irradiation units etc. ) must be
carefully positioned in relation to occupied areas. Consideration must be
C- Radioactive
Research and given to possible radiation beams or scatter through roof, floor and walls.
Architect Building Substance Labs C 05.07.03
Laboratory Rooms - Suitable shielding must be used to ensure safe working conditions in
Facilities Storage
adjacent locations.
- Certification: by a radiation expert as to the adequacy of the design is
mandatory.
Contamination control must include:
- Dispensing, preparation and counting areas must be separated to avoid
cross contamination of equipment.
- Gaseous Waste must be disposed of through fume hoods, stacks or
general building ventilation.
- Arrange such that any exhaust does not re-enter the emitting or nearby
buildings.
- Non-radioactive liquid waste disposal via the normal drainage system is
permissible provided the discharge is in compliance with Trade Waste
Agreements and Radiation Regulations.
C- Radioactive - Radioactive liquid waste disposal via trade waste can only be done
Research and
Architect Building Substance Labs C 05.07.04 provided Health Department approval has been granted and provided under
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities Storage the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 and provided trade waste
acceptance criteria has been met. This should only occur after consultation
with the Universdity's Radiation Protection Officer and Sustainabulity and
Compliance Officer. .
- Ensure adequate numbers of sinks and supplies of running water are
provided in radioisotope laboratories.
- Radioactive Waste storage facilities needed, will depend on the nature and
quantity of the materials handled.
- Storage of highly radioactive sources require discussions with the
University OHS Representative prior to nomination or inclusion in building
design.
15

Laboratory effluent, chemical residues from equipment and glassware

cleaning, autoclave and centrifuge drainage, should be discharged to sewer
via approved trade waste treatment apparatus in compliance with the
University's various Trade Waste Agreements with the relevant Water
Authority.
C- Yarra Valley Water - Clayton Campus and associated facilities.
Research and
Architect Building Trade waste Labs C 05.07.05 City West Water - Parkville and City locations north of the Yarra
Laboratory Rooms
Facilities South East Water - Caulfield, Peninsula and City locations south of the Yarra.
The Sustainability Compliance and Integration officer should be made aware

of all alterations and additions to trade waste fixtures and treatment
apparatus to allow for updating of the University's Trade Waste Agreements
with the relevant Water Authority.
General design to facilitate best practice learning techniques, teaching space

design must address:
- Configuration to provide sufficient access, circulation and clear sight-lines,
- Ambience forms, colours and finishes must be aesthetically pleasing and
selected to enhance the overall space,
- Light colours must avoid glare to projection screens and writing boards.
Note: darker colours may be preferable. Architects must select colours in
consultation with the University,
C-
Lecture - Chairs to be comfortable (preferably ergonomic) and durable (fixed with
Architect Building Lecture Theatre Design Principles C 06.01.01
Theatre tablets or flexible with tables) that facilitates note taking both written and
Facilities
electronic,
- Tables must be modular shapes and sizes, construction and materials that
are durable, mechanisms that are safe to use, and permit easy re-
configuration of layouts,
- Acoustics: form and materials must address acoustic performance, provide
an appropriate hearing augmentation system,
- Lighting must be adjustable to support note taking and presentations, and
have the capacity for automated shut-off when spaces are not in use.
Lecture theatres are also required to adhere to the following conditions:

- Wall behind presentation area to be painted matt white for use for
projection.
- No air grilles, thermostats or other protrusions in projection wall.
- Provide 100% blackout capability.
C-
Lecture - Occupancy detection sensors to be utilised in conjunction with manual
Architect Building Lecture Theatre Design Principles C 06.01.02
Theatre switching for lighting and HVAC.
Facilities
- Lighting layout needs to carefully consider location of ceiling mounted data
projector and mechanical services.
- Aisle lights to be activated by movement sensors.
- Install nosings on stairs for visually impaired.
- Use only fire retardant fabrics/carpets.
Acoustics:
- All teaching spaces must be designed to meet the agreed noise reduction
performance levels that address the transference of sounds generated both
internally and externally. This must be addressed by use of overall forms and
materials to floors, walls and ceilings.
- Mid-band reverberation times, measured as RT60, must be set around 0.5
seconds for lecture theatres up to 150 seats; for larger theatres, slightly
longer times are acceptable.
C- - Ambient noise from mechanical systems and adjacent areas must be
Lecture
Architect Building Lecture Theatre Acoustics C 06.02 controlled. Where possible steady state noise levels must be limited to NR
Theatre
Facilities 30. Isolation: introduce effective insulation to assist with reduction in ambient
noise.
- Ceilings must provide resilient mounted suspended ceiling system with
insulation over to isolate low frequency sound.
- STC ratings for walls and doors must be planned to support the NR30.
Provide double sheet insulated / cavity stud drywall construction as required.
- Extend all barrier walls from slab to slab in multi-level buildings.
- Mechanical systems to provide effective noise suppression to achieve an
effective acoustic barrier treatment.
Access, Egress and Circulation:
- Design to permit ease of access and safe egress.
- BCA: exceed compliance for aisle widths, distance between aisles, egress,
seating row spacing and disabled persons access
C- - Circulation and adjacent waiting spaces must be of sufficient size to prevent
Access, Egress Lecture
Architect Building Lecture Theatre C 06.03 overcrowding / crushing as occupants depart and arrive. (Maximum
and Circulation Theatre
Facilities changeover time 2½ minutes between lectures).
- Site door(s) at, or near the rear, or away from presentation areas, such that
latecomers minimise disruption to presentations.
- Signage, ease of access / egress, amenities and other services must
consider that the general public may not be familiar with the room layout.
Facilities for Facilities for Persons with Disabling Conditions:

C-
Persons with Lecture - Access and circulation must comply with DDA code.
Architect Building Lecture Theatre C 06.04.01
Disabling Theatre - Fixed lecterns must not impede wheelchair access.
Facilities
Conditions - Floor level must be continuous to that at entry doors.
16

Wheelchairs & Hearing Loops:
- Numbers: up to 200 seats - allow space for 2 x wheelchairs, and 1 x
Facilities for additional space for each additional 100 seats or part thereof,
C-
Persons with Lecture - Location: must allow clear view of all presentation media, and must not be
Architect Building Lecture Theatre C 06.04.02
Disabling Theatre obstructed by the lectern. Site towards the centre of the front row rather than
Facilities
Conditions the side, unless obstructed by the presenter,
- Hearing Aids: must be provided for hearing augmentation system. Signs
must be provided where audio loops are active.
Support Facilities:
Foyers: must provide adjacent free ‘break-out’ and waiting / ‘crush’ spaces.
Toilets & washrooms: provide BCA compliant facilities for occupancy
numbers.
C- Displays: provide as agreed at briefing stage.
Lecture
Architect Building Lecture Theatre Support Facilities C 06.05 Secure storage: must be sufficient for tables, chairs and equipment.
Theatre
Facilities Catering Facilities: must include kitchenette/servery as agreed at the briefing
stage. Where a kitchenette/servery is not proposed, provide 15A GPO
sockets for urns, bain-maries, hot-plates and the like.
Existing Areas: where possible the refurbishment of existing rooms must
provide the facilities described above.
The requirements for flat floor teaching will be outlined in the Project Brief,
C- with specific requirements to be set and approved by the BPD Strategic
Flat Floor - Flexible Tutorial
Architect Building Design Principles C 07 Planning and Information Team. Ensure that the design of all revelant spaces
Teaching Room
Facilities meet the conditions set by the relevant Strategic Planning and Information
Coordinator.
C-
AV Control Provide lockable, ventilated, glass fronted rack for video recorder/player, DVD
Architect Building Control Room AV Control Room C 08.01.01
Room player, amplifier, computer.
Facilities
C-
AV Control
Architect Building Control Room AV Control Room C 08.01.02 Use dark colours to avoid reflectance.
Room
Facilities
C-
AV Control
Architect Building Control Room AV Control Room C 08.01.03 Provide closed extraction to heat sources.
Room
Facilities
Structural & D - All topsoil must be separated from the construction site and protected from
Civil Substructure Excavation D 01 degradation for reuse at the completion of the project. There must be no net
Engineer & Superstructure change in the volume of topsoil on the site.
All structure design and materials must meet AS/NZS1170 and other
Structural & D -
Materials and respective AS/NZS (or where not available British) Standards, the
Civil Substructure D 02
Standards requirements of testing authorities, legislative compliance and the
Engineer & Superstructure
requirements of Natspec.
Reduce the quantity of resource intensive Portland cement by substituting it
with industrial waste products such as fly-ash (typically in the order of 10-
20%), or oversized aggregate. At least 20% of all aggregates used for
Structural & D -
structural purposes must be recycled (Class 1 RCA in accordance with
Civil Substructure Material Use Concrete D 03.01
HB155-2002) or slag aggregate. Total proportions as follows:
- 60% for in-situ concrete
- 40% for precast concrete
- 30% for stressed concrete
GBCA Green Star - Design & As-
Ensure 60-90% of all steel, by mass, in the project either has a post- Built:
Structural & D -
consumer recycled content greater than 50% or is re-used.Refer to Green Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle
Civil Substructure Material Use Steel D 03.02
Star Design & As-Built: Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts; Materials - Impacts
Credit 20 - Responsible Building Materials for guidance. Materials - Credit 20 - Responsible
Building Materials
The following warranties on the following must be provided:
Structural & D -
- Basement waterproofing - 20 years
Civil Substructure General Warranty Periods D 04
- Other building waterproofing - 10 years
- Termite treatment - 1 year
Structural & D - Ensure roofs, walls and floors are constructed to minimise air leakage in
Civil Substructure Substructure Air Leakage D 05.01 accordance with Section J3.6 of the BCA - Construction of roofs, walls and
Engineer & Superstructure floors.
Ensure floor systems exceed the Total R-Value specified in Table J1.6 of the
Structural & D -
BCA. Floors with an in-slab heating or cooling system must be insulated
Civil Substructure Substructure Floor Insulation D 05.02
around the vertical edge of their perimeter with insulation having an R value
of not less than 1.0 as per Section J1.6 of the BCA - Floors.
Structural & D -
Floors must be sufficiently sealed and insulated to prevent heat loss or the
Civil Substructure Substructure Floor Sealing D 05.03
transfer of water and air that might contribute to occupant discomfort.
Structural & D -
Formwork shall comply with the Australian Standards and the Requirements
Civil Substructure Substructure Formwork D 05.04
of the Building Control Act and Regulations.
Structural & D -
Inspection of reinforcement in place must be made by the Project
Civil Substructure Substructure Reinforcement D 05.05
Architect/Structural Engineer before concrete pouring is commenced.
Structural & D - Concrete not in accordance with this specification or otherwise determined
Concrete
Civil Substructure Substructure D 05.06 defective must be removed from the site and replaced by the Contractor at
Workmanship
Engineer & Superstructure their expense.
17

Structural & D -
Paths and paved areas generally must be ruled into 600 mm x 600 mm
Civil Substructure Substructure Concrete Surfaces D 05.07
squares and are to be set out to match adjacent pavement as applicable.
Structural & D - The area supporting new concrete must be properly prepared and protected
Civil Substructure Substructure Foundations D 05.08 prior to placement of concrete. Approval by the Architect must be received
Engineer & Superstructure prior to any pour.
Structural & D -
Civil Substructure Floor Slab Tolerances D 06.01 Tolerances must be maximum ± 3 mm in a 3,000 mm straight edge.
Design for live loading to AS 1170 Part 1, with economical construction and
Structural & D -
flexibility of use taken into account. Consideration must be given to long-term
Civil Substructure Floor Slab Loading D 06.02
use and need for penetrations both initially and during the life cycle of the
building.
Floor loads in excess of AS 1170 Part 1 will only be supported in recognition
of the following specific operational requirements:
- Administration (Offices) - 5 kPa
- Compactus - Minimum of 10 kPa - In locations nominated by the Project
manager/coordinator, and sized at a minimum of 5% of total floor area per
Structural & D -
level
Civil Substructure Floor Slab Loading Exception D 06.03
- Academic, lecture rooms and laboratories - generally 3.0 kPa - Avoids
unnecessary expense while maintaining flexibility of room use.
- Libraries - 3.3 kPa - Subject to the consent of the Building
Surveyor/Certifier, an appropriate floor loading may be designed, where the
height of shelves does not exceed 2.3 m.
- Plant Rooms - 7 kPa
All floor penetrations and associated service pipes (particularly in laboratory
areas), are to be fully sealed with a flexible material. Any sealant used in an
Structural & D - internal application – exposed or concealed - must meet Total Volatile
Built:
Civil Substructure Floor Penetrations D 07 Organic Compound (TVOC) Limits as outlined in Green Star Design & As-
Indoor Environment Quality- Credit
Engineer & Superstructure Built: Indoor Environment Quality- Credit 13 - Indoor Pollutants. All floor
13 - Indoor Pollutants
penetrations must include a sleeve, finished off approximately 25mm AFL.
Install puddle flanges where appropriate.
Structural & D - Core aperture holes up to 200mm in diameter or penetrations up to 1200mm
Civil Substructure Floor Penetrations Sizing D 07.01 square must be considered at the design stage, such that they may be
Engineer & Superstructure required to selected areas at a later date.
Structural & D -
Allow to control water penetration between levels, and fire separation
Civil Substructure Floor Penetrations Water D 07.02
between compartments.
Structural & D -
Civil Substructure Floor Penetrations Fire D 07.03 Penetrations to be fire proofed in a manner which allows for flexibility.
Fall must be provided in the surface of suspended pavement and roof slabs
Structural & D -
Slabs with Bitumen to ensure that the applied bituminous membrane surface retains an ‘in-built’
Membrane Surface fall upon completion. Alternatively consider the installation of a graded
screed, prior to the membrane being laid.
Structural & D - Cove membrane to contain any seepage at junctions with walls, etc. Drainage
Slabs with Bitumen
Civil Substructure Drainage D 08.01 outlet levels must be set to provide a relief point for seepage at the
Membrane Surface
Engineer & Superstructure membrane level, as well as the normal run off at granolithic level.
Structural & D -
Slabs with Bitumen Guarantees and warranties for the membrane must be provided, in the
Civil Substructure Warranty Periods D 08.02
Membrane Surface Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
Provide floor wastes to all wet areas i.e. laboratories, toilets, plant rooms,
Structural & D -
tunnels, laundries, animal houses etc, and ensure that these are connected to
Civil Substructure Floor Wastes D 09
sewer. Floor wastes must have removable chrome plated brass grates, and
be charged with a fixture.
Structural & D - Ensure that adequate falls to floor wastes are specified and achieved. Locate
Civil Substructure Floor Wastes Falls D 09.01 floor wastes under the basin to limit ‘roll away’ for a person using a
Engineer & Superstructure wheelchair.
Structural & D -
All risers must be fitted with an approved flange and be cast into the concrete
Civil Substructure Floor Wastes Risers D 09.02
floor slab.
Structural & D - Provide deep seal (75 mm) waste traps to plant/air handling and laboratories
Civil Substructure Floor Wastes Traps D 09.03 at no less than 80 mm in diameter. Any sub-flooring membranes must be
Engineer & Superstructure graded to the puddle flange.
Structural & D - Ensure that adequate expansion joints are specified, and provided in the
Civil Substructure Expansion Joints D 10 structural design of brickwork, blockwork, stonework and concrete etc.
Engineer & Superstructure Continue joints through the surface finish where necessary.
18

Structural & D -
Test the junctions between individual buildings independently, generally a
Civil Substructure Expansion Joints Testing D 10.01
structural separation of 30mm minimum must be maintained.
All internal ground slabs must have as a minimum, a plastic sheet membrane
Structural & D -
of 300 microns turned up at the perimeter with all joints taped. Floors and
Civil Substructure Sub-base Membrane D 11
walls must be fully tanked where below grade or subject to hydrostatic
pressure.
The Structural Grid must facilitate the operational functionality, both
Structural & D -
immediately and for the perceived life cycle of the building. The agreed
Civil Substructure Structural Grid D 12
operational functionality must determine the planning and sub-planning grid
(300 mm).
Load bearing elements (columns and structural walls) must, without
Structural & D -
Flexibility in Space compromising the structural integrity of the building, including operational and
Planning equipment loading requirements, be kept to a minimum to provide flexibility in
space planning.
Structural & D - Provide adequate protection to finishes on corners and exposed edges,
Civil Substructure Protection to Finishes D 14 particularly in areas susceptible to high volumes of people and damage from
Engineer & Superstructure trolleys and the like.

Structural & D - Structural framing, roofing and facade cladding systems: ensure at least 50%
Built:
Civil Substructure Disassembly D 15 of new works are designed for disassembly. Refer to Green Star Design &
Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle
Engineer & Superstructure As-Built: Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts for guidance.
Impacts
In projects where at least 50% of the GFA is framed in structural steel, GBCA Green Star - Design & As-
demonstrate that the building’s structural requirements and integrity have Built:
D-
Structural been achieved using 20% less steel (by mass) than conventional steel Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle
Substructure Structural Steel D 16
Engineer framing. Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Materials - Credit 19 - Life Impacts
& Superstructure
Cycle Impacts; Materials - Credit 20 - Responsible Building Materials for Materials - Credit 20 - Responsible
guidance. Building Materials
Structural steel finish to be hot dipped galvanised (including all fixings). On
D-
Structural erection of steelwork all damaged surfaces, identifying marks, bolts, and
Substructure Structural Steel Finish D 16.01
Engineer attachments are to be painted or treated with an applied finish. Prior to the
& Superstructure
application of a finish surfaces are to be cleaned.
D-
Structural Where columns are exposed, treat/finish to minimize deterioration from the
Substructure Columns D 17
Engineer elements .
& Superstructure
D-
Structural
Substructure Upper Floors D 18 Refer to requirements relating to Floor Slabs.
Engineer
& Superstructure
Stairs must be designed with both adult and child safety in mind. Design
stairs as necessary to:
- meet the current Victorian Building Regulations (BCA)
- meet the requirements of the Disabilities Discrimination Act (DDA)
- include balustrade spacing smaller or not exceeding those required by BCA
and DDA
D- - meet the requirements of the Monash University Accessibility Aspiration
Structural Monash University Accessibility
Substructure Staircase D 19 Design Factors (AAD)
Engineer Aspiration Design Factors (AAD)
& Superstructure - eliminate horizontal railings where a child might climb to a dangerous point
- take into account heavy use and adopt materials, finishes and components
which enable economy of maintenance
- adopt a non-scratching material for handrails
- eliminate open risers
- locate lighting that can be reached without the need for an elevated work
platform or scaffold
Ramps must be designed as an integral element of the main building
entrance, the overall façade, and the existing and finished levels of the
surrounding area. Design ramps as necessary to:
D- - meet the current Victorian Building Regulations (BCA)
Structural Monash University Accessibility
Substructure Ramps D 20 - meet the requirements of the Disabilities Discrimination Act (DDA)
Engineer Aspiration Design Factors (AAD)
& Superstructure - meet the requirements of the Monash University Accessibility Aspiration
Design Factors (AAD)
- provide minimum (clear and unimpeded) width of 1200 mm
- provide appropriate handrails and edging kerbs
Roof design must be in accordance with:

D- - BCA Section J1.3 Roof and Ceiling Construction
Architect Substructure Roof General D 21.01 - BCA Section J3.6 Construction of Roofs, Walls and Floors
& Superstructure - SAA HB39 -1997 Installation code for metal roofing
- SAA/SNZ HB114:1998 Guidelines for the design of eaves and box gutters
D-
Architect Substructure Roof Types D 21.02 Pitched or curved roofs must be used in preference to flat roof systems.
& Superstructure
D- Current & Future Consider current and future installation of addional plant, solar panels,
Architect Substructure Roof Roof Mounted D 21.03 rainwater tanks, roof gardens, etc. Consolidate new or existing plant and
& Superstructure Equipment machinery where possible.
19

D- Roof design must minimise the need for ongoing roof maintenance whilst
Architect Substructure Roof Access and Safety D 21.04 enabling building services and external features to be safely accessed,
& Superstructure maintained and cleaned.
All materials must be new and their use will be appropriate for the proposed
D-
purpose and as recommended by their manufacturer. Colourbond or factory
Architect Substructure Roof Materials D 21.05.01
applied finish, in a light colour, must generally be used where the roof is
& Superstructure
visible from adjoining areas. Utilise locally manufactured products.
D-
Roof decking must be 0.53 mm TMT Zincalume of selected profile, complete
Architect Substructure Roof Materials D 21.05.02
with fixing chips and associated fixings.
& Superstructure
D- Metal sheet profiles should be such that they allow fixings for solar panels to
Architect Substructure Roof Materials D 21.05.03 be clipped fixed. Drilled fixings that create a place for water ingress must not
& Superstructure be used.
D-
Architect Substructure Roof Materials D 21.05.04 A membrane roofing system (sheet or seamless) must not be used.
& Superstructure
D-
The chemical reaction of aluminium in contact with other materials, in
Architect Substructure Roof Chemical Reaction D 21.06
exposed conditions must be avoided.
& Superstructure
D-
Architect Substructure Roof Jointing D 21.07 Jointing of each material type will be to the manufacturer’s specification.
& Superstructure
D- Roof to be light in colour to minimise heat gain. Design roof to enhance

Architect Substructure Roof Colour and Design D 21.08 enhance internal spaces and assist in naturally ventilated or mixed mode
& Superstructure systems.
The following warranties must be provided:

D-
- Roofing Membranes – 20 years
Architect Substructure Roof Warranty Periods D 21.09
- Sheet metal – 15 years
& Superstructure
- Workmnaship – 7 years
The design and specification of all roofing components must be capable o f
D-
Rain and Storm withstanding a 250mm/hr IFD (Intensity Frequency Duration). This is
Architect Substructure Roof D 21.10
Protection equivalent to a 1% Annual Exceedance Probability (AEP) or a 1 in 100 year
& Superstructure
rainfall event.
Skylights must:
- be installed to the manufacturer’s specification
D- - be protected by a guardrail or,
Architect Substructure Roof Skylights D 21.11 - have galvanised wire mesh 300 x 150 spacing of 2 mm strands fixed to the
& Superstructure roof structure in accordance with the recommended code.
- have galvanized wire mesh 50 x 50 x 3.5mm strand fixed below translucent
sheeting when fixed to covered walkways or similar
Roofs must be sufficiently insulated and comply with the minimum total R
value as specified in BCA Section J1.3 Roof and Ceiling Construction.
Fibreglass of minimum R3.0 rating fixed so that contact is maintained with
D- underside of roof deck. Avoid, noting health and safety issues of fibreglass
Built:
Architect Substructure Roof Insulation D 21.12 insulation include cancer risk from exposure to glass fibres, formaldehyde off-
Indoor Environment Quality- Credit
& Superstructure gassing from the backing/resin, use of petrochemicals in resin, and
13 - Indoor Pollutants
environmental health aspects of production. Refer to Green Star Design &
As-Built: Indoor Environment Quality- Credit 13 - Indoor Pollutants for
guidance.
D- The following plumbing standards must apply:

Architect Substructure Roof Plumbing D 21.13 - Roof plumbing to AS/NZS 3500.3
& Superstructure - Flashing Material to AS/NZS 2904
20

D- The following restrictions apply during gutter design:

Architect Substructure Roof Gutters Restrictions D 22.01 - Internal gutters must not be used
& Superstructure - Internal downpipes must not be used
D- Box gutters and sumps must be 6 TMT Grade 304 stainless steel, with riveted
Architect Substructure Roof Gutters Materials D 22.02 and soft soldered joints. Sumps must be a minimum width 450 mm, and
& Superstructure depth 150 mm.
D-
Architect Substructure Roof Gutters Sizing D 22.03 Gutters to be a minimum depth of 90mm, with a minimum of 35mm freeboard.
& Superstructure
D- Provide removable mesh type leaf guard across the full area of all box gutter
Architect Substructure Roof Gutters Leaf Debris D 22.04 sumps. Guards must be made from materials that are compatible with
& Superstructure adjacent elements.
D-
Joints must be first class quality in design and workmanship, with an
Architect Substructure Roof Gutters Joints D 22.05
inspection opening provided for cleaning.
& Superstructure
D-
Sheet metal downpipes, must be 0.6 mm TMT Zincalume with coluorbond or
Architect Substructure Roof Downpipes Materials D 23.01.01
factory applied finish.
& Superstructure
D-
Concealed downpipes must be U.P.V.C. heavy duty (S.W. grade) or copper
Architect Substructure Roof Downpipes Materials D 23.01.02
(“Class D”) as specified.
& Superstructure
D-
Internal Encase downpipes in duct within building envelope. Downpipes not to be cast
Architect Substructure Roof Downpipes D 23.02
Downpipes within concrete columns.
& Superstructure
D-
Architect Substructure Roof Downpipes Siphonic D 23.03 Siphonic downpipes must not be specified.
& Superstructure
External downpipes must connect to stormwater drain by discharging over a
D- grated pit. The pit may be of P.V.C. with an aluminium grate sized to suit
External
Architect Substructure Roof Downpipes D 23.04 downpipe min 225 x 225 square with a dished concrete apron 150 wide each
Downpipes
& Superstructure side on consolidated F.C.R. fill. In garden areas the grate level is to be at
least 75 mm above mulch.
Roof access doors and hatches including stairs access to be designed to
D-
Standards and satisfy:
Architect Substructure Roof Access D 24.01
Policies - Monash University Occupational Health & Safety Requirements
& Superstructure
- AS 2688
D-
Doors or roof access hatches to be lockable. Keying must be to the Monash
Architect Substructure Roof Access Locking D 24.02 Monash University Key Policy
University Key Policy
& Superstructure
D-
Roof access hatches to be sliding type hatches. Access must be via stairs not
Architect Substructure Roof Access Type D 24.03
ladders.
& Superstructure
Provide a suitable fall protection system for all roofs and ensure conformity
with the Code of Practice: Prevention of Falls - Working on Roofs.The design
D- must address all areas of roofing including access points, plant and
Code of Practice: Prevention of
Architect Substructure Roof Fall Prevention D 25 equipment gutter maintenance and skylights.The order of preference for fall
Falls - Working on Roofs
& Superstructure prevention is:
- Parapet
- Perimeter handrail system (static or folding)
D-
Architect Substructure Roof Fall Prevention Restrictions D 25.01 Anchor points and static lines must not be specified.
& Superstructure
D- Ensure design is compatible with roofing system. Provide handrails where

Architect Substructure Roof Walkways D 26 walkway is mounted more than 600 mm above roof, and a clear width
& Superstructure between handrails of at least 900 mm.
D-
Design and Plant Room/ The design and location of services plant on roof areas must be agreed with
Architect Substructure Roof Plant Platforms D 27.01
Location Enclosure the University at an early stage.
& Superstructure
21

‘Adequate access’ for routine servicing means the sufficient space for a plant
D- mechanic, to access all items safely and without undue stress. Allow
Maintenance Plant Room/
Architect Substructure Roof Plant Platforms D 27.02 sufficient space such that work may be undertaken around each item of plant.
Access Enclosure
& Superstructure Where access for an operative is required under plant a minimum gap of 600
mm must be left for cleaning of leaf and other debris.
Any equipment installed in a trafficable ceiling space, or on the roof, must
D-
Plant Room/ have:
Architect Substructure Roof Plant Platforms Safety D 27.03
Enclosure - compliant access and roof safety equipment to AS/NZS 1657,
& Superstructure
- lock permitting access only by authorised staff
D- External access for maintenance staff to electricity sub stations, main switch
Plant Room/
Architect Substructure Roof Plant Platforms Locking D 27.04 rooms and mechanical services plant rooms, must be secured by the
Enclosure
& Superstructure University’s external plant room lock systems, not the building’s lock system.
The Project Architect must provide a performance and environmental report
E- on the building envelope design at the Concept Design stage for approval by
Architect External Fabric & General E 01 the University. The report must test the proposed design for buildability, cost,
Finishes cleaning, maintenance, functionality, fire resistance, spread of flame and
environmental performance
The design and specification of external fabric systems and finishes should
consider the ongoing and lifecycle costs associated with their manufacture,
transport, erection, maintenance, replacement, demolition, disassembly or
removal, as being equally critical in the selection process as their capital
E- costs. It is expected that the following warranty periods are provided:
Architect External Fabric & General Warranty Periods E 01.01 - Precast Concrete panels - 20 years
Finishes - Other wall panelling - 20 years
- Metal Panelling systems - 15 years
- Facade systems and sealants - 15 years
- Aluminium windows inc. glazing - 5 years
- Anodizing - 10 years
E-
Supporting elements i.e. columns that protrude into internal areas must be
Architect External Fabric & External Walls Facades E 02.01.01
avoided.
Finishes
E- Green Star point awarded if 60-90% of the total existing facade of the
Built:
Architect External Fabric & External Walls Facades E 02.01.02 building, by vertical area, is reused. Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built:
Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle
Finishes Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts for guidance.
Impacts
E-
Finishes that require regular maintenance i.e. painting must be avoided.
Architect External Fabric & External Walls Facades E 02.01.03
Timber species must not be specified.
Finishes
E- Facades must be visually appealing, highly durable, climatically responsive,
Architect External Fabric & External Walls Facades E 02.01.04 economical in the use of materials, weathertight, practical to clean and
Finishes maintain a high level of sound insulation.
E- Building plant must not be visible from the exterior, when viewed from ground
Architect External Fabric & External Walls Facades E 02.01.05 level. Except where visibility of such plant might serve as an environmental
Finishes learning resource to all building users or the university in general.
E-
Architect External Fabric & External Walls Block Work E 02.02.01 Where applicable match blocks and bricks with existing.
Finishes
E-
Architect External Fabric & External Walls Block Work E 02.02.02 Conduit courses both horizontal and vertical must be laid to conceal all wiring.
Finishes
Reduce the absolute quantity of Portland cement by substituting it with Built:
E-
industrial waste products) such as fly-ash (typically in the order of 10-30%). Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle
Architect External Fabric & External Walls Block Work E 02.02.03
Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts
Finishes
Impacts; Materials - Credit 20 - Responsible Building Materials for guidance. Materials - Credit 20 - Responsible
Building Materials
E-
Cladding and Must exhibit excellent solar heat gain protection, glare control and thermal
Architect External Fabric & External Walls E 02.03
Screens performance.
Finishes
E-
Provide room depths of less than 7 m, i.e. depth from window to opposing
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Windows General Guidance E 03.01.01
boundary/wall.
Finishes
Ensure general reflectance of wall and ceiling surfaces is middle to high, i.e.
E-
generally light in colour. Dark floor coverings should also be avoided though
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Windows General Guidance E 03.01.02
this is less critical in instances where much of this area is to be covered by
Finishes
furniture.
E- Ensure 80% of each room enables occupants to see the sky from desk height
Built:
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Windows General Guidance E 03.01.03 (720 mm AFFL). Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Indoor Environment
Indoor Environment Quality - Credit
Finishes Quality - Credit 12 - Visual Comfort for guidance.
12 - Visual Comfort
E-
Exterior Window Large, highly reflective glazing must not be used. Double glazed systems
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Windows E 03.02.01
Construction must be used. Provide occupants with visual connection to exterior.
Finishes
For openable windows above ground level:
- Where openable sashes are installed provide a mechanical device such that
the sashes cannot be opened to allow a 125 mm to pass through between the
E- sash and frame.
Exterior Window Built:
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Windows E 03.02.02 - Where openable sashes are installed ensure safety rails and security
Construction Indoor Environment Quality - Credit
Finishes measures are provided to comply with the BCA, such that a sphere no
14 - Thermal Comfort
greater that 125mm can pass through between any security element.
- Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Indoor Environment Quality - Credit
14 - Thermal Comfort for guidance.
22

E-
Solar protection must utilise external shading. For north facades, use
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Windows Sun Protection E 03.03.01
significant eaves. For east and west facades, use purpose designed systems.
Finishes
Solar film must be used only in locations where it cannot be vandalised or GBCA Green Star - Design & As-
E-
easily damaged and use only on glass for which the manufacturer will warrant Built:
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Windows Sun Protection E 03.03.02
performance. Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Indoor Environment Indoor Environment Quality - Credit
Finishes
Quality - Credit 12 - Visual Comfort for guidance. 12 - Visual Comfort
E- In selection of internal shade solutions, consider impact on exterior views of
Shading *Section G - Internal Finishes &
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Windows E 03.04 the building. Solutions to be compatible with other rooms on same level
(Internally) Fittings - Item G 07
Finishes internally. Please refer *Section G - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G 07
Timber framed or timber faced doors must not be used at the principal points
of entry, or at significant areas of the facade. Where used in secondary (back
E- of house) areas, such as delivery bays or plant rooms, timber doors must be
Exterior Door *Section E - External Fabric &
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.01 solid core, FSC certified, edged all round with KDHW, and faced with
Construction Finishes - Item E 04.06.01-02
Finishes moisture resistant plywood facings. Prime all round including top and bottom
edges. High Gloss Low VOC exterior quality enamel paint to facings and
edges. See also *Section E - External Fabric & Finishes - Item E 04.06.01-02
E-
Exterior Door For main entry doors, lock type and hardware must comply with *Section R -
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.02 *Section R - Security
Hardware Security
Finishes
E-
Exterior Automatic Automatic doors to be provided to all main entrances, via a proprietary
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.03.01
Doors system
Finishes
E- Ensure components are durable, self lubricating, designed for high usage,
Exterior Automatic
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.03.02 extreme weather conditions, ease of maintenance and adjustment, and can
Doors
Finishes be sourced locally.
E- Recess into building from line of main façade, provide protection from
Exterior Automatic
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.03.03 prevailing wind pressure when opened. If required provide canopies for
Doors
Finishes further protection.
E-
Exterior Automatic Provide adequately sized air lock such that both sets of doors do not open
Doors simultaneously.
Finishes
E-
Exterior Automatic Configurations must utilise one of the following: sliding (number of leafs to
Doors suit), revolving, bi-fold leafs or swing/hinged doors.
Finishes
E-
Exterior Automatic Where revolving doors are selected ensure sufficient egress conditions are
Doors also provided, to comply with BCA and Means of Escape requirements.
Finishes
E-
Exterior Automatic Opening/closing components to be sensitive to obstructions, chain operated,
Doors capable of interfacing with fire alarm and evacuation system.
Finishes
E-
Exterior Automatic Maintain a minimum 50 openings during power failure, and capable of
Doors detecting approaches at slower paces.
Finishes
E-
Exterior Automatic
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.03.09 Select to minimise/reduce air currents as much as possible.
Doors
Finishes
E-
Exterior Automatic Provide access and egress by persons with disabilities in accordance with the
Doors DDA & Codes.
Finishes
E-
Exterior Automatic
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.03.11 Power to entry doors must be key switch operated.
Doors
Finishes
E- Ensure spare parts are readily available and manufacturer is able to supply
Exterior Automatic
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.03.12 within performance timeframes specified in the Monash University Buildings &
Doors
Finishes Property Service Contract Agreement.
Externally located operating components to be lockable and comply with the
following conditions (refer to *Section R - Security for further detail):
- An approved electronic lock and mounting position is required where
E- security access control systems are installed.
Exterior Automatic
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.03.13 - The majority of Electrically operated doors are to be on MU University’s *Section R - Security
Doors
Finishes swipe card system.
- In the event that an electronic key switch is required then this must be keyed
up to the relevant Restricted Master key system as directed by MU
Locksmiths.
E-
Exterior Automatic
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.03.14 For safety purposes, provide appropriately located sensors and decals
Doors
Finishes
E-
Exterior Automatic Doors must remain in an open position during normal hours when Fire
Doors Indicator Panel (FIP) is in alarm mode.
Finishes
E- In the case of a fire alarm signal from the Fire Indicator Panel, the power
Exterior Automatic
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors E 04.03.16 must be interfaced in a fail safe manner, such that doors are activated in an
Doors
Finishes open position where applicable.
E-
Exterior Automatic In the case of a power failure sufficient power must be available, such that
Doors doors must be activated to an open position.
Finishes
E-
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Overhead Doors E 04.04.01 To withstand wind load pressure of 55 Pa when closed.
Finishes
23

The opperation of overhead doors must follow:
- Manual: force required to operate not to exceed 220N
- Motorised: provide electric motor limits switches, manual safety stop and
E-
reversing mechanism, and overload cut-out operated by battery - powered
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Overhead Doors E 04.04.02
remote controller (supplied as part of system), and also by a direct push
Finishes
button or key switch.
- Provide a motorised system which is capable of manual operation in the
event of power failure. Locate operating switch 1500 mm AFL.
E-
For Sectional Overhead Doors specify proprietary systems including
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Overhead Doors E 04.04.03
operating gear hardware and accessories
Finishes
For Tilting Overhead Doors:

E- - Door Frame: capable of withstanding load without distortion
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Overhead Doors E 04.04.04 - Coating Class: Z450 or AZ150
Finishes - Operation: Manual or motorised (refer generally above)
- Motorised: use shock absorbing connecting arm
E-
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.01 Specify end clips and guides to withstand extreme wind conditions.
Finishes
E-
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.02 Deflection to be 1/360th of the span (maximum)
Finishes
E- Helical torsion springs to be housed in the drum and arranged to
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.03 counterbalance curtain weight without exceeding the safe working stress of
Finishes the spring material.
E-
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.04 Manual Hand Operation (high openings) by pole with ‘boat hook’ end fitting.
Finishes
E-
Manual Chain Operation by pulling chain passing over sprocket on the drum,
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.05
with reduction gears where necessary.
Finishes
E-
If a wicket gate is fitted to the shutter, provide a limit switch device to prevent
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.06
motor operation until the wicket and frame are clear of the curtain.
Finishes
E- All styles to aluminium framed glazed doors must be a minimum of 110 mm,
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Glazed Doors E 04.06.01 allowing a greater back set for the lock to avoid the potential OHS hazard of
Finishes operators catching their knuckle on the frame reveal
E-
Ensure adequate markings are included to leading edge of frameless doors
Architect External Fabric & Exterior Doors Glazed Doors E 04.06.02
for easy identification by visually impaired persons (DDA compliant)
Finishes
E-
Use air and wind locks to minimise heat gain/loss and achieve air-tightness at
Architect External Fabric & Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.01
high-traffic building entries and exits.
Finishes
E- Identify and seal gaps. Confirm building sealing/pressure testing has been
Architect External Fabric & Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.02 undertaken for all new builds by an independent specialist to CIBSE TM23:
Finishes 2000 standards. Confirm any deficiencies have been rectified.
Design and construct building envelope with a continuous air barrier to control
air leakage into, or out of, the conditioned space. Trace a continuous plane of
air-tightness throughout the building envelope and make flexible and seal all
E- moving joints. Join and seal the air barrier material of each assembly in a
Architect External Fabric & Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.03 flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent assemblies, allowing for
Finishes the relative movement of these assemblies and components. Support the air
barrier so as to withstand the maximum positive and negative air pressure to
be placed on the building without displacement, or damage, and transfer the
load to the structure.
E- Clearly identify all air barrier components of each envelope assembly on
Architect External Fabric & Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.04 construction documents and detail the joints, interconnections and
Finishes penetrations of the air barrier components.
E-
Clearly identify the boundary limits of the building air barriers, and of the zone
or zones to be tested for building air tightness on the drawings.
Finishes
E-
The air barrier material(s) must have an air permeance not to exceed 0.02
L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178.
Finishes
Seal all penetrations of the air barrier. If any unavoidable penetrations of the
air barrier by electrical boxes, plumbing fixture boxes, and other assemblies
E- are not airtight, make them airtight by sealing the assembly and the interface
Architect External Fabric & Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.07 between the assembly and the air barrier or by extending the air barrier over
Finishes the assembly. The air barrier must be durable to last the anticipated service
life of the assembly. Do not install lighting fixtures with ventilation holes
through the air barrier
E- Provide a motorized damper in the closed position and connected to the fire
Architect External Fabric & Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.08 alarm system to open on call and fail in the open position for any fixed open
Finishes louvers such as at elevator shafts.
E- Damper and provide controls to close all ventilation or make-up air intakes
Architect External Fabric & Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.09 and exhausts, atrium smoke exhausts and intakes, etc when leakage can
Finishes occur during inactive periods.
E-
Compartmentalize car parks under buildings by providing airtight vestibules at
building access points.
Finishes
24

Provide external controls to north, east and west facades. Unprotected
E-
glazing must not be provided to these orientations. Consider window film use
Architect External Fabric & Façade External Shading E 05.02
on existing buildings only where it does not create stress which may cause
Finishes
cracking to glazed panels, and where reflective blinds are not practicable.
E-
Opaque facade elements (walls, ceiling and floors) should achieve an
Architect External Fabric & Façade Insulation E 05.03.01
average R-values of 3 for walls and 4 for roofs.
Finishes
E-
Architect External Fabric & Façade Insulation E 05.03.02 Use insulation products with low to no ozone depleting potential.
Finishes
Ensure insulation materials are non-hazardous, formaldehyde free and do not
E- require special clothing or protection to install. Insulation must be inert,
Architect External Fabric & Façade Insulation E 05.03.03 durable, rot and vermin proof, CFC and HCFC free, not support mould, fungal
Finishes or bacteria growth. Gaskets and dry weather seals - use EPDM or silicone
rubber or approved equivalent. PVC material will not be permitted.
E- Use double glazing in all new buildings and major refurbishments, single
Architect External Fabric & Façade Glazing E 05.04 glazing not permitted in these developments. Double glazed low e glass with
Finishes thermally broken frames to be used.
Section F: Schedules - Internal
Section F - Internal Fabric of the MDCS must be read in conjunction with: Fabric
F- MDCS
Architect General F 01 - Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric
Internal Fabric Supplementary
- Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings Section G: Schedules - Internal
Finishes & Fittings
Generally design must consider the following:
- Value for Money: Internal fabric constitutes the second highest maintenance
cost of all internal elements, careful selection must address ongoing and life
cycle maintenance costs.
- Master Palettes: a holistic ‘Master Palette’ approach to the internal corridor,
F- circulation spaces and amenities is being introduced to existing buildings.
Architect General Design Principles F 02.01
Internal Fabric - The designer must seek advice from the Monash University Asset Planning
Engineer - Building Fabric, or Project manager / coordinator to establish
whether such a policy exists for the building being designed.
- Work Quality: All materials used must meet the respective AS/NZS (or
where not available British) Standards, the requirements of testing authorities,
legislative compliance and the requirements of Natspec.
Contractors and Suppliers must specify the following products and finishes as
stated in Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric and Section G: Schedules -
Internal Finishes & Fittings. Where a Consultant/Contractor wishes to specify
Fabric
F- Products & products other than those specified in the Schedules, these must be
Architect General F 02.02
Internal Fabric Finishes submitted for review and approved in writing by the BPD Interior Design &
Section G: Schedules - Internal
Quality Coordinator. The Monash Project Coordinator/Project Manager,
Finishes & Fittings
Consultant and Contractor must allow sufficient time for review/approvals,
such that the agreed programme is achieved.
The following warranty periods must be provided:
- Plaster Walls – 3 years
- Wall Tiles – 5 years
F-
Architect General Warranty Periods F 02.03 - Plastic coatings – 5 years
Internal Fabric
- Suspended Ceilings – 5 years
- Interior Timber Doors – 2 years
- Interior Aluminium Doors – 5 years
A planning sub-grid of 300 mm will be used for key components, e.g. ceiling
F- Measurements &
Architect General F 02.04 grids, office and enclosed room dimensions, relocatable modular fitments,
Internal Fabric Set-outs
and systems furniture.
F- Brick, Block, A Structural Engineer must check load bearing integrity in regards to brick,
Architect Interior Walls F 03.01
Internal Fabric Masonry block and masonry prior to removal.
Wall finishes: must be agreed at briefing stage and may include:
F- Wet Plaster & Dry - Wet Plaster
Architect Interior Walls F 03.02.01
Internal Fabric Lining - Dry lining - direct stick, (fully flushed or expressed joints)
- Dry lining - on furring channels, (fully flushed or expressed joints)
F- Wet Plaster & Dry
Architect Interior Walls F 03.02.02 Corner guards must be fixed to all external vertical corners.
Internal Fabric Lining
F- Wet Plaster & Dry
Architect Interior Walls F 03.02.03 Casing beads must be fixed to all edges of hard plaster and internal render.
Internal Fabric Lining
Skirtings must adhere to the following conditions:
- Refurbishments: match existing
- New Buildings: metal, laminate or vinyl self coloured as approved must be
F- Section F: Schedules - Internal
Architect Interior Walls Skirtings F 03.03 used. Do not use timber or MDF for clear or painted finish.
Internal Fabric Fabric - Item F1.1
- Ducted: proprietary systems approved must be used.
- For vinyl type: Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of
manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F1.1
Architraves must adhere to the following conditions:

- Refurbishments: match to existing
- Timber: Standard: To AS 2689,
F- - Installation: To AS 1909 Section F: Schedules - Internal
Architect Interior Walls Architraves F 03.04
Internal Fabric - Steel: To AS 1397 Fabric - Item F1.1
- Aluminium: To AS 2047
- For vinyl type: Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of
manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F1.1
F- For new buildings, use and benefits must be agreed at early stage of design
Architect Floors (Accessible) New Buildings F 04.01
Internal Fabric brief, to ensure finished floor level is consistent throughout the building.
For existing buildings, areas both now and for the future to be agreed to
F-
Architect Floors (Accessible) Exisiting Buildings F 04.02 minimise changes to existing floor levels and maintain flexibility of use for
Internal Fabric
areas where possible.
25

F- Floor to be designed to AS 4154 and classification of environment type for
Architect Floors (Accessible) Standards F 04.03
Internal Fabric computer floor, to AS 2835
F- Provide system that is capable of carrying twice the uniform and concentrated
Architect Floors (Accessible) Structural Loading F 04.04
Internal Fabric loads without failure.
F- Ensure edges are fully enclosed to avoid particle contamination caused by
Architect Floors (Accessible) Panel Material F 04.05
Internal Fabric possible movement between panels.
F-
Architect Floors (Accessible) Size F 04.06 Generally 600 mm x 600 mm, otherwise to be agreed in writing
Internal Fabric
Service
F- Provide self adhesive labels identifying services and their direction. Fix to
Architect Floors (Accessible) Identification F 04.07
Internal Fabric visible surface of panel and below carpet (if applicable).
Labels
F-
Architect Floors (Accessible) Carpet Tiles F 04.08 It is not a requirement that panel and carpet tile dimensions align.
Internal Fabric
F- Panel must not be lifted from side mark with label - “Lift panel vertically at
Architect Floors (Accessible) Lifting Devices F 04.09
Internal Fabric centre”
Finishes must be:
F-
Architect Floors (Accessible) Finishes F 04.10 - Steel elements: galvanized
Internal Fabric
- Coating class for sheet: At least Z1351
Maximum floor height must be determined not only by immediate use at time
F-
Architect Floors (Accessible) Floor Heights F 04.11 of briefing, but anticipated use for life cycle of building. Minimum floor height
Internal Fabric
must generally be 150 mm or for computer access floors 300 mm
F- Supply pedestals, stringers, and uncut floor panels equivalent to 2% of
Architect Floors (Accessible) Spares F 04.12
Internal Fabric installation.
Service Access Boxed must adhere to the following conditions:
- Lifting: must have recessed / flush, ‘non-trip’ lifting feature.
F- Service Access - Depth: box depth must accept plug-top and cable without over stressing /
Architect Floors (Accessible) F 04.13
Internal Fabric Boxes bending cables, or causing cover to not sit flush with floor finish.
- Compatibility: product must be compatible with access floor system.
- (Refer also to Section K - Electrical)
F- Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section Section F: Schedules - Internal
Architect Floors (Accessible) Manufacturer F 04.14
Internal Fabric F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F2 Fabric - Item F2
Generally, the Project Architect must assess whole of building refurbishment
strategy to support ‘exposed’ slabs or suspended ceilings. The strategy must
be agreed in writing at the outset with the Stakeholders and Monash Project
Manager/Coordinator. In general areas suspended ceilings are required
rather than ‘exposed’ slabs. Where an exposed structural slabs is utilised, the
following conditions apply:
- Finishes: must be selected to provide reflectivity and luminance levels that
F-
Architect Ceilings Ceiling Type F 05.01 achieve an acceptable reduction in energy consumption.
Internal Fabric
- Textured applications: directly to underside of slab are not supported
- Concrete/Metal: consider reflectivity in relation to lighting system and lux
levels.
- Exposed services: All services are to be set out in a logical co-ordinated
manner, relative to the form/shape of the area. Where exposed services such
as ducts, gantries and pipes are utilised, these must be installed, such that
they avoid the buildup of dust and dirt.
Use Plasterboard in areas where minimal access is required to services
above. For access hatches/panels:
- Type: use proprietary hatches, keep to minimum and minimise visual
impact. Panels must have concealed hinge, no lock, be quick release and
match ceiling colour.
Suspended
F- - Size: 600 mm x 60 0mm (minimum) Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Ceilings Ceilings F 05.02
Internal Fabric - Additional Loads: The suspension system must be designed to carry the Finishes & Fittings - Item G1.
(Plasterboard)
weight of the ceiling only. Additional loads must not to be placed upon, or
carried by, the suspension system without prior references to system
manufacturer.
- Finishes: All ceiling painting must meet the requirements set in Section G:
Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1.
For new buildings:
- Set-out: Where possible, ceiling grids must align with structural elements,
Suspended
and window mullions.
F- Ceilings Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Ceilings F 05.03.01 - Height: 2700 mm AFL, (or other approved in writing by University)
Internal Fabric (Proprietary Tile Finishes & Fittings - Item G3.1
- Grid: 1200 x 600 mm on a proprietary exposed ‘T’ bar suspension system.
and Grid System)
- Procurement: Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers
from Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G3.1
Suspended Generally:
F- Ceilings - Noise reduction: specify tile type to achieve agreed noise reduction.
Architect Ceilings F 05.03.02
Internal Fabric (Proprietary Tile - Insulation laid above ceiling tiles either side of screens (partitions) is
and Grid System) required where room flexibility is necessity.
Suspended Ceilings in the following areas are not required to comply with the
following criteria:
Suspended - Specialised Laboratories and those requiring additional ceiling heights,
F- Ceilings tiered lecture theatre,
Internal Fabric (Proprietary Tile - Feature reception areas, larger conference rooms, atriums, large entry
and Grid System) lobbies and those accommodating lifts, escalators and/or stairs, catering,
sport and recreation, campus centres, retail, religious centres,
- Child care, studios, performing arts, large storage rooms and workshops.
For refurbished buildings:
Suspended - Generally: adopt a 1200 mm x 600 mm suspended ceiling grid, to avoid
F- Ceilings ‘creep’ and misalignment along the length of a building,
Internal Fabric (Proprietary Tile - Where possible ceilings must be set-out from the centre of the floor plate,
and Grid System) and any ‘creep’ avoided across the floor by using the structural grid as the
line on which any dimensional adjustments are undertaken.
26

Suspended
F-
Architect Ceilings Ceilings (Metal F 05.04 Do not specify metal pan ceilings.
Internal Fabric
Pan)
Internal screens (partitions) to be used to seperate offices from public areas
to underside of slab, or roof to ensure appropriate acoustic separation. For
general use screens (partitions) should be taken from floor to underside of
suspended ceiling only. The following conditions apply:
- Fire rating: All elements must comply and provide the required fire rating
- Loads: check intended load of shelving and cupboards, provide suitable
framing to support anticipated loadings.
- Set-outs: Align to ceiling grid or ½ ceiling grid, or window mullion.
- Ambulatory aids: Must be considered when setting out partitions,
dimensions to include full depth of ambulatory aids to give clearance as
specified or required by DDA.
- Sizes: use standard widths and lengths
F- Internal Screens Screens Section F: Schedules - Internal
Architect F 06.01 - Construction: metal or timber studs, with plasterboard linings, solid, fully or
Internal Fabric (Partitions) (Partitions) Fabric - Item F3.1
half glazed.
- Materials: Use proprietary products for boards and studs, beads etc.
- Noise transference: may include additional linings or proprietary insulation to
meet specified noise reduction.
- Finishes: include painting, flexible sheet (usually vinyl), applied film
(glazing).
- Glass fins may be used when abutting to mullions, and STC or fire ratings
are not required. Glass fins are not generally supported when abutting to
external glazing panels in between mullions or joints. The Project Architect
must show these clearly on drawings and they must be agreed.
- Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section
F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F3.1
Fully Glazed Screens (Partitions) must adhere to the following conditions:
- Transparent, with safety markings required to promote visual and supportive
Fully Glazed
F- Internal Screens communication between personnel.
Architect Screens F 06.02
Internal Fabric (Partitions) - Film specify partially obscured area with decorative patterns subject to
(Partitions)
approval. Solid film (total area)must not be used.
- Glass panels must be equal in any one length with silicone butt joints.
1/2 Glazed Screens (Partitions) must adhere to the following conditions:
- Be transparent or partially obscure as the requirement of fully glazed
1/2 Glazed screens.
F- Internal Screens
Architect Screens F 06.03 - Feature i.e. decorative, textured or timber panels, should be restricted to
Internal Fabric (Partitions)
(Partitions) areas less susceptible to damage i.e. ‘controlled’ reception, conference
rooms or high profile public areas.
- Do not use blinds to internal glazed screens. No treatment or film preferred
For toilet and shower cubicles a proprietary system from the specified pre-
approved list of manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric -
Item F3.2 must be specified. They must also adhere to the following
conditions:
- Panels including doors:
- core: high moisture resistant particleboard to AS/NZS 1859.1
F- Internal Screens Toilet and Shower - thickness : to doors, divisions, fronts and nibs 25mm Section F: Schedules - Internal
Architect Toilets F 06.04
Internal Fabric (Partitions) Cubicles - facings: 1.2mm minimum laminate sheet to AS 2924, Fabric - Item F3.2
- colour: coordinate with flooring, tiling, fitments and painting. Select colour /
pattern / grain to minimise impact of graffiti.
- Door Hardware:
- Spring Hinges: hold open type
- Catches: with indicators, and external emergency release facility, in
accordance with BCA.
Operable walls must adhere to the following conditions:
- Use must be carefully considered at the briefing stage and tested against
anticipated utilisation to minimise ongoing costs and maintenance. Approval
is required from the Interior Design & Quality Coordinator.
- Proprietary system to be specified; (see the specified pre-approved list of
manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F3.3).
- Ensure panels can be moved easily without undue effort, which may cause
strain or injury to operator.
F- Internal Screens Section F: Schedules - Internal
Architect Operable Walls F 06.05 - OHS: ensure system has no sharp or protruding components that may
Internal Fabric (Partitions) Fabric - Item F3.3
cause harm or injury to operator.
- Loadings: where required engage services of Structural Engineer to prepare
report, and recommendations on ability of building structure to support
associated works and specified system.
- Noise reduction: Type test operable wall to ensure it meets specified sound
transmission class (STC) rating.
- Finishes: Select durable facings that may easily be repaired or replaced if
damaged, coordinate to other room finishes, submit sample for review.
For protection from damage and radioactive emissions:
- A proprietary system is to be specified
- In circumstances such as high traffic areas or frequently changed furniture
Protection from layouts provide protection where damage to finished surfaces is likely to
F- Internal Screens Damage and occur. Section F: Schedules - Internal
Architect F 06.06
Internal Fabric (Partitions) Radioactive - In rooms where activities are likely to cause radioactive emissions, linings Fabric - Item F3.4
Emissions are to be installed in accordance with statutory codes and specification
prepared by specialist consultant.
Timber Door
F-
Architect Interior Doors Frames and Jamb F 07.01 Timber Door Frames and Jamb Linings to current standard: AS 1909
Internal Fabric
Linings
F- Metal Door Where specified in a timber stud or partition wall they are to be fitted with
Architect Interior Doors F 07.02
Internal Fabric Frames loose pins to hinges.
27

F- Interior Door
Architect Interior Doors F 07.03.01 Doors within a building and on a floor should match.
Internal Fabric Construction
Configure doorways such that when in the open position doors do not impede
F- Interior Door egress/access to adjacent toilets/amenities and rooms. For doorframes, door
Architect Interior Doors F 07.03.02
Internal Fabric Construction handles and skirtings, provide 30% contrast to background to assist people
with vision impairment.
When undertaking the refurbishment to part of an existing building or floor
where door designs vary, designers should seek the advice of the University
Project Manager who will advise the preferred design, to which the new doors
should be matched.
If existing designs are clearly ‘dated’, a new design will be introduced,
(Heritage and Buildings of Special Interest excepted).
Types:
- Hinged (double, 1½ leafs, single leaf) to suit specified opening width,
- Sliding (double or single).
Where height of room requires elevated work platform to be used to
undertake maintenance, ensure door opening width will enable this to occur.
Provide minimum clearance in accordance with the DDA for all areas.
Leafs:
- In Walls (i.e. masonry) Height - 2040mm,
F- Interior Door Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Interior Doors F 07.03.03 - In Screens (Partitions) Height - full height (with expressed head frame) -
Internal Fabric Construction Finishes & Fittings - Item G1.
2040mm with fixed head panel finished to match (if veneer, grain to align),
- Construction: solid core required, thickness 40mm, or as defined by special
needs i.e. fire / acoustics).
Facings:
- flush MDF,
- Protection: use in situations where damage may result e.g. trollies,
equipment sample(s) of material to be submitted for review.
Finish:
- painted. All painting must meet the requirements set in Section G:
Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1.
- veneer (high profile areas only, where not susceptible to damage),
- other sample(s) of material to be submitted for review.
Vision panels:
- refer matching design note as above.
For glazed doors:
- ADD Factor: Provide 30% contrast to leading edge(s).
- Glazing Frames: stile width (nominal 110 mm minimum) .
- To avoid the potential OHS hazard of operators catching their knuckle on
the frame reveal, all stiles to framed glazed doors must be a minimum of 110
mm, allowing a greater back set for the lock.
F-
Architect Interior Doors Glazed Doors F 07.04 - Frame finishes: metal, steel (galvanised, painted, powder coated or
Internal Fabric
anodised), aluminium (powder coated or anodised) or timber (painted or clear
lacquer)
- Frameless: Glazed doors must be clearly marked, with either push, pull or
sliding signs
Note: the leading edge of frameless leafs must bear contrast markings for
visually impaired persons.
For Fire Doors:
- Vision Panels must be included for safety such that they do not compromise
the specified Fire Resistance, and are within ‘line of sight’ of users (including
those in wheelchairs).
- Magnetic hold open devices must be provided with fixing points for magnetic
F- holders in addition to normal fixings. Link to FIP to ensure release on
Architect Interior Doors Fire Doors F 07.05
Internal Fabric activation of alarm.
- Manual release (Smoke Doors) must be provided at switch height, with
appropriate label.
- Signage must be approved and installed to comply with the BCA.
- Provide a certificate of compliance from the fire door manufacturer
appropriate to fire resistance specified.
For Roller Shutters:
- End clips and guides must be able to withstand extreme wind conditions.
- Drum deflection must be 1/360th of the span (maximum).
- Helical torsion springs must be housed in the drum and arranged to
counterbalance curtain weight without exceeding the safe working stress of
F- the spring material.
Architect Interior Doors Roller Shutters F 07.06
Internal Fabric - Direct Manual operation by handle(s) attached to bottom rail.
- Manual Hand Operation (high openings) by pole with ‘boat hook’ end fitting.
- Manual Chain Operation by pulling chain passing over sprocket on the
drum, with reduction gears where necessary.
- If a wicket gate is fitted to the shutter, a limit switch device must be provided
to prevent motor operation until the wicket and frame are clear of the curtain.
The Project Architect must prepare a complete lock and hardware schedule in
F-
Architect Interior Door Hardware F 08 consultation with the University Project Manager/Coordinator, Locksmith and *Section R - Security
Internal Fabric
Stakeholder(s) and in compliance with *Section R - Security of the MDCS
Where lever handles are used:
- Operation: to be lever with returns and no snibs, when used in public areas.
- Non-handed: select, such that the same lever can be either left or right
handed.
- ADD Factor
- Statutory: meet the requirements of the DDA and BCA, lever handles are
F- Section F: Schedules - Internal
Architect Interior Door Hardware Lever Handles F 08.01 mandatory for single action egress purposes, i.e. accessible to persons with a
Internal Fabric Fabric - Item F4.1
physical disability
- Colour coding: specify with minimum 30% contrast to background, to assist
visually impaired persons to recognise door elements e.g. handles
- Material: brass to a satin chrome finish.
28

Where Push Plates are used:
F-
Architect Interior Door Hardware Push Plates F 08.02 - Material: brass to a satin chrome finish.
Internal Fabric
- Signage ‘Push’ - on backplate
Where Pull Handles are used:
F- - Type: use with backplate.
Architect Interior Door Hardware Pull Handles F 08.03
Internal Fabric - Material: brass to a satin chrome finish.
- Signage ‘Pull’ - on backplate.
F-
Architect Interior Door Hardware Door Knobs F 08.04 Do not specify door knobs
Internal Fabric
Miscellaneous Door Hardware:
- Function without risk of injury to hand.
- Hinges: ensure number and size is suited to weight of leaf, type to include
ball races.
F- Miscellaneous Section F: Schedules - Internal
Architect Interior Door Hardware F 08.05 - Coat hook(s): must be used to match hardware suite, and where necessary
Internal Fabric Door Hardware Fabric - Item F4.2
used in conjunction with door stops to prevent damage to adjacent walls,
screens (partitions). Coat hook to have a rubber end or similar.
Closers & Stops:
- Closers: Use only where required by statutory regulations and codes and
where specifically requested by Stakeholders, and approved at Planning &
Sustainability document review.
- Size: appropriately for extreme weather conditions, with full adjustment.
- Design for high usage and ease of maintenance.
- Opening force required not to exceed 19.5 N.
F- - Automatic closers to be heavy duty with appropriate time delay on closing Section F: Schedules - Internal
Architect Interior Door Hardware Closers & Stops F 08.06
Internal Fabric action for disabled persons to safely pass through. Fabric - Item F4.3
- Hydraulic closers to be surface or floor mounted where applicable.
- Stops: match to hardware suite, affix to floor or walls, screen (partition) NOT
to door, use always where handles or coat hooks may damage adjacent wall,
screen, position on leaf such that they do not cause excessive strain to
hinges
All locks must be keyed in accordance with the Monash University Key Policy
where:
- Keys for cylinders on delivery must be provided to the University Project
Manager /Coordinator for final distribution.
- A Lockwood construction keyed system compatible with the University
master key system must be fitted during construction.
- All locks must be egress escape from the inside as per Victorian
Occupational Health and safety requirements.
- All locks to be keyed in accordance with the Monash University approved
F- Locks - Fabric - Item F4.4
Architect Interior Door Hardware F 08.07 key system only.
Internal Fabric Mechanical
- A letter will be issued by the University to our approved supplier authorising
Monash University Key Policy
the Project Architect and/or Contractor to order and install the cylinders to the
required specification. All key systems are to be controlled and maintained by
the University.
- Master keying on all projects for maintenance and services will be
determined by the University. Cylinder(s) will be supplied to the contractor
complete with construction keying if required.
- Sourced from the specified pre-approved list from Section F: Schedules -
Internal Fabric - Item F4.4
Electronic locks to be operated by card proximity readers, in compliance with
F- Monash University Access Control
Architect Interior Door Hardware Locks - Electronic F 08.08 Section R - Security of the MDCS and in collaboration with Campus Security.
Internal Fabric (Electronic) Policy
Refer also to the Monash University Access Control (Electronic) Policy.
F- Affix room number to match Monash standard, as described in *Section B - *Section B - Design Controls - Item
Architect Interior Door Hardware Door Signage F 08.09
Internal Fabric Design Controls - Item B 16.01 B 16.01
G- Section G - Internal Finishes & Fittings of the MDCS must be read in
MDCS Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes General G 01.01 conjunction with:
Supplementary Finishes & Fittings
& Fittings - Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings
The following warranty periods must be provided:

- Painting - 3 years
- Flooring:
- Tile - 15 years
G- - Timber - 5 years
Architect Internal Finishes General Warranty Periods G 01.02 - Carpet - 15 years
& Fittings - Polished concrete - 10 years
- Vinyl - 10 years
- Signage - 3 years
- Fittings - 2 years
- Furniture - 5 years
G- All interior materials, paints, finishes, adhesives and sealants to be

Architect Internal Finishes General Rating G 01.03 independently rated E0 for formaldehyde and its derivatives. Materials for
& Fittings laboratory areas exempt where no suitable product exists or can be acquired.
G-
Architect Internal Finishes General MDF G 01.04 Confirm MDF is low VOC and rated E0 for formaldehyde and its derivatives.
& Fittings
G- All interior materials, paints, finishes, adhesives and sealants to be low-VOC
Architect Internal Finishes General Low VOC G 01.05 or zero-VOC . Materials for laboratory areas exempt where no suitable
& Fittings product exists or can be acquired.
G-
All painting must meet the requirements set in Section G: Schedules - Internal Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Painting General G 02.01.01
Finishes & Fittings - Item G1 Finishes & Fittings - Item G1
& Fittings
29

G-
Minimise paint requirements. Use pre-finished surfaces where possible.
Architect Internal Finishes Painting General G 02.01.02
GECA certified preferred.
& Fittings
All painting must comply with the following principles:
- Water based enamel satin finish to areas subject to normal use.
- Water based enamel paint gloss finish to high traffic and public areas
G- - Preperation as follows: wash down, fill, sand, etch, prime
Architect Internal Finishes Painting Design Principles G 02.02 - Hardware and signage to be removed and surface made good as
& Fittings necessary. Hardware and signage to be replaced, unless otherwise directed.
- Paint qualities to be: grey water safe, water based unless prior approved,
non-toxic, biodegradable, low VOC, environmentally acceptable, ozone
friendly and free from carcinogens and phosphates
Select floor finish according to anticipated density of foot traffic as follows:
- High: stone, concrete (polished) ceramic tile (e.g. foyers of high profile
densely populated buildings, Campus Centre, Sports Centres excluding
specialised activity areas)
- Medium: carpet tile (e.g. lecture theatres, computer laboratories, flat floor
teaching rooms and adjacent corridors); vinyl (3 mm) (laboratories, using non-
G-
corrosive chemicals or non-wet areas); applied seamless finishes
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Design Principles G 03.01
(laboratories using chemicals or areas susceptible to high pressure wet
& Fittings
cleansing)
- Low: carpet tile (e.g. administration areas including work zones, meeting,
utility rooms); vinyl (2 - 2.5 mm) (break-out rooms, tea preparation areas)
- ADD Factor: avoid "busy" and colourful floor patterns that cross pathways –
rather, use colour as a wayfinding tool to designate pathways and take
people in the required direction of travel
G- All carpet tiles, vinyl and rubber installations must be carried out by the
Installation Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes G 03.02 specified installation contractors outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal
Contractor Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.1
& Fittings Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.1. Allow for suitable lead times.
G- Carpet tile and entry mat laying method/direction will be subject to pattern
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Laying Method G 03.03 and must comply with Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings -
Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.2
& Fittings Item G2.2
G-
Carpet Tile Carpet tiles to be selected from the specified pre-approved list in Section G: Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes G 03.04
Ranges & Colours Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.3 Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.3
& Fittings
G- In high profile zones such as reception areas and corridors, select contrast
Carpet Tiles -
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes G 03.05 colours or patterns not exceeding 20% of the area. Patterns/insets must be
Contrast
& Fittings straight rather than curvilinear.
G-
Carpet Tiles -
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes G 03.06 Broadloom carpet must not be used
Restriction
& Fittings
To protect internal floor finishes, the first 2-3 m (approx. 6 paces) within a
building must:
G- - Utilise a high performance, soil barrier material in accordance with Section
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Entry Mats G 03.07.01 G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.4
& Fittings - Be provided with an in mat recesses at each entry point to the building with
entry mats fixed with friction compound (as recommended by manufacturer),
where changes in floor level does not exceed 3 mm.
G- Where entry points (air locks) are not of sufficient depth, the entry mat may
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Entry Mats G 03.07.02 be introduced into the building as a contrast feature finish to the main interior
& Fittings flooring.
G- If soil barriers are not flush to main floor finish, they must have a trip resisting
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Entry Mats G 03.07.03 feather edge, and be secured or of sufficient weight, such that they do not lift
& Fittings or move under normal use.
G-
Mat recesses for fire isolated areas must be external, and adequately drained
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Entry Mats G 03.07.04
if exposed to the elements.
& Fittings
G-
Accessible floors to be design in accordance with Section G: Schedules - Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Accessible Floors G 03.08
Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.5 Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.5
& Fittings
Installation must comply with the following conditions:
- To AS/NZS 2455.1 or AS/NZS 2455.2 as appropriate
- Suitably prepare the substrate to receive the flooring installation including
stripping and cleaning, repairs, removal of all fixtures and fittings and ensure
substrate is level
- For Carpet installations: Test concrete substrate for dryness using
hydrometer test method described in AS/NZS 2455.1 Appendix B. If
necessary use artificial means of drying out the substrate before installation
G- Installation
- For Resilient Finishes installations: Test concrete substrate for dryness
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Guidelines - G 03.09
using hydrometer test method described in AS 1884 Appendix A. If necessary
& Fittings Substrate
use artificial means of drying out the substrate before installation
- Acid etch concrete surfaces to receive epoxy coats as directed by
manufacturer of finish product
- Where substrate exceeds maximum permissible tolerances apply levelling
compound compatible with adhesive
- Do not lay carpet tiles over parquetry. Remove and set aside blocks for
reuse or as spares as directed by Monash University Project
Manager/Coordinator.
G- Installation - Fibre cement: thickness 5 mm minimum (for carpet tiles) To AS 2908.2 Type
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Guidelines - G 03.10 B, category 2 mm minimum (for vinyl and rubber)
& Fittings Underlays - Hardboard: Standard to AS 2458, standard hardboard Type RD,
manufactured specifically as flooring underlay.
30

Installation
G- Installation must comply with the following conditions:
Guidelines -
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes G 03.11 - To AS 3541.1
Synthetic Sporting
& Fittings - Fire performance: Maximum indices to AS 1530.3
Surfaces
Provide movement joints over structural joints and at junctions between
G- Installation
different substrates. Depth of joint, sealant and preformed strips to be in
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Guidelines - G 03.12
accordance with manufacturer's’ instructions, and compatible with finish
& Fittings Expansion Joints
materials.
G- Installation - To AS/NZS 2455.2
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Guidelines - G 03.13 - Fixing: fix with friction compound as recommended by manufacturer
& Fittings Carpet Tiles - Friction compound: Suitable for holding tiles in place without permanent
sticking, allowing tiles to be relocated without damage if necessary.
Select appropriate vinyls for application, considering slip resistance rating.
G-
Detail slip resistance rating on finishes schedule or similar. Vinyl to be Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Vinyl (PVC) G 03.14.01
selected from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers in Section G: Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.6
& Fittings
Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.6
G-
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Vinyl (PVC) G 03.14.02 No vinyls are to be specified with carborundum/silicon carbide content.
& Fittings
All vinyl types are required to meet the relevant Australian Standard where:
- Unbacked flexible sheet: To AS 2055.1
- Semi-rigid floor tiles: To AS 1889.1
G-
- Flexible floor tiles: To AS 1889.2
- Adhesives: To AS 3553
& Fittings
- Anti-static vinyl sheet: To AS 1169
- Slip Resistance: To AS 4586, BCA/NCC, HB 197:1997 and HB 197:2014
(when implemented)
G-
Floor finishes under wall hung urinals to be welded, low maintenance vinyl
flooring.
& Fittings
G-
Vinyl (PVC) -
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes G 03.15.01 Provide a 32 mm pre-formed PVC fillet at all wall/floor junctions.
Covings
& Fittings
G-
Vinyl (PVC) - Vinyl flooring to be covered over fillet, and extended to a minimum of 100mm
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes G 03.15.02
Covings above floor
& Fittings
G-
Vinyl (PVC) -
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes G 03.15.03 Coving to floor penetrations will be a minimum 35 mm.
Covings
& Fittings
G-
Rubber to be selected from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Rubber G 03.16.01
in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.7 Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.7
& Fittings
G-
Use of rubber floor finish must meet BS 1711 and ensure a minimum
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Rubber G 03.16.02
coefficient of 0.5 for slip resistance.
& Fittings
Epoxy base coats to be used in laboratories where it is likely to receive
G- spillage of corrosive chemicals and susceptible to excessive wet wash down
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Epoxy Base Coat G 03.17 cleansing treatments. Epoxy base coats to be selected from the specified pre-
& Fittings approved list of manufacturers in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes &
Fittings - Item G2.8
G-
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles G 03.18.01 Provide fully tiled floors in male W.C’s
& Fittings
G-
Glazed tiles must generally be 150 x 150 mm and exposed edges must be
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles G 03.18.02
fully glazed.
& Fittings
G-
Unglazed vitrified ceramic floor tiles must be approximately 15 mm thick laid
on cement mortar bed to required level and falls.
& Fittings
Acid resistant tiles must generally be 150 x 150mm x 14 mm to suit their
G-
required design purpose. They are to be grouted with a compatible acid
resistant grout of equal resistance with the tiles. Tile adhesive must be to the
& Fittings
manufacturer’s recommendation.
G-
Ceramic tiles to BS 6431 and adhesives to AS 2358 (do not use PVA based
adhesives in wet areas or externally)
& Fittings
G-
Submit drawing or agree set-out with Project Manager/Coordinator prior to
installation.
& Fittings
Tiles must:
G- - Be even and correct to floor wastes and made level at junction to walls
Ceramic Tiles -
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes G 03.19 - Have general falls at 1:100 (minimum), with showers at 1:60 (minimum)
Falls & Levels
& Fittings - Be non-slip in all floor applications, with minimum coefficient of 0.5 for
internal use and 0.7 for external use.
G- Where differing finishes abut, the floor level must be adjusted to counter the
Ceramic Tiles -
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes G 03.20 difference in thickness of the two systems, and a suitable cover trim installed
Different finishes
& Fittings to protect the edges.
G- Timber subject to anticipated use where the Project Architect must to specify
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Timber G 03.21.01 all stakeholders and approval for use given by BPD Campus Design Quality &
& Fittings Planning.
31

G-
Architect Internal Finishes Floor Finishes Timber G 03.21.02 Where required match parquetry to existing areas.
& Fittings
All ceiling painting must meet the requirements set in Section G: Schedules -
G-
Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1. Colours should be selected bearing in Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Ceiling Finishes Painting G 04.01
mind required lux levels for tasks to be performed within the area, finishes Finishes & Fittings - Item G1
& Fittings
should assist in the minimisation of energy consumption from light fittings
G-
Architect Internal Finishes Ceiling Finishes Stability G 04.02 Ensure material is stable, and will not generate dust or particles.
& Fittings
G-
All services are to be coloured in accordance with applicable Australian
Architect Internal Finishes Ceiling Finishes Exposed Services G 04.03
Standard.
& Fittings
G-
All materials must comply with the required fire indices for the specified
Architect Internal Finishes Ceiling Finishes Fire Indices G 04.04
areas.
& Fittings
G- Where exposed slabs have been approved by BPD Campus Design Quality &
Architect Internal Finishes Ceiling Finishes Exposed Slab G 04.05.01 Planning, finishes must be selected to provide reflectivity and luminance
& Fittings levels that achieve an acceptable reduction in energy consumption.
G-
Architect Internal Finishes Ceiling Finishes Exposed Slab G 04.05.02 Do not apply textured applications directly to underside of slab.
& Fittings
Suspended ceilings must be:
- 'T' bar exposed
G- - 1200 mm x 600 mm or 600 mm x 600 mm, subject to room proportion and
Suspended Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Ceiling Finishes G 04.06 size
Ceilings Finishes & Fittings - Item G3.1
& Fittings - A system that is compatible with the selected tile range
G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G3.1
G-
Architect Internal Finishes Ceiling Finishes Metal Pan G 04.07 Metal pan ceilings are not to be used.
& Fittings
G- Selection of electrical appliance to be from the panel of 'Approved Suppliers'
Monash University 'How to Buy
Architect Internal Finishes Appliances G 05 of the Monash University 'How to Buy Guides'. Preferrence for equipment and
Guides'
& Fittings appliances with zero or low drawing power, i.e. <1 Watt.
Site refrigeration appliances appropriately. Locate freezers where they have
direct access to low energy ventilation or cooling, away from heat sources.
G-
Allow adequate air gap at rear of refrigerators - do not be enclosed in a
Architect Internal Finishes Appliances Refrigeration G 05.01
confined space such as a cupboard. Provide low energy cooling strategy for
& Fittings
freezer condenser. Locate fridges away from heat sources such as
stoves/ovens, hot water systems.
Generally, fitments must adhere to the following conditions:
- Use: fitments (joinery) are susceptible to higher than normal usage, wear
G- and tear and must be designed accordingly.
Architect Internal Finishes Fitments General G 06.01 - Standardisation: fitments (joinery) units are to be modular and standardised
& Fittings throughout a building/floor.
- Loading Safety Notice: where fitments have a weight limitation, a maximum
loading label must be displayed.
The following design applies for fitments:
- Carcase: 25 mm
- Worktops: 25 mm minimum
- Materials: MDF finish to be fully sealed, do not cut on site.
- Finish: 1.2 mm laminate pre-laminated board preferred
G-
- Colour: white/neutral only
Architect Internal Finishes Fitments Design Criteria G 06.02.01
- Doors/Drawer Fronts: contrast colour may be selected as feature; on basis
& Fittings
that element can be easily replaced.
- Hardware: Handles/Pulls: select with no sharp edges or protrusions that
may cause injury.
- Hinges: select type number and size to withstand weight of leaf and
anticipated heavy use.
G- Handles/pulls, hinges and glass display cabinets must be specified from the
Architect Internal Finishes Fitments Design Criteria G 06.02.02 pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes &
& Fittings Fittings - Items G4.1
G-
Laminates used to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Fitments Laminates G 06.03
G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G4.2 Finishes & Fittings - Item G4.2
& Fittings
G-
Wall-Mounted To be designed to prevent personal injuries from failure of components, and
Architect Internal Finishes Fitments G 06.04
Fitments be securely fixed securely to wall/screen (partition).
& Fittings
G-
Glass Display Must meet all safety standards, including glass doors, tracks and locking
Architect Internal Finishes Fitments G 06.05
Cabinets mechanisms. Carcase construction must be of sufficient strength.
& Fittings
For benches/tops in labs the following conditions apply:
- Finishes must be selected based on use: high performance laminate (i.e.
G- Trespa or Duropal), chemical based epoxy or water based epoxy
Architect Internal Finishes Fitments Laboratories Labs G 06.06 - Frames to have a 35 x 35 mm section
& Fittings - Material to be stainless or mild steel powder coated
- Ensure components and construction for chemical storage comply with the
relevant legislation and Australian Standards
G- For wet areas use high moisture resistant substrate, and ensure it is
Architect Internal Finishes Fitments Wet Areas G 06.07 adequately sealed all round by finishes and to junctions with floors, walls,
& Fittings sanitary- ware and sinks etc.
32

Signage must be designed to:
Monash Brand Guidelines
- Monash University’s Branding, as outlined in the Monash Brand Guidelines
G- - the Internal Signage Policy
Signage - Interior MDCS Internal Signage Policy
Architect Internal Finishes G 07.01 - the Internal Signage Master Palette and Guidelines, currently in
General Supplementary
& Fittings development
Internal Signage Master Palette and
Specific requirements and approval must be sought from the Campus Design
Guidelines
Quality & Planning team where applicable.
G- Provide requirements for the development of a signage system that displays
Signage - Interior Signage
Architect Internal Finishes G 07.02 consistent, information across each campus, and to the exterior and interior Monash Brand Guidelines
General Directional
& Fittings of the buildings. Refer to the Monash Brand Guidelines.
G- Information Provide internal signage to give building users and visitors, clear and precise
Signage - Interior
Architect Internal Finishes Signage (Non- G 07.03.01 directions from point of entry in building, to point of arrival i.e. individual
General
& Fittings Statutory) room/area.
G- Information Ensure positioning of signs/ notices is undertaken in a co-ordinated and
Signage - Interior
Architect Internal Finishes Signage (Non- G 07.03.02 logical manner and that the materials, do not detract from the quality of
General
& Fittings Statutory) finishes in the adjacent environment.
G-
Signage - Interior Building Building directories to comply with the Monash Brand Guidelines in
Architect Internal Finishes G 07.04.01 Monash Brand Guidelines
General Directories configuration and materials
& Fittings
G-
Signage - Interior Building
Architect Internal Finishes G 07.04.02 Location of building directories to be located at main entry/arrival point
General Directories
& Fittings
G-
Signage - Interior Building Building directories to include Faculties / Departments / activities / areas /
Architect Internal Finishes G 07.04.03
General Directories rooms etc. - advise level / direction
& Fittings
G-
Signage - Interior Level directories to comply with the Monash Brand Guidelines in configuration
Architect Internal Finishes Level Directories G 07.05.01 Monash Brand Guidelines
General and materials
& Fittings
G-
Signage - Interior Location of level directories to be located at main arrival point / head of
Architect Internal Finishes Level Directories G 07.05.02
General staircase / escalator / lift lobby
& Fittings
G-
Signage - Interior Level directories to include Faculties / Departments / activities / areas / rooms
Architect Internal Finishes Level Directories G 07.05.03
General etc. - indicate direction
& Fittings
G- Individual room/area signage to include Faculties / Departments / activities /
Signage - Interior Individual Rooms /
Architect Internal Finishes G 07.06.01 occupants / room numbers / names and the like - all as advised by Monash Brand Guidelines
General Areas
& Fittings Stakeholders / Project Manager/ Coordinator.
G- Individual room/area signage to include Faculties / Departments / activities /
Signage - Interior Individual Rooms /
Architect Internal Finishes G 07.06.02 occupants / room numbers / names and the like - all as advised by
General Areas
& Fittings Stakeholders / Project Manager/ Coordinator.
G-
Signage - Interior Other Directional Directions to toilets and similar amenities will also be given either on the floor
General Signs directories or separately signposted as appropriate.
& Fittings
G-
Signage - Interior Other Directional
Architect Internal Finishes G 07.07.02 For toilet signage in lieu of wording, use of pictograms required
General Signs
& Fittings
G- The display of Containment, Building Permit Notification and Fire Evacuation

Signage - Statutory (To
Architect Internal Finishes Generally G 08.01.01 Notices are to be considered in a co-ordinated manner, such that they do not
Code Requirements)
& Fittings detract from the overall appearance of the adjacent environment.
G-
Signage - Statutory (To An allowance should be included within the project cost, or as directed by the
Architect Internal Finishes Generally G 08.01.02
Code Requirements) Monash University Project Manager/ Coordinator for statutory signage
& Fittings
G-
Signage - Statutory (To Building Permit Containment of Building Permits & Certificates together with an explanatory
Code Requirements) Notification floor plan should be displayed in the Fire Indicator Panel (FIP) cabinet.
& Fittings
G-
Signage - Statutory (To Building Permit Display cabinet: size and type to be agreed with Monash University Project
Code Requirements) Notification Manager / Coordinator/ Asset Engineering Planner - Electrical & Fire.
& Fittings
G-
Signage - Statutory (To Fire Evacuation All new works Evacuation diagrams must be prepared to the standard
Code Requirements) Notices outlined in AS 3745-2010 section 3.5.
& Fittings
G- Fire Evacuation Notices to be location at each access point, lobby areas or

Signage - Statutory (To Fire Evacuation
Architect Internal Finishes G 08.03.02 non exit corridors as recommended by the University Project Manager /
Code Requirements) Notices
& Fittings Coordinator & Asset Planning Engineer - Electrical & Fire .
G- Consultants are required to provide construction floor plan drawings including

Signage - Statutory (To Fire Evacuation
Architect Internal Finishes G 08.03.03 all electrical, fire and security drawings that are required to produce the
Code Requirements) Notices
& Fittings Evacuation diagrams.
Clearly document and coordinate with the various occupants of the building
as required, and in association with the MU Project Manager/ Coordinator in
G-
Signage - Statutory (To Fire Evacuation regards to safety/hazard signage. The Emergency Evacuation diagrams must
Code Requirements) Notices be produced in A3, by BPD's Evac specialist contractor. The diagrams are to
& Fittings
be mounted in designated locations in accordance with the signage policy
guidelines.
33

G- Clearly document and coordinate with the various occupants of the building
Signage - Statutory (To Safety / Hazards
Architect Internal Finishes G 08.04.01 as required, and in association with the MU Project Manager/ Coordinator in
Code Requirements) Signage
& Fittings regards to safety/hazard signage
G-
Signage - Statutory (To Safety / Hazards Identify all safety equipment and facilities in accordance with the relevant
Code Requirements) Signage standards.
& Fittings
G-
Signage - Statutory (To Safety / Hazards
Architect Internal Finishes G 08.04.03 A notice board is required to highlight safety issues
Code Requirements) Signage
& Fittings
PC2 Laboratory
G- Containment and Clearly document and coordinate with the various occupants of the building
Signage - Statutory (To
Architect Internal Finishes other Accreditation G 08.05 as required, and in association with the MU Project Manager in regards to
Code Requirements)
& Fittings Certification PC2 Laboratory Containment and other Accreditation Certification Notices
Notices
G- All areas to be accessible to disabled users, including visually and hearing

Signage - Statutory (To Signage for
Architect Internal Finishes G 08.06 impaired unless directed otherwise, via building entry signs with install to
Code Requirements) Accessibility Users
& Fittings comply with DD and AS 1428.
Plant room signage required to identify room function and notify restricted
access. Signage must be located on door(s) with the following message:
NO ENTRY
G-
Signage - Statutory (To Plant room/ Authorised Personnel Only
Architect Internal Finishes Plant Rooms G 08.07
Code Requirements) Enclosure Contact Buildings & Property Division
& Fittings
9905 1200
or in accordance with Safety Regulations and as advised by Monash Project
Manager / Coordinator & Asset Planning Engineer.
G- Window treatments to be selected bearing in mind co-ordinated, consistent
Architect Internal Finishes Window Treatments G 09 and long term visual appearance, when the building is viewed from the
& Fittings exterior.
Roller blinds must be specified in accordance with overall façade
performance, including glazing, sun shading, and room activities. For roller
blinds:
- Do not specify venetian or vertical lathe blinds (if these currently exist in
adjacent areas, seek advice from Project Manager/Coordinator/Interior
Design & Quality Coordinator regarding matching or specification of new
products),
Treatments - Specify only commercial grade products; do not specify domestic grade
G-
Adjacent to products.
Architect Internal Finishes Window Treatments G 09.01.01
Facades - Roller - Do not specify products with plastic components/gearing
& Fittings
Blinds - For manual operation - metal ball chains not plastic to be used. Ensure user
is able to reach chains without having to stretch due to adjacent
furniture/obstacles. Ensure blind clears all window mechanisms i.e. opening
handles.
- Fabric: Ensure only fire rated fabrics are specified, to meet AS1530.3
compliance. Consider UV backing if brownout blinds required.
- Safety: Manual blind chain – install according to BCA to ensure child-proof
wall or floor fixing.
Treatments
G-
Adjacent to Operable blinds to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Window Treatments G 09.01.02
Facades - Roller G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G5.1 Finishes & Fittings - Item G5.1
& Fittings
Blinds
For blackout:
- Ensure effective control of natural lighting
- Roller blinds or curtains – must be within integrated light-excluding frame if
total blackout required. Curtains with light-excluding linings must be specified
to specialised areas only, and beyond reach of students.
Treatments GBCA Green Star - Design & As-
G- - Manual or remote (motorised) activation as specified
Adjacent to Built:
Architect Internal Finishes Window Treatments G 09.02 - Where motorised operation is specified ensure noise generated is minimal
Facades - Black Indoor Environment Quality - Credit
& Fittings and does not detract from presentations.
Out Blinds 12 - Visual Comfort
- Ensure closure of black-out system does not exceed 25 seconds.
- Noise reduction: use heavier weight materials where high acoustic
performance is required
- Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Indoor Environment Quality - Credit
12 - Visual Comfort for guidance.
For film:
G- Treatments
- To be specified in accordance with overall façade performance, including
Architect Internal Finishes Window Treatments Adjacent to G 09.03
glazing, sun shading, blinds and room activities.
& Fittings Facades - Film
- Ensure application does not compromise glazing warranties.
Treatment to
G- Where use of partitions is required, it must be justified by a
Internal Glazed
Architect Internal Finishes Window Treatments G 09.04 business/operational case, and approved in writing and supported by Interior
Screens
& Fittings Design & Quality Coordinator.
(Partitions)
Treatment to
G- Internal Glazed
Do not use blinds to internal glazed screens (partitions); glazing film or no
Architect Internal Finishes Window Treatments Screens G 09.05
treatment only
& Fittings (Partitions) -
Operable Blinds
34

For glazing film:
- Where use is supported, pattern, texture and colour that allows degree of
visual communication is preferred to ‘solid’ film.
- Graphic interpretation of Faculty’s /Division’s image/business activities is
Treatment to encouraged such that it reflects the desired image.
G- Internal Glazed - Drawings showing extent and pattern sample(s) to be submitted to Project
Architect Internal Finishes Window Treatments Screens G 09.06 Manager/Coordinator and Interior Design & Quality Coordinator for support
& Fittings (Partitions) - from Maintenance.
Glazing Film - Where no film is specified adequate ‘safety’ film to be applied, to signify use
of clear glazed panels.
- Film applied to facades and internal glazed screens (partitions) to be from
the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal
Use furniture with long life and which has been sustainably sourced. Ensure
G-
material components comply with adjoining standards for timber, VOCs, etc.
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture General G 10.01.01
Utilise furniture available in Monash University Furniture Reuse Centre
& Fittings
wherever possible. Consider the selection of GECA certified products.
G- Specifiers must select furniture items from the panel of 'Approved Suppliers'
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture General G 10.01.02 of the Monash University 'How to Buy Guides' for offices systems furniture
Guides'
& Fittings and loose furniture for flat floor teaching spaces.
G-
The project architect /contractor/supplier must ensure suitable access route
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture General G 10.01.03
within building from delivery point to final location.
& Fittings
G-
Laminates used to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture Laminates G 10.02
& Fittings
G-
Powder coats used to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture Powder Coat G 10.03
Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.2 Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.2
& Fittings
G-
Screen, Panel Screen, panel fabrics and facings to be from the specified pre-approved list Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture G 10.04
Fabrics & Facings outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.3 Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.3
& Fittings
G- Generally worktops, frames and modesty panels must adhere to the
Worktops, Frames Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture G 10.05 conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings -
& Modesty Panels Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.4
& Fittings Item G6.4
G-
Returns & Rear Generally returns and rear worktops must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal
Worktops Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.5 Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.5
& Fittings
G-
Generally screen and panels must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture Screens & Panels G 10.07
Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.6 Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.6
& Fittings
G-
Generally accessories must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture Accessories G 10.08
Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.7 Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.7
& Fittings
G-
Hutches & Generally hutches and shelving must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal
Shelving Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.8 Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.8
& Fittings
G-
Generally mobile pedalstals must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture Mobile Pedestals G 10.10
& Fittings
G-
Mobile & Static Generally mobile and static cabinets must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal
Cabinets Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.10 Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.10
& Fittings
G-
Generally cabinets must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture Cabinets G 10.12
& Fittings
G-
Generally tables must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Section G: Schedules - Internal
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture Tables G 10.13
& Fittings
The components of the systems furniture range, when configured into
G-
workstation settings, must provide safe and tidy cable reticulation. The
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture Cabling G 10.14.01
system must also allow ease of access for maintenance, adjustment and
& Fittings
sufficient room for expansion in the number of cables as required.
Cabling must meet the following conditions:
- Type - soft wiring is required.
- Location - cabling must be sited below worktop.
- Outlets (GPOs) - must be located above the worktop (outlets may be
located in screens or worktop mounted power rails) and have the capacity to
allow users to easily switch off when not required.
- Cable route - the interface between the worktop and screen must be such
G-
that cabling may be brought onto the work surface at any point, i.e. a gap or
lift up lid with ‘brush’ edge. Cable trays under a desk must have a clean finish
& Fittings
with no sharp edges.
- Quantities - to be determined by work-task and as agreed (allow to consult
with Information Technology Services and OHS). Ensure available GPOs if
Sit/Stand desks have been approved specifically for work areas.
- Power isolation - cabling must be configured to allow power isolation on a
desk-by-desk basis e.g. through a dedicated stand-by power kill switch (or
Eco-switch).
G-
Cabling used to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Section G: Schedules - Internal
& Fittings
35

G- Power and data fed from above / the suspended ceiling facilitated by power
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture Cabling G 10.14.04 poles, power panels or ‘umbilicals’ must be fully compatible with the systems
& Fittings furniture.
Power rails may be supplied and must be fully compatible with the systems
G- furniture range. 4 power outlets and 1 data and 1 voice must be provided as a
Architect Internal Finishes Furniture Cabling G 10.14.05 minimum, other quantities will be determined by works tasks, and agreed in
& Fittings writing with the Stakeholders and Monash Project
Manager/Coordinator/Interior Design & Quality Coordinator.
Specifiers must select chair and seating items from the panel of 'Approved
G- Suppliers' of the Monash University 'How to Buy Guides' for task and multi-
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating General G 11.01.01 purpose chairs (excluding lecture theatre seating). Selection must be made in
Guides'
& Fittings collaboration with OHS, users and the BPD Planning Interior Design & Quality
Coordinator.
Chairs and seating must meet the following conditions:
- Samples: to be available for minimum 1 week, for trial by stakeholders.
- Manufacturing base: Australia
G-
- Warranty: 5 years minimum
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating General G 11.01.02
- Under-frames: subject to chair type, specify skid bases (do not use type
& Fittings
with legs)
- OHS: all chairs must meet the assessment criteria stipulated by Monash
OHS.
Fabrics for chairs and seating must be commercial upholstery grade fabrics
G- or vinyls, selected for appearance, stain and fire resistance and durability.
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating Fabrics G 11.02.01 Tight weave fabrics are recommended, and must be recommended by the
& Fittings manufacturer for the intended purpose. Exemption must be sought for any
use of leather. (Refer to BPD Interior Design & Quality Coordinator)
G- Upholstery fabrics for all chairs and seating to be selected from the specified
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating Fabrics G 11.02.02 pre-approved list of manufacturers and colours in Section G: Schedules -
& Fittings Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G7.1
Fabrics for chairs and seating must meet the following conditions:
- Abrasion test - minimum 50,000 Martindale required
- Colour Fastness to Light - ISO 105-B02 - 1994 rating
G- - Fire Rating - To meet AS 1530.3.
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating Fabrics G 11.02.03 - Protective Treatments - Stain treatments or similar approved may be
& Fittings applied, ensure that the fabric and upholstery materials are compatible (foam,
Dacron etc).
- Seat Panels - avoid large areas of unbroken fabric, as this causes
stretching and rucking. This includes long ottomans and banquette seating.
Task chairs in an adminstration/office setting must meet the following
conditions:
G-
- For equity and continuity a single range with back height variations must be
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating Task Chairs Offices G 11.03
used across each Faculty/Division
& Fittings
- Conference, meeting and visitor chairs must follow a similar form/theme to
task chairs i.e. mesh, square, oval or ‘tulip’ shaped backrests.
Chairs in a reception/waiting setting must meet the following conditions:
G-
Reception & - Furniture in high profile areas to provide a touch of individuality that reflects
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating Offices G 11.04
Waiting Chairs the Faculty/Department’s desired image.
& Fittings
- Furniture susceptible to damage must only be used in ‘supervised’ areas.
Chairs in an a lounge, break-out or tea room setting must meet the following
conditions:
G- - Where space permits and in agreement with stakeholders, preferred seating
Lounge & Tea Kitchen/
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating G 11.05 in a mix of low (informal), dining and high stools.
Room Chairs Kitchenettes
& Fittings - Material for seating may be a mix of upholstered and ‘hard’ finishes. Fabrics
to have minimum 50,000 Martindales or similar, be FR to meet AS1530.3 and
be approved by the BPD Interior Design & Quality Coordinator.
Chairs in teaching (flat floor) areas must meet the following conditions:
- Subject to use, nesting/stacking or non-stacking chairs as required by
stakeholders, and meeting the assessment criteria as stipulated by Monash
OHS. Consider also tilt and fold seats with castors to 2x legs.
- Sufficient storage area must be provided for surplus furniture
G-
Teaching - Flat Tutorial - Comfort: form of chair must provide comfort for user, during maximum
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating G 11.06
Floor Chairs Room duration time of teaching sessions / meetings.
& Fittings
- Safety: Where stacking chairs are specified, provide ‘dollies’ for ease of
moving as supplied and recommended by manufacturer. Ensure maximum
numbers, when stacked, will not cause injury when being moved by users.
- Materials: may be upholstered, semi upholstered or ‘hard finish i.e. injection
moulded polypropylene or laminated timber.
36

(Fixed) seating in lecture theatres must meet the following conditions:
- Fixing: to sloping or tiered floors.
- Sight Lines: in shallow raked or shallow stepped theatres, stagger seats to
give unimpeded view of presenter and presentation area.
- Safety: set seats such that they avoid injury to feet from seat back in front,
where necessary add up-stands/fascias.
- Statutory: ensure BCA compliance for clearance between rows and ease of
access (where existing rooms are to be refurbished the Project Architect is to
check set-out dimensions to ensure compliance, this may result in reduction
G- Lecture of seat numbers.)
Lecture Theatre
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating Theatre/ G 11.07 - Refurbishment: this may provide cost benefits, the Project Architect is to
Seating
& Fittings Auditoria assess condition of seats and tablets and the refurbishment strategy and
agree with stakeholders.
- Selection Criteria: correct posture, maximum length of lecture / presentation,
cost, image and maintenance.
- If required, allow for GPO location adjacent to seat.
- Materials: polypropylene shell type (with or without upholstered finish) to
high quality maximum comfort seat cushions and fabric upholstery.
- Fabrics: patterned or darker colours to minimize visual stains with 50,000
Martindales or similar. To have suitable stain finish and be FR, to meet AS
1530.3.
Seating tablets in lecture theatres must meet the following conditions:
- Type: fold up/down preferred, the support mechanism must be of sufficient
strength and require minimum maintenance.
- Size: to take A3 folder or notebook computer.
G- Lecture
Lecture Theatre - Materials: surface must have a durable anti-graffiti finish, patterned
Architect Internal Finishes Chairs & Seating Theatre/ G 11.08
Seating Tablets laminates deter defacing.
& Fittings Auditoria
- Edges: Metal, high impact ABS or clear finished MDF edges preferred. DO
NOT use laminate, as this does not withstand chipping or wilful damage.
- Handing: provide approximately 15% left handed tablets, locate at end of
rows.
Project Architect must identify fully the stakeholder’s need for a compactus. If
G-
necessary the services of Monash Records and Archives should be used to
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Compactus G 12.01.01
assist in records management, such that the need for records storage is
& Fittings
minimised.
Compactus must meet the following conditions:
- Floor loadings: the services of a structural engineer must be used to
determine the ability of the floor to withstand the loads imposed, when the
compactus is fully laden. (Note: such a report may restrict the location of the
G- compactus on the floor.)
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Compactus G 12.01.02 - Safety: where it is likely that users may be injured or trapped between bays,
& Fittings locking devices must be specified. Additionally the rail system must be
recessed, this can be achieved by ramping up the floor level and recessing
the rails or cutting the floor and recessing the rails.
- Security: where agreed compactus may be specified with locks or positioned
in a secure (lockable room)
Writing boards to be used include:
- White marker board
G-
- Colour backed glass (extent to be agreed on site). Do not use ‘ideas’ paint.
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Writing Boards G 12.02.01
- Sash hung double white marker board.
& Fittings
- Electronic board (giving hard copy print out).
- Smart board (linking information displayed to data).
The University Project Manager/Coordinator to advise if the board(s) is to be
G-
supplied free issue or as part of the main contract. If supplied free issue the
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Writing Boards G 12.02.02
University Project Manager/Coordinator will advise whether the main
& Fittings
contractor is to fix or attend on the specialist suppliers installer’s.
White marker boards must meet the following conditions:
G- Writing Boards - - Use: generally in rooms where size allows writing to be easily read by
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings White Marker G 12.02.03 attendees, do not use in large lecture theatres.
& Fittings Board - Pre-approved Supplier: See Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes &
Fittings - Item G8.1
Sash hung double white marker board must meet the following conditions:
- Use: fixed or ‘roller boards’, do not use in large lecture theatres.
Writing Boards - - Operation: manual over motorised to reduce maintenance.
G-
Sash Hung Double - Tools: provide tools for operating boards where they are out of arm's reach.
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings G 12.02.04
White Marker - Proportions: no wider than 4 to 1 to facilitate free-travel and avoid jamming.
& Fittings
Board - Handles: ensure type minimises risk of injury to users, avoid ‘D’ pulls.
- Accessibility: ensure board is able to be used while other media is also in
use.
Electronic boards must meet the following conditions:
- Sizes: 77”: use in larger teaching spaces, where room capacity is
G- approximately 50 students. Where capacity exceeds 50, options must be
Writing Boards -
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings G 12.02.05 considered for the technology to project images onto a suitably sized screen.
Electronic Boards
& Fittings - Sizes 55”: use in meeting rooms and small discussion areas. May also be
used in large lecture theatres, where the information can be duplicated at a
suitable size via a data projector.
G-
Writing Boards -
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings G 12.02.06 Smart boards must comply with conditions set by Monash eSolutions
Smart Boards
& Fittings
Pin boards, display boards, wallboards etc. must meet the following
conditions:
G- Pin Boards, - Project Architect to prepare schedule indicating - location, size, materials,
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Display Boards, G 12.03 finish, wording etc. (Note where wording required materials, colour, font etc.
& Fittings Wallboards etc. to follow Monash Branding requirements)
- Arrangement: boards need adopt modular sizes such that they align with
each other, or other features within an area. e.g. door/glazing frames.
37

Displays including examples, exhibits, memorabilia, models, specimens etc.
must meet the following conditions:
- Generally: Where requested the Project Architect will design cabinets or
specify other suitable ready made fixtures to display those items or similar
G- described above.
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Displays G 12.04 - Supply & Installation: MU Project Manager / Coordinator to advise whether
& Fittings cabinets will be supplied as part of main contract, or free issue. If supplied
free issue MU Project Manager / Coordinator to clarify whether joiner and
electrician is to attend and fix.
- Security: cabinets to be securely fixed and locks provided as required.
- Lighting: where requested and agreed feature lighting maybe installed.
Artwork must meet the following conditions:
- Existing pieces: discuss removal with Monash University Museum of ART
(MUMA), and ensure pieces are safely removed prior to the commencement
of demolition / building works.
- Display: Project Architect to discuss opportunities for display of artwork both
G- hung and 3 dimensional at an early stage with the Stakeholders and MUMA.
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Artwork G 12.05 Other than external ‘public space’ works or art, pieces are generally required
& Fittings to be displayed in ‘supervised / controlled’ spaces.
- Locations: early agreement on location is advised, illumination maybe
flexible on tracks or adjustable (recessed or surface fittings).
- Fixings: if pieces are likely to be changed regularly, picture rails or rods with
cables are required, as this minimises damage to wall finishes. Security
fixings are used as directed.
Structural & G - Ensure floor is capable of carrying the load of the sculpture without deflection,
Civil Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Sculpture G 12.06 and that stabilisation method takes account of flooring components and in-
Engineer & Fittings floor services.
G-
Locations for paintings must be free from excessive ultraviolet light, vibration
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Paintings G 12.07
and dust with robust fixings for hanging and citation plate provided.
& Fittings
G- Locations for murals must be free from excessive ultraviolet light, vibration
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Murals G 12.08 and dust with robust fixings for hanging and citation plate provided. Also
& Fittings ensure the proper surface is selected, prepared and cured.
Planting must meet the following conditions:
- Species: The specialist supplier must assist in their selection
- Procurement and maintenance: The required method is to hire plants from a
G- specialist supplier (see Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings -
Architect Internal Finishes Miscellaneous Fittings Planting G 12.09 Item G8.2), under the terms of the agreement; species that have deteriorated
& Fittings are removed and replaced with healthy plants.
- Personal Plants: Where plants are hired it is generally a condition that staff
members do not bring their own plants into the work environment, as these
can spread disease to those supplied under contract.
H- Must reduce the use of PVC materials. Use concrete, vitrified clay, HDPE,
Architect General Materials H 01.01
Plumbing zinc, cast iron, copper, galvanised steel or aluminium as alternatives.
To maximise pumping efficiency large diameter pipes must be utilised and
H-
Architect General Pipes H 01.02 pipe and pump lay must be designed to minimise the pipe length and number
Plumbing
of bends required to deliver from the point of supply.
It is expected that the following warranty periods are provided:
- Sanitary fittings: vitreous china – 2 years
H-
Architect General Warranty Periods H 01.03 - Sanitary fittings: stainless steel – 5 years
Plumbing
- Tapware – 5 years
- Plumbing reticulation systems – 5 years
Opportunities for use of non-potable "fit for purpose" water must be
undertaken where practicable. In order of preference this may consist of:
- Rainwater harvested from roofs via down pipes.
- Harvested stormwater.
- Cooling water reuse or recirculation,
- Recycled water of the appropriate standard .
These systems shall comply with Department of Health and EPA Vic
Guidelines on alternative urban water supplies and reclaimed water:
H- Non Potable Alternative - "Rainwater use in urban communities: Guidelines for non-drinking
Architect H 02
Plumbing Water applications in multi-residential, commercial and community facilitie"
Department of Health & Human Services, May 2013.
- "Guidelines for Environmental Management: Use of Reclaimed Water" EPA
Vic June 2003.
- "Code of Practice Onsite Wastewater Management" EPA Victoria,
Publication number 891.3 February 2013.
- "Australian Guidelines for Water Recycling; Managing Health &
Environmental Risks (PHASE 2) Stormwater harvesting and reuse"
Environment Protection and Heritage Council July 2009.
Options for toilet flushing via the use of harvested or recycled water should be
H- Non Potable Alternative
Architect Toilet Flushing Toilets H 02.01 investigated for all projects. Header tank and flushometer systems are ideal
Plumbing Water
for this approach, minimising the requirement for additional pipe work.
H- Non Potable Alternative All water harvesting and reuse systems must be remotely monitored and
Architect Metering H 02.03
Plumbing Water metered, preferably by central building automation system.
All pipes whether sewer, water, flusher or services for the Mechanical
H- Services subcontractor must be positioned to allow access by tradesmen
Architect Access General H 03.01.01 YES
Plumbing particularly when in service risers / ducts. In no instances must any of these
pipes be concealed behind other pipes.
Positions of pipes relative to pipes of other services and installation must be
H-
Architect Access General H 03.01.02 co-ordinated by the Contractor in consultation with the respective trades
Plumbing
concerned and to the approval of the Architect.
Where adequate access cannot be provided from existing access
H- hatches/panels, supply and install new galvanized M.S. 300 x 300 mm
Architect Access General H 03.01.03
Plumbing (minimum) door and pressed metal frame, budget lock and metal tongue.
Location to be approved by Architect.
38

Layouts have been designed on the principle that piping will be concealed
H-
Architect Concealment Services H 04.01 within ducts, false ceiling, plant rooms, and similar services spaces. Services
Plumbing
must not impose restrictions to air streams.
Where concealment of piping, traps, etc. is not possible, it must be brought to
the attention of the Architect. If the Architect approves non-concealment in
H-
Architect Concealment Non-Concealment H 04.02 certain situations, the piping and fittings must be chromium plated, supported
Plumbing
on CP Pillar clips, and fitted with CP wall plates to cover entry points in walls,
floors or ceilings.
H- Labelling & All systems and services must comply with Australian Standards, Rules of the
Architect Standards H 05.01
Plumbing Identification Identification of Piping, Conduits and Ducts.
Pipes in ducts and other concealed accessible spaces must be banded and
labelled as required. Valves must be identified for service and area
H- Labelling &
Architect Pipes and Valves H 05.02 controlled. Where valves are controlling heating or cooling water the valve
Plumbing Identification
maximum flow rate must be clearly stated on the valve, as built diagrams and
BAS graphics. Tags must be engraved copper round plate.
H-
Architect Water Service Metering H 06.01.01 Water meters must have pulse heads to allow connection to network.
Plumbing
H- Metering must be capable of measuring consumption and must be a High-
Architect Water Service Metering H 06.01.02
Plumbing level RS-485 meter.
H- All meters must be connected to the campus Building Automation System
Architect Water Service Metering H 06.01.03
Plumbing (BAS) and update the graphics accordingly.
Metering must be provided at each building and to tenancies within the
H-
Architect Water Service Tenancy Metering H 06.02 building. Tenancy metering has to be pattern-certified with the National
Plumbing
Measurement Institute.
Once-through cooling systems for retail food tenancies are to be avoided.
H- Where an ongoing water source is required, provide water reticulation and
Architect Retail Food Tenancies Water Cooling Tenancy H 07
Plumbing recycling systems to minimise potable water consumption. Replace traditional
wok stoves with waterless wok stoves.
H-
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Plumbing H 08.01.01 Ensure selected plumbing fittings and fixtures are easy to maintain.
Plumbing
H- Install flow restrictors and aerators on existing taps (less than 5L/min) and
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Plumbing H 08.01.02
Plumbing showers (less than 9L/min ).
Use dual flush toilets with 4.5/3.0 L cistern similar to the Leda 2000 Smart
flush toilet pan with Invisi cistern. Ensure pans and cisterns are matched to
H-
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Dual-Flush Toilets Toilets H 08.02 provide maximum water efficiency (WELS 4-star or greater.). No concealed
Plumbing
serviceable fixings. Pan "P" trap connection must match existing conditions
and alignment.
Waterless urinals are not to be installed, WELS -5 star or greater low flow
urinal systems are to be installed with manual flush or smart demand
operation with actiivation sensitivity field at the front of the urininal. Engage
H- Water-Saving
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Toilets H 08.03.01 with the Cleaning Services Manager to ensure effective functioning of these
Plumbing Urinals
systems. Provide cold water taps and floor wastes for cleaning purpose to be
installed in proximity to waterless urinals. Fibreglass or plastic urinals must
not be used.
H- Water-Saving Low flow urinal systems implementing (mains powered) sensors and timers
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Toilets H 08.03.02
Plumbing Urinals and low-flush cisterns or flushometers can be implemented.
Cold Water only plumbing is appropriate for the vast majority of hand washing
facilities providing significant energy savings. Provide Isolation valve to each
H-
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Wash Basins Toilets H 08.04.01 fixture/service. Exceptions to this general rule may be required for workplace
Plumbing
(as opposed to public) toilets where warm water hand washing may be a
requirement.
H- Push-to-actuate, spring-return types including flow restriction must be used.
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Wash Basins Toilets H 08.04.02
Plumbing Recommend RBA taps be used for this application.
H-
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Wash Basins Toilets H 08.04.03 Program sensor taps (if fitted) to switch off within 6 seconds.
Plumbing
Cleaners sinks must be white vitreous china complete with bucket grate and
H- hot and cold water taps. Provide Isolation valve to each fixture/service.
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Cleaners Sinks H 08.05
Plumbing Engage with the Cleaning Services Manager to ensure effective functioning of
these systems.
H- All drinking fountains to be selected from the prescribed list in the Monash Monash Design and Development
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Drinking Fountains H 08.06
Plumbing University Design and Development Controls – Landscape (Part 5). Controls - Landscape (DDCL)
H-
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Showers Toilets H 08.07 Use only low flow shower heads of WELS three star or greater.
Plumbing
In low-use toilets, the default standard is recyclable paper towels in
conjunction with a recycling program. In high-use public toilets, two or more
H-
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Hand Dryers Toilets H 08.08.01 high-velocity hand dryers with on/off sensors are appropriate. Hand dryers
Plumbing
without electric heating elements are the option e.g. Dyson Airblade,
Davidson Washroom Machflow or equal.
H- Assessment must be made of the noise isolation requirements as they affect
Architect Sanitary Fixtures Hand Dryers Toilets H 08.08.02
Plumbing surrounding areas.
H- Cast Iron Non-Pressure Pipes and Pipe Fittings, must have approved joints
Architect Sanitary Plumbing Cast Iron Pipe H 09.01.01
Plumbing and be coated inside and outside with approved composition.
H- Provide all pipes, bends, junctions, I.O.’s, stoppers, gratings, traps, etc., as
Architect Sanitary Plumbing Cast Iron Pipe H 09.01.01
Plumbing specified and as required to complete the installation.
H- Copper and Brass Pipe must be of the type required by the controlling Authorities under the
Architect Sanitary Plumbing H 09.02.01
Plumbing Pipe conditions of use.
Fittings must be either capillary sleeve type fabricated from seamless brass
H- Copper and Brass
Architect Sanitary Plumbing H 09.02.02 or copper tube or cast brass. Where required, pipe must be marked to
Plumbing Pipe
indicate inspection and approval by the controlling Authority.
39

All copper tube must be of the tube types when used in the following
locations:
Type “A” Tube:
- As directed.
Type “B” Tube:
- Gas services.
H- Copper and Brass
Architect Sanitary Plumbing H 09.02.03 - Refer Current Gas Installation Code AG601.
Plumbing Pipe
- Cold water services
- Hot water service
- Flusher service
- Compressed air
- Vacuum service
- Steam supply
Provide appropriate insulation for the particular service. Insulation must cover
H-
Architect Sanitary Plumbing Insulation H 09.03 the entire exposed areas, including bends and valves. Pipe insulation wall
Plumbing
thickness must be maintained and must not be crimped at hanging points.
H-
Architect Sanitary Plumbing Floor Grates H 09.04 For floor grates use chrome plate on brass and vinyl clamp type in wet areas.
Plumbing
For traps:
- to basins, must be loose ring “P” type.
- to laboratory fittings, must be P.V.C. “P” traps, unless noted otherwise.
- to sanitary fixtures exposed to view and not in cupboards, ducts, etc., must
H- be chrome plated on brass.
Architect Sanitary Plumbing Traps H 09.05
Plumbing - All grease traps must be located outside building and have good access to
service it.
- All neutralisation, settling, straining and separator pits must be installed with
readily available access for pit maintenance and pH probe cleaning and
calibration.
Inspection openings must adhere to the following conditions:
- Must be provided as necessary in all soil, waste and vent pipes and located
where directed all in accordance with the regulations.
- Must be easily accessible.
- All neutralisation, settling, straining and separator pits must have a
disconnector gully or sampling point downstream of the treatment pit to
H- Inspection
Architect Sanitary Plumbing H 09.06 ensure free and easy access for trade waste sampling and discharge flow
Plumbing Openings
rate determination.
- Concealed flushometers must have 300 x 300 S.S. panel screw fixed to
wall.
- Each concealed stop valve or waste and sewer I.O. must have a 300 x 300
mm standard “Trafalgar” access door and frame primed and fitted to allow
easy access.
Trade Waste Treatment must include the following:
- Treatment of trade-waste is to ensure compliance with trade waste
acceptance criteria and if relevant Gene Technology Regulator and
Biosecurity requirements.
- Automatic dosing treatment systems are to be connected to Campus BAS.
H- Trade Waste
Architect Sanitary Plumbing H 09.07.01 - Notification and consultation with the Sustainability Compliance &
Plumbing Treatment
Integration Officer (SCIO) regarding changes to existing treatment apparatus
or the installation of new trade waste treatment apparatus is essential to:
(a) allow for utilisation of existing trade waste treatment systems;
(b) update existing site-wide Trade Waste Agreements or
(c) apply for new trade waste consents or agreements.
As a rule trade waste neutralisation pits are to include pH probes on the inlet
and outlet sides of the pit and controllers to ensure automatic acid and alkali
dosing systems or disinfection/ sterilisation systems result in a trade waste
discharge that is between pH 6-10. The neutralisation pit should be
adequately sized to allow for adequate retention and mixing time for the dose
H- Trade Waste chemicals. Aearation may be utilised when sedimentation is not required by
Plumbing Treatment the relevant Water Authority. Note: Under bench marble chip pits do not
generally provide adequate pH control, settling or retention time to ensure
trade waste compliance and should not to be the sole treatment process for
wet, clinical or teaching labs and may only be used: (i) in conjunction with
other downstream trade waste treatment apparatus or (ii) very specific
instances with the agreement of the SCIO.
Appropriately sized oil and grease interceptors are to be installed for food
preparation and food service tenants as per the relevant Water Authority
H- Trade Waste Requirements. Appropriately sized settling/sediment or silt pits are to be
Plumbing Treatment utilsed to provide primary treatment of wastes with high suspended insoluble
solids contents such as from bin washes or studios as per the relevant Water
Authority Requirements.
For pipes:
- In locations where noise may be transmitted to adjoining habitable spaces,
use an approved sound insulating material over PVC pipe, or cast iron pipe.
Pipe insulation wall thickness must be maintained and must not be crimped at
hanging points.
- Exposed pipe work and fittings in public areas must be chrome plated.
H-
Architect Sanitary Plumbing Pipes H 09.08 - Locate tundishes so that condensation does not cause damage.
Plumbing
- Copper Joints must be silver soldered.
- All pipes must be labelled and have flow direction decals.
- Hot water supply pipes must have high-performance pipe insulation
including joints, elbows and valves.
- Metal cladding around serviceable items must include quick release fixings.
Screws are not acceptable.
H- Reticulation systems to enable separate metering of individual floors and
Architect Sanitary Plumbing Reticulation H 09.09
Plumbing areas.
40

Valves must meet the following conditions:
- Must be Johns full bore gate valves with screwed ends with non-rising
spindle or equal approved. Unless particularly required by the Controlling
Authority,
- All valves spindles must be zinc free. Valves with o’ rings must not be used.
- All valves must be in accessible locations for operation and maintenance to
approval of Architect and identified as before.
H-
Architect Sanitary Plumbing Valves H 09.10 - Location of stop valves as nominated by Architect must not be varied.
Plumbing
- Each service i.e. n/gas, c/air, vac steam etc. must be fitted with a control
valve adjacent to each fitting or small group of fittings suitable for the service
served.
- Balance valves must be globe type valves.
- All valves must be located in service ducts or special pits with easy access.
- Valves must be tagged to identify area served and maximum flow rate
(L/S). Tags must be cooper round plate.
For Backflow Prevention Valves:
- All water system must include backflow prevention devices.
- Backflow prevention valves must be installed in locations with easy access
H- Backflow
Architect Sanitary Plumbing H 09.11 for servicing and testing.
Plumbing Prevention Valves
- Tyco is preferable suppliers of backflow prevention valves.
- Valves must be tagged to identify area served and maximum flow rate (L/S).
Tags must be engraved copper round plate.
Mechanical H- Plant room/
Plantrooms Design Principles H 10.01.01 Plant rooms must be functionally integrated into the building design.
Engineer Plumbing Enclosure
Plant rooms must provide protection for equipment from:
Mechanical H- Plant room/ - mechanical damage;
Plantrooms Design Principles H 10.01.02
Engineer Plumbing Enclosure - entry by unauthorized personnel;
- weather.
The plant room layout at the design stage must provide for future expansion if
Mechanical H- Plant room/ required. Sizing must accommodate all mechanical, electrical and other plant.
Plantrooms Design Principles H 10.01.03
Engineer Plumbing Enclosure Allow sufficient space for additional equipment, for perceived functionality
during the life cycle of the building.
The plant must have:
- Floor grates (Use chrome plate on brass),
Mechanical H- Plant room/ - Water tap,
Plantrooms Design Criteria H 10.02.01
Engineer Plumbing Enclosure - Double GPO’s,
- The main plant room must have a 3 phase power outlet,
- Light must be operated via wall switch
Mechanical H- Plant room/ Basement plant rooms must minimise the possibility of flooding. Provide a
Plantrooms Design Criteria H 10.02.02
Engineer Plumbing Enclosure pump pit, alarmed to BAS. Pit pump out directed to sewer.
Allow adequate space for removal and maintenance of equipment in
Plantrooms Access H 10.03.01 accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Where permitted by the
manufacturer's these access spaces may ‘overlap’.
Direct access from corridors to roof areas, plant rooms, tunnels etc. must be
Plantrooms Access H 10.03.02 provided where possible. Where plant rooms are built on a number of levels,
compliant access ladders with safety cages, must be provided.
Mechanical H- Plant room/ Roller door and/or full door access must be provided to ground level plant
Plantrooms Ground Level H 10.04
Engineer Plumbing Enclosure rooms.
The plant rooms are to be located at roof top or basement level of the
Mechanical H- Plant room/ building, avoiding the main body of the building where possible. Also locate
Plantrooms Location H 10.05
Engineer Plumbing Enclosure plant room close to most direct point of vehicular access, avoid extensive
service road connections.
Mechanical H- Backflow
Domestic Water Supply H 11.01 Water systems must be designed to include backflow prevention devices.
Engineer Plumbing Prevention
If required, dual cold water pumps must be provided. One pump must be
Mechanical H-
Domestic Water Supply Booster Pump H 11.02 capable of providing the flow and pressures required. The second pump
Engineer Plumbing
must be used as standby.
Ensure water quality is assessed to determine need for filtration. Where
Mechanical H- filtration is installed, ensure the need for service/replacement is flagged but
Domestic Water Supply Filtration H 11.03.01
Engineer Plumbing does not prevent operation of equipment unless continued operation would
result in danger to users or plant.
Provide an appropriate water collection device in locations where water
Mechanical H-
Domestic Water Supply Filtration H 11.03.02 spillage during change of filter may cause damage to fitments and or floor
Engineer Plumbing
coverings.
If solar hot water is not viable, the use of gas systems may be considered.
Mechanical H- Electric systems only to be considered where no gas is available and the
Heating Water Supply Hot Water Service H 11.04.01
Engineer Plumbing supply of gas to the site is not viable. Heat pump technology must be
approved by the BPD Engineering and Sustainability Team.
Mechanical H- Instantaneous hot water units are to be used in preference to storage
Engineer Plumbing systems where solar thermal systems are not used.
Hot water must be provided to the following points:
- All showers,
- Kitchenette and tea preparation station sinks. An additional outlet must be
provided for a dishwasher viz.20 mm diameter copper, 200 litres/hour if
Mechanical H-
Heating Water Supply Hot Water Service H 11.04.03 required. These facilities must have their own hot water system which must
Engineer Plumbing
not be less than 315 litre capacity where high turnover dishwashing facilities
are required.
- Laboratory Glass Washers. This service shall terminate at an appropriately
sized ball valve.
Boiling water units (BWU) must only be used in kitchenettes serving a
Mechanical H- significant number of users (greater than 12). BWUs must be programmed to
Engineer Plumbing enter standby, sleep or off modes outside building operating hours to reduce
energy wastage (Zip Hydroboil).
41

Hot Water Pipe:
- Hot water pipes 15 and 20 N.B. must be lagged with Kemlag used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions. Larger sizes must be lagged
Mechanical H- with “Armaflex” or equal fitted. Joints, elbows and valves must also be
Heating Water Supply Hot Water Pumps H 11.05.01
Engineer Plumbing insulated.
- Steam supply must be lagged with 25mm rockwool with calico sheath for
internal situations and zincalume sheath fully weather protected externally all
to the manufacturer’s recommendations and to the proprietor’s satisfaction.
The hot water pumps
Mechanical H-
Heating Water Supply Hot Water Pumps H 11.05.02 - Must be installed in the return water loop.
Engineer Plumbing
- Grundfoss is the recommended pump manufacturer for a hot water pumps.
The gas supply to each laboratory shall consist of two separate services:
- Fume cupboards must be supplied from the main supply and each fume
cupboard hall be fitted with a 15 ∅ solenoid valve (A.G.A. approved) (24V D.
Mechanical H-
Gas Service General Labs H 12 C. active open) to be connected to the BAS,
Engineer Plumbing
- The general gas service from the main supply to the other laboratory fittings
must be controlled by an appropriate sized solenoid valve (240V) for
connection by the Electrician to the emergency stop at the exit doors.
Mechanical H- Facilities which use gas for purposes other than heating, must have an
Gas Service Metering H 12.01.01
Engineer Plumbing individual gas meter.
Mechanical H-
Gas Service Metering H 12.01.02 Gas meters must have pulse heads to allow connection to network.
Engineer Plumbing
Supply and install “Gas” stop buttons located at each laboratory door. Wire
Mechanical H-
Gas Service Stop Buttons Labs H 12.02.01 stop buttons in series to isolate main gas solenoid valve for the general
Engineer Plumbing
laboratory outlets.
Supply and install “Power” isolating stop button at each laboratory door, wire
Mechanical H-
Gas Service Stop Buttons Labs H 12.02.02 to isolate the general power in each area (not the fume cupboards). The stop
Engineer Plumbing
button must operate a shunt trip to be located within the D.S.B.0
Mechanical H- Isolating stop buttons must be Telemecanique manufacturer – No. XALJ174
Gas Service Stop Buttons Labs H 12.02.03
Engineer Plumbing or other approved.
Mechanical H- Provide clear polycarbonate housing with open front, protruding proud of
Gas Service Stop Buttons Labs H 12.02.04
Engineer Plumbing button to prevent accidental isolation or protective cage.
Mechanical H-
Gas Service Pressure H 12.03 Gas supply pressures must be clearly displayed on all pipes and meters.
Engineer Plumbing
Mechanical I- Ozone Depleting Substances (ODP) must be eliminated and High Global
General Design Principles I 01.01.01
Engineer HVAC Warming Potential (GWP) substances must be minimised and well contained.
Plant rooms housing HVAC equipment containing refrigerant must be
Mechanical I-
General Design Principles I 01.01.02 moderately airtight in their enclosure and fitted with refrigerant leak detection
Engineer HVAC
to cover high risk sections of the equipment.
All HVAC systems must include, BACnet, high level connectivity for
Mechanical I- monitoring and low level connectivity for control, to the Building Automation
Engineer HVAC System (BAS) and must have time clock control, localised 2 hour (adjustable)
after hours switching.
Mechanical I- The location of switching devices will be aligned horizontally with adjacent
Engineer HVAC door hands or other controls within a zone of 900 mm to 1100 mm.
HVAC plant and system components must be positioned in such a manner to
minimize any aesthetic impacts or detract from the building or surrounding
Mechanical I- environment. All plant and control systems must be designed/located to
Engineer HVAC facilitate efficient operation of the system:
- Adequate ventilation to allow cooling of compressors
- Condenser coil faces must not be installed in a Westerly exposure.
All selected equipment and infrastructure must have 20% redundancy for
Mechanical I-
General Design Principles I 01.01.06 future expansion and accordingly be capable of variable load control and
Engineer HVAC
efficient operation under low load conditions where applicable.
Design associated with Tenancy Alterations, Fit Outs, refurbishments,
building upgrades etc., must consider existing plant (local and/or central) and
Mechanical I-
General Design Principles I 01.01.07 ensure introduced loads (increased/decreased) do not affect system
Engineer HVAC
performance upstream or downstream of are not under the refurbishment.
Any upgrades required are to be captured within the scope of that project.
Where existing system capacity is below cumulative requirements, new plant
will be integrated into the existing system (Central Plant) to increase capacity
Mechanical I- and be programmed for staged operation under peak, partial and low load
Engineer HVAC conditions. added plant must not operate in contradiction to the existimg.
Larger Exhaust systems (10 air changes or more referenced to the space),
must include heat recovery.
Provide the following minimum air-change rates:
Mechanical I-
Air Delivery Design Criteria I 02.01.01 - Individual or open-plan offices 4-8 AC/hr
Engineer HVAC
- Lecture theatres/classrooms 8-10 AC/hr
Provide the following minimum outside air rates:
Mechanical I- - Individual offices - 11.1 L/s/person
Air Delivery Design Criteria I 02.01.02
Engineer HVAC - Open-plan offices - 16.6 L/s/person
- Lecture theatres/classrooms - 8.3 L/s/person
Naturally or Maximise naturally ventilated and mechanically assisted ventilated spaces

Mechanical I-
Mechanically Assisted Design Criteria I 03.01 throughout the building. Outside air must be provided at 50% above that
Engineer HVAC
Ventilated Spaces specified in AS 1668.2 unless carbon dioxide monitoring and control is used.
Include carbon dioxide monitoring and control systems with a minimum of one
Naturally or CO2 sensor at all return points on the floor, to facilitate adjustments of
Mechanical I-
Mechanically Assisted Design Principles I 03.02 outside air ventilation rates via VSD fans to each level, to achieve outside air
Engineer HVAC
Ventilated Spaces requirements. Outside air intakes must be filtered to remove airborne
contaminants.
42

The introduction of poor quality air from nearby facilities, equipment and utility
Mechanical I- areas including from food preparation areas, photocopying and high volume
Indoor Air Quality Design Principles I 04.01.01
Engineer HVAC printers and other production equipment is not permitted. Ensure air quality is
not affected by local or external contamination.
Dedicated exhaust systems must be installed to eliminate or control sources
Mechanical I- of indoor pollutants from photocopy rooms, toilets, kitchenettes etc. These
Indoor Air Quality Design Principles I 04.01.02
Engineer HVAC systems must operate in conjunction with the required building ventilation
requirements. The use of local closed extraction systems are to be used.
Mechanical I- HVAC systems must be designed to maintain a dry bulb temperature range
Thermal Comfort Design Criteria I 05.01.01
Engineer HVAC between 20oC to 25oC.
Mechanical I- Uncontrolled Relative Humidity (RH) is to be maintained within a range of
Thermal Comfort Design Criteria I 05.01.02
Engineer HVAC 40% to 60% unless specific conditions are nominated.
Where under floor distribution is used, each outlet must be directional and
Mechanical I-
Thermal Comfort Design Principles I 05.02 volume flow rate adjustable for localised control of air flow. Loactions of
Engineer HVAC
outlets must not effect occupancy comfort.
Mechanical I- Maintain preferred temperature set points of 21-24 degrees during normal or
Set Points Design Criteria I 06.01
Engineer HVAC agreed hours of occupation (typically 8:30am to 5:00pm).
HVAC systems must be designed for individual internal and perimeter zones
for each facade of the building with heating, cooling and volume control.
Mechanical I-
Air Distribution Design Criteria I 07.01 Perimeter zone must not exceed 100m2 (with a maximum depth of 5 m) or
Engineer HVAC
serve more than one facade orientation. Each zone to be thermostatically
controlled as a minimum.
Provide means to distribute air evenly throughout the conditioned space .
Mechanical I- Ensure air distribution is even and does not cause drafts. Where this cannot
Air Distribution Design Principles I 07.02.01
Engineer HVAC be achieved through central air handling systems, efficient ceiling fans must
be introduced.
Mechanical I- Ceiling spaces must not be used as return air paths. Fully insulated and
Air Distribution Design Principles I 07.02.02
Engineer HVAC ducted return and supply air system must be used.
Provide ceiling or wall mounted fans to areas of high occupation, i.e.
classrooms, open plan offices, etc., to improve air circulation and mixing,
Mechanical I-
Ceiling Fans Design Principles I 08.01 extend comfort levels where required and assist with air distribution.
Engineer HVAC
Horizontal fans can provide greater mixing across the room and when
oscillating provide air movement over a wider range than a fixed ceiling fan.
Except where higher standards are nominated in this specification, all
Mechanical I-
Ductwork Design Principles I 09.01.01 ductwork and associated works must be supplied and installed in accordance
Engineer HVAC
with the current Australian Standards.
Ductwork design must aim to achieve the optimum aspect ratio with largest
diameter (equivalent) practical and minimise the length and number of bends
between supply fan and delivery point. Guide vanes must be used in radius
Mechanical I-
Ductwork Design Principles I 09.01.02 bends in larger ductwork. Minimise the use of flexi-duct. Exposed ductwork
Engineer HVAC
must be painted to match adjoining surfaces. The use of glass fibre duct (or
any construction material which has the potential to break down and
contaminate the air stream) is not permitted.
Design ductwork to be efficient. Use largest possible diameter insulated pipes
Mechanical I- and ducts to minimise friction and heat loss. Ensure pipe and duct sizes are
Ductwork Design Principles I 09.01.03
Engineer HVAC not reduced in value management as this significantly compromises system
effectiveness and efficiency.
Use radius elbows (with or without turning vanes) to maintain uniformity of
Mechanical I- airflow and minimise pressure drops - both of which affect system
Ductwork Design Criteria I 09.02.01
Engineer HVAC performance and occupant comfort. Radius elbows should have a
radius/width (R/W) ratio of 1.5.
Avoid using turning vanes at entrances to branch ducts as they disrupt
airflow; where used ensure turning vanes are properly aligned to run parallel
Mechanical I-
Ductwork Design Criteria I 09.02.02 with sides of ductwork. Preferentially a radius branch fitting with no turning
Engineer HVAC
vanes (preferred) or 45 degree entry fitting (passable) to branching ducts.
No 90 degree angles in duct work allowed.
Ductwork exposed to the elements must be sealed watertight and cross
Mechanical I- Exposed Metal
Ductwork I 09.03 broken to prevent ponding. Exposed ductwork must be painted to match
Engineer HVAC Ductwork
adjoining surfaces.
All round/oval metal ductwork must meet the following conditions:
- All low velocity round ductwork and fittings must be flanged joints or
approved welded joints must be used in all inaccessible places.
Mechanical I- Round/Oval Metal - Flanges joint angles must be rolled to true circles and tack or spot welded to
Ductwork I 09.04
Engineer HVAC Ductwork ducts.
- Oval ducts exceeding 800 mm in width must not be used.
- Oval ducts under 800 mm width must be manufactured from spiral lock
seam round ducts.
The use of flexible duct must be minimised. When flexible duct is used the
following conditions must be met:
- Flexible ducts must be installed so that no bend has a mean radius of less
than one and half time the duct diameter.
- Must be cut to the lengths necessary for each application, and no jointing of
pieces of flexible ductwork will be permitted.
- Low velocity flexible ducts must not be longer than 4000mm and supported
at intervals not greater than 1500mm in distance.
Mechanical I-
Ductwork Flexible Ducts I 09.05 - High velocity flexible duct must be no longer than 600mm unless approved
Engineer HVAC
by the University.
- Flexible ductwork must be supported by packaging straps, buckles and
gutter guard saddles to suit the duct diameter which must be not less than
400mm long.
- Joints between flexible and sheet metal ducts must be made with approved
metal band clamps and all leaks must be eliminated.
- Ducts must be in “as new” condition at the date of Practical Completion.
- Plastic ducts must not be used, unless specifically for purpose.
43

All hangers, bars, brackets, rods, rolled steel sections etc. used to support
ducts will meet the following conditions:
- Must be installed at sufficient intervals to prevent sagging and vibration of
ductwork.
Mechanical I- - External duct supports must be hot dipped galvanized with cold galvanized
Duct Supports I 10
Engineer HVAC touch up of surfaces damaged during installation.
- Internal duct supports must be prime coated immediately after
manufacturer.
- must be suspended using hanging strap and half round sleeves (sheet
metal or equal) to prevent compression of duct.
Insulation to Australian Standards and BCA whichever is higher. External
insulation is to be used unless a requirement for internal insulation is required
for acoustic or external/exposed installation. Internal insulation must be lined
Mechanical I-
Duct Insulation I 11 with perforated foil faced insulation or perforated metal where higher
Engineer HVAC
velocities are encountered. Alternate face material to be used as determined
by specific applications. Internal insulation must not be exposed directly to the
air stream.
Where ducts penetrate internal walls and floors, the openings through which
Mechanical I- they pass must be sized to allow a uniform 12 mm minimum clearance all
Duct Penetrations Design Criteria I 12.01.01
Engineer HVAC rounds. The space must be packed through its depth with- “Kaowool” or equal
approved.
The joints on both sides must be sealed using a non-hardening resilient
Mechanical I- compound and 38mm x 2 mm trimming angles to the duct must be provided
Duct Penetrations Design Criteria I 12.01.02
Engineer HVAC on each side of the penetration to conceal the opening. Fire ratings of walls
and floors must be maintained.
Balancing dampers must be installed according to the following conditions:
- Balancing dampers must be installed in each branch duct serving more than
one diffuser, and at all flexible duct connections to branch ductwork.
- Dampers in the main duct branches to be Opposed Blade and must be of
the single blade type for flexible duct branch take offs rigidly constructed and
free from slack movement or vibration.
Mechanical I- Balancing
Dampers I 13.01 - Where dampers are not accessible, locate dampers behind diffusers.
Engineer HVAC Dampers
- Fit a lever and quadrant control to each damper assembly in an accessible
position, which must provide for adjustment and locking in any desired
position. Mark and label clearly the permanently “Open” and “Closed”
positions. After installation and balancing is completed, mark the normal
working position of each damper lever. Mark end of spindle with groove
parallel with damper blade.
Fire dampers must:
- Be constructed and installed in accordance with the Australian Standards.
Mechanical I-
Dampers Fire Dampers I 13.02 - Maintain the integrity of the fire rated wall/floor penetration and supply the
Engineer HVAC
appropriate damper to suit each situation.
- Be documented on drawings and ‘As Installed’ documentation.
Place air diffusers near to major heat sources/losses, avoid the placement of
diffusers directly over desks. Ensure local fixtures, fittings and minor
Mechanical I- Air Diffusers, Grilles & structures do no impede air flow from registers. Ensure diffusers especially
Design Principles I 14.01
Engineer HVAC Louvres slot diffusers do not blow air directly onto occupants or directly onto glazing.
Avoid the use of wall diffusers as they tend to create drafts. Ensure return air
paths are unrestricted. Swirl diffusers are recommended for office spaces.
Ceiling mounted diffusers must:
- be of ‘swirl’ type construction, manufactured from galvanise steel or
Mechanical I- Air Diffusers, Grilles & Ceiling Supply
I 14.02 aluminium.
Engineer HVAC Louvres Diffusers
- be fitted with an insulated ‘cushion head’ or ‘static pressure’ box, to which
the flexible ductwork is connected.
Side blow diffusers must meet the following conditions:
- Suitable for mounting through wall openings or on the face of ductwork.
- Flanged frame and adjustable blades must be of extruded aluminium or
fabricated from zinc-coated steel. Two sets of blades are to be fitted,
Mechanical I- Air Diffusers, Grilles & Side Blow horizontal and vertical and must provide universal adjustment of airflow
I 14.03
Engineer HVAC Louvres Diffusers patterns. Each blade must be individually adjustable.
- A set of opposed multi-blade volume control dampers must be fitted behind
each diffuser, adjustable by screwdriver through a diffuser face.
- Where grilles are fitted directly on to ductwork, stream splitter dampers must
be used where practical.
External louvres must meet the following conditions:
- Be manufactured from marine grade aluminium or bronze and colour coded
to match adjacent surfaces.
Mechanical I- Air Diffusers, Grilles & - Be fitted with vermin proof screens.
External Louvres I 14.04
Engineer HVAC Louvres - Pressure across the louvre must be minimised to limit any noise generation.
- Intake louvres must not entrain water.
- Consider window cleaning requirements and façade orientation in louvre
design
Where correct access cannot be provided from existing access hatches,
Mechanical I- Access Panels and
I 15 supply and install new galvanized M.S. door and pressed metal frame, push
Engineer HVAC Hatches
release lock and metal tongue. Location must be fit for purpose.
Heating system for a conditioned space must obtain energy from a source
Mechanical I- that is renewable or has low greenhouse gas intensity such as natural gas or
Space Heating I 16
Engineer HVAC high efficiency heat pumps. The use of resistive electric reheats will not be
considered.
Low pressure heating must meet the following conditions:
- Provide appropriately located isolation to facilitate maintenance.
Mechanical I- Low Pressure
Space Heating I 16.01 - Include components for automatic air venting and manual air bleeding.
Engineer HVAC Heating
- Air vents discharge to drain.
- Fit water filter and dosing pot into supply line to header tank.
44

When designing mechanical services for new buildings or major
Mechanical I- refurbishments, the feasibility of combining natural ventilation, mechanical
Ventilation General I 17.01.01
Engineer HVAC ventilation and air conditioning must be investigated. Natural ventilation must
be considered as a preferable option.
All enclosed car parks, kitchens and WCs must be ventilated so that the
Mechanical I- concentration of toxic or odorous gas is reduced to an acceptable level.
Ventilation General I 17.01.02
Engineer HVAC Enclosed car park ventilation systems must utilise continuous carbon
monoxide sensing systems to control ventilation rates.
In addition to the ventilation requirements nominated in the Australian
Mechanical I-
Ventilation General I 17.01.03 Standards, the design must ensure the containment of odours and steam
Engineer HVAC
when designing the mechanical systems compliments natural ventilation.
Ventilation Control must include the following:
- Minimum installation of one CO2 sensor in all return air paths and within
zone occupied areas. Sensors should also be considered in high use spaces
Mechanical I- across the floor e.g. in lecture theatres.
Ventilation Ventilation Control I 17.02
Engineer HVAC - Use of high tier CO2 sensors only; rated commercial/industrial grade with
minimum guaranteed drift. Use Drager, Vaisala or similar.
- Checking and calibration of CO2 sensors every 12 months as a minimum or
as per manufacturer's specification.
Non Mechanical Roof Ventilators include:
Mechanical I- Non Mechanical - Natural ventilation-considered as preferable option.
Ventilation I 17.03
Engineer HVAC Roof Ventilators - High-performance gravity roof ventilators for medium to high specific heat
loads with standard sound insulation must be used.
Main riser ducts must be capable of handling an increase of 20% in air
Mechanical I- Ducted Supply
Ventilation I 17.04.01 quantity for potential expansion of HVAC. Fans and motors must be selected
Engineer HVAC Systems
with this in mind.
Ventilation I 17.04.02 Provide locking quadrants to all adjustable dampers.
Provide duct access panels in the risers at each floor and in each branch or
Ventilation I 17.04.03 sub-branch for cleaning purposes. Duct access panels must be not more than
10 metres apart and as per current Australian Standards.
Provide duct access panels in the risers at each floor and in each branch or
Mechanical I- Ducted Exhaust
Ventilation I 17.05.01 sub-branch for cleaning purposes. Duct access panels must be not more than
10 metres apart.
Mechanical I- Ducted Exhaust Exhaust ventilation ductwork systems, installed in car parks and WC’s must
Ventilation I 17.05.02
Engineer HVAC Systems be completely separate from each other.
Local exhaust hoods are to be:

- Supplied with power supply from the mechanical services switchboard.
Mechanical I- Local Exhaust
Ventilation I 17.06 - When time clock controlled through the BAS, an afterhours override switch
Engineer HVAC Hoods
(time adjustable) must be provided .
- Labelled as for fume cupboards.
Make-up air systems must be fed from the mechanical services switchboard
and is to shut down on fire alarm; the system must be interlocked with the
Fume Cupboard
Mechanical I- fume cupboards and progressively increase air supply as required as fume
Ventilation Make Up Air I 17.07.01
Engineer HVAC cupboard usage increases. Make up air supply must be via a VSD with fan
System
speeds controlled by room pressure. Supply fan VSD, pressure sensors and
fume cupboard fan status must be BAS connected.
Fume Cupboard
Mechanical I- Use unconditioned make-up air systems where the application permits as the
Ventilation Make Up Air I 17.07.02
Engineer HVAC default for fume cupboards to reduce energy wastage.
System
Fume Cupboard
Mechanical I-
Ventilation Make Up Air I 17.07.03 Identify fan assembly by nominating the Fume cupboard/area it serves.
Engineer HVAC
System
Fume Cupboard Where tempering has to be provided for make up air systems, the pre-heat
Mechanical I-
Ventilation Make Up Air I 17.07.04 systems must be via heat recovery(enthalpy or air to air heat exchanger)
Engineer HVAC
System initially.
Provide duct access for cleaning and inspection purposes. Duct access
panels must be not more than 10 metres apart and must be located, before
and after each bend, change of direction and at each riser as per the
Mechanical I- Kitchen Exhaust
Ventilation I 17.08 relevant, current Australian Standards.
The discharge point of the kitchen ventilation system must be above the roof.
Kitchen exhaust fans must be able to be easily pulled apart for cleaning
purposes.
Mechanical I- Fume Exhaust The Principal Consultant must consult appropriate stakeholders to establish
Engineer HVAC Systems the requirement for each project.
All fume cupboard exhaust fans must be variable speed and interlinked with
Mechanical I- Fume Exhaust the sash position for volume control. Both points must be connected to the
Engineer HVAC Systems building automation system for monitoring. Variable speed drives must be
located adjacent to the fan and protected from the elements.
Mechanical I- The design, manufacturer, installation and operation must fully comply with
Fume Cupboards Standards Labs I 18.01
Engineer HVAC the requirements of current Australian Standards.
Power for the lighting and general power outlets must come from the lab
Mechanical I- Power Supply and distribution board. The exhaust fan must be powered from the local
Fume Cupboards Labs I 18.02
Engineer HVAC Lighting mechanical services switchboard and continue to operate under GFA unless
the fire strategy determines otherwise.
Mechanical I- The fume cupboard control system must be a proprietary electronic controller
Fume Cupboards Control System Labs I 18.03
Engineer HVAC providing total control, and safeties to the operation of the fume cupboard.
All switches and G.P.O.s are to be matching brand and colour and be
Mechanical I-
Fume Cupboards GPOs Labs I 18.04.01 mounted on the skirting duct across the front of the cupboard. The duct is to
Engineer HVAC
be supplied and fitted by the fume cupboard manufacturer.
Mechanical I- Each cupboard is to be fitted with a minimum of 2 No. double G.P.O.’s (with
Fume Cupboards GPOs Labs I 18.04.02
Engineer HVAC R.C.D. protection in laboratories) and neon lamp indicators.
45

Each cupboard is to be fitted with faults acknowledge, and fault reset switch
(spring loaded push button N/O) mounted on the front of the cupboard. An
Mechanical I-
Fume Cupboards Alarm Labs I 18.05 audible alarm is to be built into the proprietary controller. Flashing alarms may
Engineer HVAC
also be required in certain applications where audible alarms may not be
heard.
Mechanical I- Label all switches with black lettering on white background self-adhesive
Fume Cupboards Labelling Switches Labs I 18.06
Engineer HVAC labels.
Identify each fume cupboard. (Eg.Fume Cupboard No. 1 room G16) with
black lettering on white background located above the front sash and identify
Mechanical I- Identifying
Fume Cupboards Labs I 18.07 exhaust fan assembly and switchboard equipment and auxiliary equipment
Engineer HVAC Cupboards
such as PLCs, etc. with similar corresponding sign. External and switchboard
labels are to be engraved traffolyte and permanently fixed.
Mechanical I-
Fume Cupboards Control Wiring Labs I 18.08 Control wiring must not be less than 1.5mm2 7/050.
Engineer HVAC
Mechanical I-
Fume Cupboards Power Wiring Labs I 18.09 Power wiring must not be less than 2.5mm2 7/067.
Engineer HVAC
Mechanical I- Requirements for special use fume cupboards to be provided in project
Fume Cupboards DDA Labs I 18.10
Engineer HVAC specification. Consideration in design must include DDA requirement.
Mechanical I- Control Panel flush mounted on front fascia, containing all relevant switches
Fume Cupboards Control Panel Labs I 18.11
Engineer HVAC and indicators.
Mechanical I- Provide an isolator which simultaneously isolates the gas and electrical
Fume Cupboards Isolator Labs I 18.12
Engineer HVAC outlets while maintaining exhaust flow, mounted above front opening.
Mechanical I-
Fume Cupboards Disconnect Device Labs I 18.13 Provide for automatic isolation of services in the event of power failure.
Engineer HVAC
Mechanical I- Specify operating limits of cupboard, including quantity of chemicals, control
Fume Cupboards Warning Label Labs I 18.14
Engineer HVAC of ignition and safety procedures.
Mechanical I- Sump must be installed with adequate depth to safely contain chemicals in
Fume Cupboards Sump Labs I 18.15
Engineer HVAC the event of a spill.
Maintain a minimum linear air velocity of 0.5m/s at the face of the cupboard in
Mechanical I-
Fume Cupboards Exhaust Labs I 18.16.01 conjunction with sash open position. Exhaust fans to be variable speed to
Engineer HVAC
maintain required face velocity at varying shash positions.
Mechanical I-
Fume Cupboards Exhaust Labs I 18.16.02 Contain an accessible, manually operated fire damper.
Engineer HVAC
All fume cupboard fans must be controlled via VSDs. All VSDs must be
Mechanical I-
Fume Cupboards Exhaust Labs I 18.16.03 installed in the plant room or inside a waterproof enclosure, which meets IP56
Engineer HVAC
requirements.
Evaporative cooling systems (direct and indirect) must be considered for
Mechanical I- Considered
Evaporative Cooling I 19.01 application in areas where humidity control is not a critical consideration.
Engineer HVAC Spaces
Examples include: commercial kitchens; sports facilities.
Mechanical I- Investigation should include the use of recycled or harvested water sources
Evaporative Cooling Recycled Water I 19.02
Engineer HVAC for indirect evaporative systems.
The University nominates several critical categories of need for the air
conditioning of building spaces, defined by use, function and comfort level:
- Where air conditioning is critical to the outcome of academic experiments.
- In animal accommodation facilities, where air conditioning is necessary for
the health and wellbeing of the animals.
- In specialized equipment and central computer rooms where an air
conditioned environment is necessary to avoid equipment damage.
High iImportance areas that must have a supply of air conditioning include:
- Lecture Theatres
Mechanical I- Categories of - Tutorial rooms and laboratories
Air Conditioning I 20.01
Engineer HVAC Need - Computer rooms
- Libraries
- Theatres and assembly areas
- Meeting Rooms (areas greater than 20 m2)
- Animal houses and animal holding areas
- Child minding centres
- Archive/rare books/art work storage and exhibition areas
- Areas occupied by the Chancellor, Vice-Chancellor and other senior
executive staff.
- Any space where the University’s Thermal Comfort Guidelines cannot be
practically applied.
Selection of system type to be in accordance with the following:
- Generally, selection must consider existing equipment serving the site and
maintain consistency of manufacturer unless specific approval has been
sought for alternate suppliers.
- Equipment to be selected to operate at full capacity up to 38 deg C and at
reduced capacity up to 45c ambient.
- If a system is to serve 30% or more of a building UFA, including new
buildings - Centralised system to be used,
- If a system is to serve less than 30% of a building UFA, which has existing
Mechanical I- Air Conditioning centralised system - priority must be given initially to upgrading any existing
Air Conditioning I 20.02.01
Engineer HVAC System Selection centralised systems to service the additional areas,
- If a system capacity is likely to exceed 250 kW - a chilled water system is to
be used,
- If a system capacity is less than 250 kW and an existing centralised system
is not present, or the operation hours are significantly different from the rest of
the building e.g. a constant temperature room that runs 24 hours in a building
that has typical operation hours of 9-5, a system that operates independently
from the base building system must be used. VRV packaged or split type
vapour compression systems can be considered. Where package systems
are utilised, they must have a COP of 3 or greater.
46

Centralised chilled water systems serve a number of buildings are to be
adopted in accordance with campus master-plan provisions.
Where existing centralised equipment is reaching the end of its lifecycle,
Mechanical I- Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning I 20.02.02 refurbishments and/or new projects must include a budget provision to allow
Engineer HVAC System Selection
replacing such equipment.
Utilisation and expansion of centralised systems within a building must be
considered in all instances.
Chilled water systems must be primary and secondary type. Chillers are to be
arranged in parallel and individually matched with a primary and secondary
Mechanical I- Chilled Water
Air Conditioning I 20.03 pump. Chiller(s) selection needs to consider:
- Diversity in power sources
- System diversity and minimum/low load requirements.
Mechanical I- Chilled Water Adiabatic Air Cooled Chillers must be the first consideration when selecting
Air Conditioning I 20.04
Engineer HVAC Systems chiller units. Discuss justification for alternative selections.
Centrifugal Compressors
- Arrangement: Hermetic or open drive. Dual compressors may be offered to
increase efficiency.
- Refrigerant: Refer to General Design Principles
- Rotor: Impeller statically and dynamically balanced. Test the rotor
assemblies at 20% over speed.
Mechanical I- Centrifugal - Capacity Control: Provide stepless capacity control, which maintains stable
Water Cooled Chillers I 21.01
Engineer HVAC Compressors operating conditions and responds to variations in load, reducing to 20% or
less of full load capacity with constant condenser water temperature to ARI
550/590.
- Lubrication: Provide oil pump, filter, oil cooler, thermostatically controlled oil
heater and pressurized lubrication during run-up and coast-down including
coast-down after a power failure.
- Oil heaters: To operate during off cycles of the compressor.
Screw Compressors
- Arrangement: Hermetic, semi-hermetic or open drive.
Mechanical I- Screw - Capacity control: Positive fully modulating or multi-step capacity control
Water Cooled Chillers I 21.02
Engineer HVAC Compressors assembly reducing to 17% of full chiller load.
- Lubrication: Provide oil separator, pump or pressure differential oil system
and filter.
Water Cooled Condensers
- Pressure vessel design: To AS 1200
- Water tube velocity: 3m/s max.
- Heat transfer surface: Mechanically cleanable enhanced surface copper
tubes without turbulators.
Mechanical I- Water Cooled
Water Cooled Chillers I 21.03 - Water boxes and tube plates: Mild steel for normal water conditions.
Engineer HVAC Condensers
- Condenser piping connections: Arrange to suit plant room layout with two
pass condenser and Victaulic or flanged pipe pieces for removal to allow for
inspection and tube withdrawal. Alternatively marine water boxes must be
utilised where indicated.
- Fit lifting lugs to water boxes.
Water Box Corrosion Protection
- Provide a Cathodic protection system for each condenser water box, using
an impressed current, designed and installed by a suitably qualified person.
Water Box
Mechanical I- Include power supply, wired from chiller control panel, D.C. power supply with
Water Cooled Chillers Corrosion I 21.04
Engineer HVAC balanced outputs and ammeter, anodes and interconnecting wiring, and a
Protection
facility for periodic testing and alarm at BMS.
- Cathodic protection must comply with the recommendations of AS 2832.4,
Cathodic protection of metals – internal surfaces.
Water Cooled Type

- Type: Centrifugal
- No. of Comps: Minimum of 2
- Refrigerant type: Refer Design Principles
- Chilled water range (oC/oC): 6/12
- Minimum efficiency at full load (kW/kWr): 5
Mechanical I- Water Cooled
Water Cooled Chillers I 21.05 - Minimum efficiency at part load (kW/kWr): 10
Engineer HVAC Type
- Power supply (Voltage/Phase/Frequency): 400/3/50
- Starter type: VSD
- NPLV: 6
Nominal selection:
1. Equipment to have Proven Performance and Consistent Service support.
2. Consistency with existing product on specific site.
Centrifugal Compressors:
- Arrangement: Hermetic or open drive. Dual compressors may be offered to
increase efficiency.
- Refrigerant: Refer Design Principles
- Rotor: Impeller statically and dynamically balanced. Test the rotor
assemblies at 20% over speed.
Mechanical I- Air Cooled Adiabatic Centrifugal
I 22.01 - Capacity Control: Provide stepless capacity control, which maintains stable
Engineer HVAC Chiller Compressors
operating conditions and responds to variations in load, reducing to 20% or
less of full load capacity.
- Lubrication: Provide oil pump, filter, oil cooler, thermostatically controlled oil
heater and pressurized lubrication during run-up and coast-down including
coast-down after a power failure.
- Oil heaters: To operate during off cycles of the compressor.
47

Screw Compressors:
- Arrangement: Hermetic, semi-hermetic or open drive.
Mechanical I- Air Cooled Adiabatic Screw - Capacity control: Positive fully modulating or multi-step capacity control
I 22.02
Engineer HVAC Chiller Compressors assembly reducing to 17% of full chiller load.
- Lubrication: Provide oil separator, pump or pressure differential oil system
and filter.
The following conditions apply in the selection of an air cooled condensers:
- Equipment to be selected to operate at full capacity up to 38 deg C and at
reduced capacity up to 45c ambient.
- Coils must be copper tube, epoxy coated aluminium fins
- Condenser fans must have multiple direct drive low noise axial fans with
Mechanical I- Air Cooled Adiabatic Air Cooled
I 22.03 guards and baffles to prevent air short circuiting when fans cycle off.
Engineer HVAC Chiller Condensers
- Provision of a weather proof acoustic enclosure, low noise direct drive fans
and sound attenuators if required to meet specified sound level or
alternatively provide variable speed fan drives controlled for reduced speed at
night.
- Speed control fans to control maintain head pressure
Air Cooled Type

- Type: Screw
- Refrigerant type: Refer Design Principles
- Chilled water range (oC/oC): 6/12
- Minimum efficiency at full load (kW/kWr): 3
Mechanical I- Air Cooled Adiabatic - Minimum efficiency at part load (kW/kWr): 6
Air Cooled Type I 22.04
Engineer HVAC Chiller - Power supply (Voltage/Phase/Frequency): 400/3/50
- Starter type: VSD
- NPLV: 4.5
Nominal selection Refer
1. Equipment to have Proven Performance and Consistent Service support.
2. Consistency with existing product on specific site. (If Available)
Packaged Air-conditioning systems must be used only where it can be
demonstrated that required conditions cannot be achieved by use of chilled
water or the area is of a critical nature. Units must:
- be heat pump/reverse cycle inverter type (units up to 20 kWr),
- have the highest practical COP, minimum COP of 3 at full load.
- The system must be connected and controlled so that load shed is on signal
Mechanical I- Packaged Air from BAS,
Design Criteria I 23.01
Engineer HVAC Conditioners - system fire trip shutdown is connected to the Fire Indicator Panel,
- time schedule controlled from the Building Automation System (BAS),
- auto restart after power failure,
- load management /set point control from BAS,
- be of a manufacturer consistent with any existing product on the specific
site.
- Use a refrigerant that has an ODP of 00.
Mechanical I- Packaged Air Selection of manufacturer's who offer service through nominated suppliers
Manufacturer I 23.02
Engineer HVAC Conditioners only are discouraged.
Mechanical I- Packaged Air Package units should be BAS low level connected with time schedules and
Controls I 23.03
Engineer HVAC Conditioners dual set point control wherever possible.
Split Air Conditioner Units must:
- be heat pump/reverse cycle inverter driven (units up to 20 kWr),
- have the highest practical COP, minimum COP of 3 at full load,
- the system must be connected and controlled so that load shed is on signal
from BAS,
- system fire trip shutdown is connected to the Fire Indicator Panel,
Mechanical I-
Split Air Conditioners Design Criteria I 24.01 - time schedule controlled from the Building Automation System (BAS),
Engineer HVAC
- auto restart after power failure,
- load management /set point control from BAS
- compatible with BAS system
- be of a manufacturer consistent with any existing product on the specific
site.
- Use a refrigerant that has an ODP of 00.
Mechanical I- Selection of manufacturer's who offer service through nominated suppliers
Split Air Conditioners Manufacturer I 24.02
Engineer HVAC only are discouraged.
Where standalone split/package systems are used, units should include
Mechanical I- occupancy sensors or be controlled by a local occupancy sensor and time
Split Air Conditioners Controls I 24.03.01
Engineer HVAC clock to ensure system does not operate when room is not occupied for a
period of time.
Standalone package units must have a suitable in-built temperature dead
Mechanical I-
Split Air Conditioners Controls I 24.03.02 band, +/- 1.5 degrees around set point to ensure system does not switch
Engineer HVAC
between heating and cooling.
Where several small package units are being installed a central controller
Mechanical I-
Split Air Conditioners Controls I 24.03.03 should be included networking the individual systems to allow improved
Engineer HVAC
control.
Mechanical I- Any packaged heating or cooling units must achieve COP of 3.5 or greater
Split Air Conditioners Efficiency I 24.04
Engineer HVAC and only be used when more efficient options are unavailable.
Mechanical I- Cooling, Heat and
Access I 25.01 Heating coils must be accessible from both sides for cleaning and servicing.
Engineer HVAC Reheat Coils
Mechanical I- Cooling, Heat and Electric heating or Zone reheat systems are not permitted. Where their use is
Restrictions I 25.02
Engineer HVAC Reheat Coils unavoidable specific approval must be sought prior to development of Design.
Where existing Constant Volume System Control systems are in place, fans
Constant Volume should be fitted with BAS connected VSDs and high quality carbon dioxide
Mechanical I-
System Control Existing I 26.01 sensors to allow fans to be turned down when conditioning is not required
Engineer HVAC
Strategy and air quality is high. Supply and return fan performance profiles must be
carefully match to allow effective balancing at lower fan speeds.
48

Mechanical I- Variable Volume All new air-handling systems should be variable volume unless minimum
I 27
Engineer HVAC System Strategy fresh air only.
In general, a Variable Air Volume (VAV) system may be used for open plan
office areas and large rooms eg. Dividable tutorial rooms, Laboratories,
Meeting rooms. When used the following conditions should be met:
- FCUs must be considered as preferred system for staff offices.
Mechanical I- Variable Volume - Each conditioned space must be properly zoned into internal and perimeter
Design Principles I 27.01
Engineer HVAC System Strategy zones.
- To achieve a better air distribution and to minimise cold air dumping during
low air flow, swirl and linear slot type diffusers must be used instead of
Louvre type.
- One motion detector must be provided for each VAV box.
Mechanical I- Variable Volume VAV pressure sensors to be accurately calibrated and documented during
Pressure Sensors I 27.02
Engineer HVAC System Strategy commissioning.
Mechanical I- Design zoning and air distribution to minimise requirements for re-heating.
Air Handling Control Design Principles I 28.01
Engineer HVAC Where required, zone reheats must not use resistive electrical elements.
Specify HVAC systems with economy cycle, mixed mode or 100% fresh air
Mechanical I-
Air Handling Control Economy Cycle I 28.02 wherever possible to take advantage of acceptable external conditions and
Engineer HVAC
higher ventilation rates. Supply air temperature must be maintained at design.
Mechanical I- Minimum Outside Outside air intake controls must include minimum outside air entry when
Air Handling Control I 28.03
Engineer HVAC Air external conditions are unfavourable.
For mixed mode applications, supply reed switches linked to building
Mechanical I-
Air Handling Control Reed Switches I 28.04 automation system on all windows to disable mechanical plant when windows
Engineer HVAC
are open.
Install humidity sensors for outside air, and internal air to allow enthalpy
control of economy dampers. The intake of outside air should be minimised
Mechanical I-
Air Handling Control Humidity Control I 28.05 when relative humidity (RH) exceeds 60%.
Engineer HVAC
Humidity should not exceed 75% RH in the supply ductwork to avoid
condensation and mould growth.
Air handling systems must meet the following conditions:
- Install comparoator type outside air economy cycle with continuously
variable outside/return/spill automatic air dampers to mainatin design supply
air temperature, connected to campus BAS and optimised for energy
efficiency.
- Air conditioning systems to be provided with chilled water from single multi-
compressor water cooled chiller and heating water from a boiler or heat
Mechanical I- Air Handling
Air Distribution I 29.01.01 exchanger using high temperature hot water.
Engineer HVAC System
- Make up air supply systems’ fan motors, to be connected to 3 phase power
from a Mechanical Services Switchboard and include, pre-heat, shut down in
fire alarm mode, and capacity to progressively increase air supply in tandem
with fume cupboard/hood usage where applicable.
- Supply and return air to be fitted with Variable speed drives.
- Provide night purge system, programmed to consider prevailing and
predicted weather conditions and operated to maximise energy efficiency.
All air-handling systems must have adequate outside air make up variable (up
to 100% of the supply air). Outside air should be considered at locations well
away from:
Mechanical I- Air Handling - Fume exhausts.
Air Distribution I 29.01.02
Engineer HVAC System - Local traffic.
- Kitchen and WC’s discharges.
- Cooling towers discharges.
- Other objectionable discharges.
Direct-expansion (DX) refrigeration systems must be used only where it can
demonstrated that required conditions cannot be achieved by use of chilled
Mechanical I-
Direct-expansion (DX) I 30 water or the area has a consistent load and critical nature e.g. computer, data
Engineer HVAC
or communication rooms. The use of DX systems reduces the opportunity to
vary fan speeds and can restrict the effective utilisation of economy cycles.
Chilled Beam Control Strategy must:
- Designed to allow higher temperature and low pressure cooling water to be
utilised, i.e. more smaller beams.
- Designed so beam valves so that water pressure can be primarily controlled
at the pump with beam control valves close to 100% open when cooling is
Mechanical I- Chilled Beam Control
I 31 required.
Engineer HVAC Strategy
- Chilled water temperature to be variable and quality dew point sensor(s)
must be included to ensure water temperature remains above dew point at all
times.
- Chilled beams - Where high internal heat loads due to equipment are
present, alternative or supplementary cooling may be required.
All chiller plant to be selected on the basis of Life Cycle Analysis, considering
Mechanical I- Refrigeration Plant
LCA I 32.01.01 first cost, operating cost and energy efficiency and comparing various
Engineer HVAC Chillers
options.
Refrigerant I 32.01.02 Chillers must utilise refrigerant as referred to under Design Principles.
Optimisation must use adaptive control methodology to continuously optimise
chiller system energy efficiency. The optimisation loop must take at least the
following inputs:
Mechanical I- Refrigeration Plant Chiller Plant
I 32.02.01 - Power consumed by VSDs on CHW & CCW pumps
Engineer HVAC Chillers Optimisation
- Power consumed by VSDs on cooling tower fans
- Power consumed by chiller.
- Ambient wet bulb temperature
The optimisation loops or closed loop feedback will continuously adjust logic
in accordance with actual system conditions such as chiller approach, chiller
I 32.02.02 operating boundary conditions, pumping efficiency, tower operating boundary
conditions, cooling tower approach and performance, so as to optimise total
plant COP.
49

Optimisation must be in line with manufacturer's' plant data, paying particular
I 32.02.03 attention to tolerances, limits and advice from plant design engineers.
Evidence of this is essential. Optimisation must not void plant warranty.
Optimisation will achieve:
- For multiple chiller systems, chiller sequencing based on actual loading and
overall system COPs
Mechanical I- Refrigeration Plant Chiller Plant - Condenser water relief. Temperature and flow optimisation.
I 32.02.04
Engineer HVAC Chillers Optimisation - For multiple pump system, pump sequencing
- For multiple tower system, tower control sequencing
- Chilled water reset, designed to optimise flow and temperature efficiency at
load.
The use of proprietary (closed) optimisation protocols is prohibited. Monash
I 32.02.05 University staff must be trained in the maintenance and interrogation of the
system.
Optimisation will be implemented using the existing Building Automation
System (BAS). BAS will poll all relevant plant inputs and either:
I 32.02.06 - perform optimisation on the BAS or,
- pass on data to a BAS overlay product via native protocol i.e. modbus or
bacnet.
Mechanical I- Refrigeration Plant Chiller Plant BAS overlay proposals must contain fail safe design, where in the event of
I 32.02.07
Engineer HVAC Chillers Optimisation comms loss, the plant and devices will default to localised chiller control.
Mechanical I- Refrigeration Plant Chiller Plant Selection of manufacturer's who offer service through nominated suppliers
I 32.02.08
Engineer HVAC Chillers Optimisation only are discouraged.
Implement a Condenser Water Relief Strategy.
Condenser water temperature should be variable to maximise the
performance of the chiller and maximise benefit of cool air temperatures.
Part load performance curves, condenser water temperatures of chiller
Mechanical I- Refrigeration Plant Condenser Water should be used in conjunction with a floating condenser water temperature
I 32.03
Engineer HVAC Chillers Relief Strategy relative to ambient air temperature to maximise the efficiency of the chiller.
Condenser water relief requires, chilled water and condenser water flow and
return temperatures, a flow meter in the chiller water and condenser water
loops and a ambient temperature and dew point sensor to keep condenser
cooling water temp 3 degrees above dew point.
Chiller Control Strategy should be implemented under the following
conditions:
- Chiller should respond to cooling load called from the field, not return water
temperature (which is not a good reference for chiller control).
Mechanical I- Refrigeration Plant Chiller Control
I 32.04 - Chiller part load efficiency should be analysed to identify optimal
Engineer HVAC Chillers Strategy
performance range and staging of multiple chillers. ‘J’ curves should be
generated to identify optimal staging strategy.
- Water cooled chillers should have condenser water temperature strategy to
optimise chiller efficiency, refer to condenser water control.
Vapour Compression Chillers to have the following Minimum Coefficient of
Performance (Type | Capacity (kW R) | Min COP):
- Air cooled with Condenser | All Capacities | 3.5
- Air cooled without Condenser | All Capacities | 3.6
- Water cooled, Reciprocating | All Capacities | 4.85
Chiller selection I 32.05 - Water Cooled (Rotary Screw and Scroll) | <528 kW | 5.1
- Water Cooled (Rotary Screw and Scroll) | 528-1055 kW | 5.65
- Water Cooled (Rotary Screw and Scroll) | >1055 kW | 6.35
- Water Cooled, Centrifugal | < 528 kW | 5.75
- Water Cooled, Centrifugal | > 528-1055 kW | 6.4
- Water Cooled, Centrifugal | > 1055 kW | 7.0
Absorption chillers must be double-effect type to maximise the coefficient of
Mechanical I- Refrigeration Plant performance (COP).
Absorption Chillers I 32.06
Engineer HVAC Chillers Ideally absorption chillers utilise renewable or waste heat as the energy
source.
Mechanical I- Refrigeration Plant Helical Screw Helical Screw chiller must be not considered, unless specified by the
I 32.07
Engineer HVAC Chillers Chillers University.
Mechanical I- Refrigeration Plant Centrifugal When centrifugal chillers are the technology choice, variable speed drive type
I 32.08
Engineer HVAC Chillers Chillers centrifugal chillers must be selected.
Consideration is to be given to the use of closed circuit coolers rather than
conventional cooling towers to reduce risk of legionella. Cooling Towers shall
Mechanical I- be designed and installed in such a manner as to reduce the use of potable
Cooling Towers Design Principles I 33.01
Engineer HVAC water. Harvested rainwater, where available, is to be used for makeup.
Adiabatic Coolers should be considered as a means to reduce water use and
eliminate legionella risk by eliminating conventional cooling towers.
Design in accordance with the OH & Safety Act, risk management plan, using
Mechanical I-
Cooling Towers Structure I 33.02 materials, drift eliminators, ladders, platforms and shading devices which
Engineer HVAC
ensure ease of maintenance, cleaning and resistance to ultraviolet radiation.
Mechanical I-
Cooling Towers Fan Cylinder I 33.03 Fan Cylinder to Use fibreglass. Screen to be stainless steel.
Engineer HVAC
Cooling tower fans must be used:
Mechanical I- - direct driven, high efficiency, rare earth magnet.
Cooling Towers Fan I 33.04
Engineer HVAC - direct exhaust upwards.
- all cooling tower fans must be driven by VSD’s and connected to BAS.
High-efficiency, rare earth magnet electric motors totally enclosed and tropic
Mechanical I- proofed.
Cooling Towers Motor I 33.05
Engineer HVAC Bearings to have a design life of 300,000 hours.
Select materials to ensure no corrosion of fan hub to motor shaft.
Mechanical I-
Cooling Towers Attenuator I 33.06 To fan outlet and inlet when noise level will be obtrusive.
Engineer HVAC
50

Power Supply and Lighting:
Mechanical I- Power Supply and - All power outlets must be compliance with IP56 requirements.
Cooling Towers I 33.07
Engineer HVAC Lighting - Light fittings must be compliance with IP56 requirements.
- All dosing equipment shall be hard wired.
Fill:
Mechanical I- - Remain in dry position during periods of non operation.
Cooling Towers Fill I 33.08
Engineer HVAC - To be easy to handle and clean in sections not exceeding 300mm (W) x
1830mm (L) x 300mm (D).
Water Distribution:
- Components to be removable for ease of cleaning, without needing to
Mechanical I-
Cooling Towers Water Distribution I 33.09 remove eliminators.
Engineer HVAC
- Must have a water meter on a supply pipe and discharge pipe, connected to
BAS or other monitoring system.
Dosing equipment:
- All cooling towers must be equipped with “Cooling Tower Dose and
Mechanical I- Bleeding Controller”.
Cooling Towers Dosing Equipment I 33.10
Engineer HVAC - The dosing system has to be connected to the BAS and able to send SMS
alert in event of low chemical concentration in the cooling tower.
- All cooling towers must be equipped with a water sampling point.
Drift Elimination:
Mechanical I-
Cooling Towers Drift Elimination I 33.11 - Modules to facilitate cleaning and maintenance.
Engineer HVAC
- Support system to eliminate distortion of blades.
Mechanical I- Thermostat Thermostat Controls must be clearly visible in exact degrees to one decimal
Cooling Towers I 33.12
Engineer HVAC Controls place.
Inlet Louvres must be:
- Removable
Mechanical I-
Cooling Towers Inlet Louvres I 33.13 - Prevent splash out.
Engineer HVAC
- Prevent sunlight penetration to interior.
- Two pass configuration installed at 90 degrees
The access must be designed in accordance with the OH& Safety Act
requirements and other State and Federal regulations:
Mechanical I- - Provide ladder to top of tower.
Cooling Towers Access I 33.14
Engineer HVAC - Provide safety railing when tower is 2.60M or higher.
- Provide safe access across basin area.
- Provide a platform to perform service and inspection.
All Valves must:
- Provide appropriately located isolation and control valves to facilitate
Mechanical I- Water Reticulation effective maintenance and operation.
Valves I 34.01
Engineer HVAC Systems - Be labelled
- Valves carrying thermal fluids to be insulated.
- Addressable balancing valves must be used.
Provide temperature and pressure gauges on supply and return off
condenser water loops. Provide temperature and pressure gauges on supply
Mechanical I- Water Reticulation
Gauges I 34.02 and return of:
- All chilled and heating water loops.
- Cooling and heating coils.
Mechanical I- Water Reticulation Ensure design facilitates treatment regime. All closed water system must
Water Treatment I 34.03
Engineer HVAC Systems have a designated dosing pot.
Pumps must:
- Be Grundfoss or approved equal
- Be elected at 1440 Rpm/minimum 80% efficiency
Mechanical I- Water Reticulation - Have motors to be sized for maximum pump impeller diameter
Pumps I 34.04
Engineer HVAC Systems - Be in line circulators could be selected for higher RPM.
- Have condensate pumps must not be used unless a project specific
“Exemption to use “has been approved by the University. Where approved,
alarm monitoring and system interlocks must be provided through the BAS.
Mechanical I- Water Reticulation Must be selected to operate at highest efficiency under University Supply
Humidifiers I 34.05
Engineer HVAC Systems water purity conditions.
Mechanical I- Water Reticulation Water to Water Heat Exchangers must be Shell and Tube. Plate exchangers are not
I 34.06
Engineer HVAC Systems Heat Exchangers permitted without prior approval.
Noise levels are to be maintained as per the following table or as per the
current Australian Standards and EPA Guidelines or better. Maximum internal
Noise Rating (NR) :
- Lecture theatres - 30
Mechanical I- Mechanical Services
I 35 - Professorial suites, Associate Deans, training, conference and seminar
Engineer HVAC Noise Levels
rooms - 38
- Senior academic staff, academic offices, managerial offices, meeting rooms,
syndicate and common rooms - 38
- Foyers, corridors, toilets and store rooms - 45
51

Existing mechanical services switchboards are located in most buildings. The
contractor must locate and identify the relevant MSSB at time of tender.
Equipment supplied from MSSB must include (but not be limited to):
- Split air-conditioning package systems supplied complete with control
stations and interconnections to Fan Coil Units.
- Fume cupboard exhaust fans controlled at the fume cupboards.
- Ventilated storage cupboards complete with local control switches.
Mechanical I- Mechanical Services
I 36 - Make-up air fans.
Engineer HVAC Switchboards
- Preheat systems.
- Local exhaust systems.
- Auto off Manual Switches and indicator lights on mechanical services
switchboards to match existing (including fire alarm indication).
- Contractors and thermal overloads must match existing for uniformity where
practical.
- All equipment associated with the mechanical services installation.
Mechanical I- All equipment must be bar-coded. Contractors must use only the University
Equipment Labelling I 37
Engineer HVAC approved bar-coding labelling system.
Drives for air conditioning systems must meet the following conditions:
- Direct drive, high efficiency motors are to be specified to maximise energy
efficiency.
- Where belt drives are specified, high efficiency belts (‘timing belts’) are to be
Mechanical I- used in preference to standard V-belts.
Drives I 38
Engineer HVAC - Belt guards to permit view of belt for rapid maintenance inspection.
- Access opening for measurement of drive speed.
- Guards to be easily removable.
- Equipment’ guards should be painted in bright colour (red or yellow)
- Guards to provide sufficient space for maximum belt stretch.
Mechanical I- Variable speed drives (VSD) must include “High End” harmonic and RFI
Variable Speed Drives VSDs I 39.01
Engineer HVAC filtering and must be of Danfoss or ABB manufacturer.
Retrofitting VSDs to include the following:
- Locate as close as permissible to the driven equipment
- Existing contactors must be removed
Mechanical I- - Power Isolator to be installed at and on the feed side of the VSD
Variable Speed Drives Retrofitting VSDs I 39.02
Engineer HVAC - Existing fire mode operation to be maintained
- MSSB mounted Manual/Off/Auto rotary switch to be maintained
- BAS to Alarm (Mismatch Fault) if operation is not synced at next ON/OFF
cycle
Mechanical I-
Ceiling Fans Design Criteria I 8.02 Ceiling/wall fans should not exceed 35W at maximum power.
Engineer HVAC
Fire The life cycle cost of the fire protection systems is to be considered and
J-
Protection General Design Principles J 01.01.01 minimised. Fire protection systems are to be designed such that they are
Fire Protection
Engineer maintainable in an easy, safe and cost effective manner.
Fire
J- Conduits, wiring and pipes are to be concealed as not to negativity impact on
Protection General Design Principles J 01.01.02
Fire Protection the aesthetic appearance and architecture of the buildings and campus.
Engineer
Fire
J- All Monash University owned buildings must have a fire detection system
Protection Fire Detection Systems General J 02.01.01
Fire Protection complying with AS1670.1 installed.
Engineer
Fire Fire detection systems shall be fully addressable networked system complete
J-
Protection Fire Detection Systems General J 02.01.02 with graphics capable of indicating individual detectors and devices on the
Fire Protection
Engineer Campus Graphical Control Centre.
Fire
J- Whenever devices are added to a fire detection system the batteries in the
Fire Protection panel are to be tested and upgraded to allow for any additional load.
Engineer
When any alteration or addition to the fire detection system is performed,
documentation must be provided strictly in accordance with the relevant
clauses of AS1670.1, particularly clause 7.2 documentation. This includes but
is not limited to the following:
Fire - Standard Form of Installer’s Statement for Fire Alarm System in Appendix
J-
Protection Fire Detection Systems General J 02.01.04 F
Fire Protection
Engineer - Commissioning Test Report in Appendix E of AS1670.1
- ASPIRE Reports for VESDA systems
- Log Report (clause 7.3)
- Colour Coded Block/ Zone Plans
- As installed drawings.
Fire
J- In addition to the BCA and Australian standards fire detection systems are to
Fire Protection be designed and installed to the manufacturer's requirements.
Engineer
Fire
J- Fire detection and EWIS systems are to be connected to the campus site fire
Protection Fire Detection Systems Design Principles J 02.02.01
Fire Protection and EWIS networks.
Engineer
Off site buildings owned by Monash are to have their fire detection and EWIS
Fire
J- panels connected into the Monash fire network via the Universitty LAN. This
Protection Fire Detection Systems Design Principles J 02.02.02
Fire Protection connection is to be non brigade calling. A local ASE is to be provided to alert
Engineer
the brigade.
Fire detection system must follow the standardised system for that campus as
Fire follows:
J- Fire Indicator
Protection Fire Detection Systems J 02.03 - Berwick and Clayton - Simplex 4100 Series
Fire Protection Panels
Engineer - Caulfield and Peninsula - Edwards EST3
- Parkville - Ampac
Detectors must be:
- Addressable
Fire
J- - Indicating
Protection Fire Detection Systems Detectors J 02.04.01
Fire Protection - Of a type that meets the fire panel manufacturer’s specifications
Engineer
- Certified to the relevant Australian Standards for performance and
compatibility with the fire panel
52

Fire
J- Smoke alarms are not to be used. Detector with sounder bases are
Fire Protection acceptable.
Engineer
For refurbishments, in the event that the existing detectors are not
Fire addressable, the fire zones affected by the refurbishment will be converted to
J-
Protection Fire Detection Systems Detectors J 02.04.03 addressable detection. Where more than 30% of a conventional detector
Fire Protection
Engineer zone is being modified the entire zone is to be updated to system compatible
addressable devices and the fire panel modified to suit.
Detectors for the Caulfield and Peninsula campuses where they are the
Fire
J- existing Ziton addressable detectors are to be upgraded to the most
Fire Protection technologically up to date addressable detectors for the Edwards EST3
Engineer
panel.
Fire Maintenance access is to be provided to concealed detectors. Concealed
J-
Protection Fire Detection Systems Detectors J 02.04.05 space detectors are to be provided with remote indicators and famco
Fire Protection
Engineer brackets.
Fire
J- Detector bases must be of a type that is interchangeable between different
Fire Protection types of detectors.
Engineer
The use of beam detectors instead of smoke detectors in high ceiling areas
Fire
J- such as atriums is to be considered to improve maintenance access and
Fire Protection safety. The beam transmitter and receiver are to be located to provide low
Engineer
risk maintenance access.
Fire
J- After hours library book returns located within a building are to be of 2 hour
Protection Fire Detection Systems Detectors Library J 02.04.08
Fire Protection fire rated construction and be fitted with a smoke detector.
Engineer
Fire
J- Mechanical Services Switchboards that have a fire mode are to auto reset
Protection Fire Detection Systems Interfaces J 02.05.01
Fire Protection upon fire alarm reset.
Engineer
Fire
J- Fire detection systems are to have a high level interface to the BAS and a low
Protection Fire Detection Systems Interfaces J 02.05.02
Fire Protection level alarm interface to security.
Engineer
Fire
J- Aspirating smoke detectors such as VESDA are to be programmed so the
Protection Fire Detection Systems VESDA Systems J 02.06.01
Fire Protection sensitivity suits the environment and not cause false alarms.
Engineer
Fire
J-
Protection Fire Detection Systems VESDA Systems J 02.06.02 Aspirating smoke detectors must be Xtralis.
Fire Protection
Engineer
Fire
J- Fire detection plans are to include the location of the control unit, filters, pipe
Fire Protection work and sampling points of aspirating smoke detectors.
Engineer
Fire
J- VESDA ASPIRE calacultations are to be provided with the as built
Fire Protection documentation and placed in the FIP.
Engineer
The programming labelling requirement for the Clayton fire system must
include the building name, floor, wing (if applicable), room number and zone
number.
Node Name:
<<Building name>> (Node<<none number>>) e.g., Robert Menzies/Arts
(Node 11)
Description:
BLD <<building number>> <<floor number>>FLR <<wing (if applicable)>>
RM<<room number>> AZF<<zone number>> PS or FS or MV (if applicable)
eg, BLD11 GNDFLR WEST RM10 AZF10
Point type:
Fire Programing
J- VERIFIED SMOKE DETECTOR etc (program defined).
Protection Fire Detection Systems Syntax (Clayton J 02.07
Fire Protection The acceptable abbreviations are as follows:
Engineer Only)
GND =Ground, 1ST= First Floor, 2ND = Second Floor, 3RD = Third Floor,
etc.
FLR = floor
WST = West Wing, or EST = East Wing, STH = South Wing
RM =Room, 143=ROOM 143
PS = Pressure Switch
FS = Flow Switch
MV = Monitor Valve
All proposed programming changes are to be approved by the fire control

room.
Fire Fire Detection For all fire detection system changes the head end graphics is to updated/
J-
Protection Fire Detection Systems Systems Graphic J 02.08.01 modified. Graphics are to include a site plan, building zone plan(s) and
Fire Protection
Engineer Systems isolation screen.
Fire Fire Detection
J- Fire detection systems must not be placed on-line/operational until the
Protection Fire Detection Systems Systems Graphic J 02.08.02
Fire Protection relevant changes have been updated to all graphics terminals.
Engineer Systems
Works on the fire detection system network including panel programming
Fire must be prior approved by Buildings and Property Services Operations.
J- Fire Network
Protection Fire Detection Systems J 02.09.01 Access to the network will need to be booked. During busy periods the lead
Fire Protection Changes
Engineer time can be weeks. Contact Buildings and Property Services Operations for
more information.
Fire Connection of new Fire Indicator Panels onto the network will only take place
J- Fire Network
Protection Fire Detection Systems J 02.09.02 when the new installation has been reviewed and deemed acceptable and
Fire Protection Changes
Engineer compliant by Buildings & Property Operations.
Fire
J- Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler, hydrant and hose reel test drains are to be installed. Test drains
Protection J 03
Fire Protection Sprinkler System are to flow into water harvesting infrastructure.
Engineer
53

Fire
J- Fire Hydrant & The fire services are to come off the dedicated campus fire main where one
Protection Water Supply J 03.01.01
Fire Protection Sprinkler System exists.
Engineer
Fire Power supplies for pump sets and associated controls that provide water into
J- Fire Hydrant &
Protection Water Supply J 03.01.02 a campus wide fire main that supplies a large number of buildings is to be
Fire Protection Sprinkler System
Engineer provided with standby backup power.
Fire Automatic sprinkler systems must be designed, installed and commissioned
J- Fire Hydrant & Automatic
Protection J 03.02.01 in accordance with the BCA and relevant Australian Standards including
Fire Protection Sprinkler System Sprinkler Systems
Engineer AS2118.
Pressure switches must be micro switch type with a pressure range of up to
2000 kPa.
Fire
J- Fire Hydrant & Automatic Pressure switches must provide the following functions:
Protection J 03.02.02
Fire Protection Sprinkler System Sprinkler Systems - Start jacking pump
Engineer
- Start booster pump
- Provide ancillary alarm via the FIP
Sprinkler heads are to be placed so they can be easily maintained.
Fire
J- Fire Hydrant & Automatic Concealed heads must be easily accessible; maintenance access is to be
Fire Protection Sprinkler System Sprinkler Systems provided. Especially in ceiling spaces, lift shafts and service risers as
Engineer
applicable.
Fire Other than accommodation units and building void spaces, Ordinary Hazard
J- Fire Hydrant & Automatic
Protection J 03.02.04 shall be the minimum grade of sprinkler protection. Light Hazard grade shall
Fire Protection Sprinkler System Sprinkler Systems
Engineer not be used.
Fire
J- Fire Hydrant & Automatic Quick response sprinklers are to be used when protecting spaces to the
Fire Protection Sprinkler System Sprinkler Systems Ordinary Hazard grade.
Engineer
Library stack areas greater than 100m2 in sprinkler protected buildings are to
Fire
J- Fire Hydrant & Automatic be protected to a minimum standard of Extra Hazard Grade 1. Library smaller
Protection Library J 03.02.06
Fire Protection Sprinkler System Sprinkler Systems stack spaces and reading areas are to be protected to a minimum standard of
Engineer
Ordinary Hazard Grade 3.
Fire
J- Fire Hydrant & Automatic Laboratories with chemicals are to be protected to a minimum standard of
Protection Labs J 03.02.07
Fire Protection Sprinkler System Sprinkler Systems Ordinary Hazard Grade 3 Special in sprinkler protected buildings.
Engineer
Hydrant systems must:
- Be designed, installed and commissioned in accordance with the BCA and
relevant Australian Standards including AS2419.1.
- External hydrants to have full bollard protection.
Fire
J- Fire Hydrant & - The location of internal hydrants is to be in accordance with the BCA,
Protection Hydrant Systems J 03.03
Fire Protection Sprinkler System Australian Standards and the local fire fighting authority but preferably in the
Engineer
stairwell areas of the building.
- All hydrants to be provide with ‘storz’ couplings or in accordance with the
local fire fighting authority.
- Hydrant standpipes must be dual head type.
Hose reels must:
- Be designed, installed and commissioned in accordance with the BCA and
relevant Australian Standards including AS2441.
Fire - Be fitted with a shut off device to allow isolation and removal of the hose
J- Fire Hydrant &
Protection Hose Reels J 03.04 reel. Do not install layflat fire hoses.
Fire Protection Sprinkler System
Engineer - Swinging hose reels to be used where hose reel cupboard or cabinet
requires such to achieve clearance accesses.
- Fire hose reels are to draw from the dedicated hydrant system where
available within the building.
Hose reel cabinets:
Fire
J- Fire Hydrant & Hose Reels · Where hose reel cupboards are not provided, must be finished in red with
Protection J 03.05
Fire Protection Sprinkler System cabinets appropriate signage.
Engineer
· External hose reel cabinets are to be fitted with lockable lever handles.
Fire Gas suppression systems must use an alternative to ozone depleting
J- Gas Suppression
Protection J 04 substances by using retardants such as Novec 1230 or inert gases suited to
Fire Protection Systems
Engineer the applications.
Fire Fire extinguishers and blankets must be designed, installed and
J-
Protection Fire Extinguishers J 05 commissioned in accordance with the BCA and relevant Australian Standards
Fire Protection
Engineer including AS1841 & AS2444.
Where commercial kitchens are present in buildings without automatic
sprinkler protection, and where the cooking range includes a deep fat fryer,
Fire Wet Chemical
J- Kitchen/ provide a pre-engineered package wet chemical type automatic special
Protection Fire Extinguishers Extinguishing J 05.01
Fire Protection Kitchenettes extinguishing system arranged to discharge across the cooking surfaces
Engineer System
below the kitchen range hood and interlocked to shut-down the gas supply to
the kitchen ranges.
All University owned buildings shall have an EWIS complying with AS1670.4
and shall:
- Use cone speakers. Horn speakers are only to be used in areas that can’t
be easily covered by cone speakers.
Fire Emergency Warning &
J- - Have the amplifiers and batteries upgraded to suit whenever devices are
Protection Intercommunication General J 06.01.01
Fire Protection added onto a system.
Engineer System (EWIS)
- Be utilised for crisis public announcements.
- Connected and fully commissioned onto the CERPS system on the clayton
campus.
- Utilise WIPs on the Clayton and Caulfield campuses as emergency phones.
When any alterations or additions to the Emergency Warning and
Intercommunication System is performed, documentation must be provided in
strict accordance with the relevant clauses of AS1670.4, particularly clause
Fire Emergency Warning & 6.4 Documentation. This includes, but is not limited to the following:
J-
Protection Intercommunication General J 06.01.02 - Standard Form of Installer’s Statement for Sound System and Intercom
Fire Protection
Engineer System (EWIS) System for emergency purposes;
- Commissioning Test Report in appendix E of AS1670.4;.
- Log Report (clause 7.3);
- As installed drawings
54

The EWIS must follow the standardised system for that campus as follows:
Fire Emergency Warning & - Simplex QE90 (Clayton)
J-
Protection Intercommunication EWIS Panel J 06.02 - Ziton (Caulfield & Peninsula)
Fire Protection
Engineer System (EWIS) - Ampac EV3000 (Berwick)
- QE90 (Parkville)
Fire Emergency Warning & The WIP phones for the Clayton and Caulfield campuses are to be connected
J- Emergency
Protection Intercommunication J 06.03 to the campus emergency phone system. (WIPs call security when lifted
Fire Protection Telephones
Engineer System (EWIS) outside evacuation mode.)
The Clayton campus uses the QE90 EWIS system to perform crisis public
CERPS – Central announcements and emergency phone duties. The QE90 EWIS panels are
Fire Emergency Warning & Emergency linked through an intricate network of switching nodes via data and audio
J-
Protection Intercommunication Response Phone J 06.04.01 buses. Due to the complexity of the network and restrictions on
Fire Protection
Engineer System (EWIS) System (Clayton configurations and cable lengths Simplex (Tyco) need to be consulted for
Campus Only) design assessment when adding to this system. When the EWIS panel is set
to auto the WIPs will ring a WIP in the security control room.
Warden present switches mounted on an engraved metal plate are to be
installed adjacent to all WIPs on the Clayton campus. These switches are
used to indicate the presence of a warden. Refer to the campus Essential
CERPS – Central Services Technical Officer for the standard plate and key switch arrangement.
Fire Emergency Warning & Emergency An additional cable pair will be required at all WIP phones above the standard
J-
Protection Intercommunication Response Phone J 06.04.02 WIP wiring to connect the warden present switch into the system. The panel
Fire Protection
Engineer System (EWIS) System (Clayton WIP fault lights are used as a warden presence indicator activated by the
Campus Only) corresponding WIP warden present switch. WIP faults will be initially
indicated by the fire phone system fault light. To determine which WIP is in
fault, a Show WIP Fault button when pressed will use the WIP presence
indicator lights to indicate the faulty WIP.
For all EWIS changes the contractor is to update/ modify all computer head
Fire Emergency Warning & end graphics (where computer installed), relevant drawings, schedules, and
J- EWIS Graphic
Protection Intercommunication J 06.05 signage to reflect the alterations and additions. EWIS panels must not be
Fire Protection Systems
Engineer System (EWIS) placed on-line/operational until the relevant changes have been updated to all
graphics terminals.
Works on the EWIS network are to be prior approved by Buildings and
Property Services Operations at least five business days’ prior to the works
Fire Emergency Warning & commencing. Works must be carried out in strict accordance with the
J- EWIS / CERP
Protection Intercommunication J 06.06 manufacturer’s requirements and by suitably trained and well experienced
Fire Protection Network Changes
Engineer System (EWIS) technicians. Connection of new EWIS Panels onto the network will only take
place when the new installation has been reviewed and deemed acceptable
and compliant by Monash Buildings and Property Services Operations.
On completion of the installation works, provide independent certification in
accordance with Authority requirements that all works have been inspected
Fire
J- and tested and comply with regulations and standards including copies of all
Protection Testing & Certification J 07
Fire Protection essential services certifications and any commissioning reports. Copies of the
Engineer
compliance certification shall be included in the operation and maintenance
manuals.
Provide Operating and Maintenance Manuals including:
- Description of the systems;
- Equipment lists
- Operating instructions for systems and equipment
Fire Operating & - Manufacturer's Maintenance instructions for all equipment
J- Operation &
Protection Maintenance J 08.01 - Spare parts list with manufacturer and catalogue no.
Fire Protection Maintenance
Engineer Manual - Copies of documentation in accordance with the relevant standards.
- Copies of commissioning records.
- Copies of all test and approval certificates.
- Copies of the independent certification.
- Copies of as-installed drawings.
The contractor is to update all existing as installed documentation including:

- As installed drawings in the panel or plant room.
Fire - As installed drawings in the maintenance essential safety measures folders.
J- Operation & Documentation
Protection J 08.02 - Zone block plans.
Fire Protection Maintenance Update
Engineer - Circuit layout drawings
- Schedules
- Head end computer graphics where installed.
Fire For new systems the regulatory required maintenance as per the occupancy
J- Operation &
Protection DLP J 08.03 permit or certificate of final inspection is to be carried out in the defect liability
Fire Protection Maintenance
Engineer period including the annual routines.
Fire
J- Operation & Evidence of maintenance and the annual system condition report as per
Protection DLP J 08.04
Fire Protection Maintenance AS1851 is required at the end of the defects liability period.
Engineer
Provide update to University asset registers to the Monash University
standard and format for the addition and removal of assets:
- Fire Detection systems
Fire
J- Operation & - EWIS systems
Protection Asset Register J 08.05
Fire Protection Maintenance - Sprinkler systems,
Engineer
- Fire Hydrants & Hose Reel systems
- Portables
- Fire Compartmentation (fire/smoke doors, pentrations etc)
The life cycle cost of the electrical systems is to be considered and
Electrical K-
General Design Principles K 01.01 minimised. Electrical systems are to be designed such that they are
Engineer Electrical
maintainable in an easy, safe and cost effective manner.
55

Adequacy of supply must be assessed prior to proceeding with any electrical
design. Point of supply approval is required by Building and Property,
Electrical K-
Electricity Supply K 02 Planning. An increase in the maximum demand above that allowed by the
Engineer Electrical
power authority is to be requested and approved by the power authority as
part of the design.
Metering is to be provided at each building to enable effective monitoring of
the energy use throughout the building. Metering and submetering is to be
provided for:
- LV side of each transformer
- Each building's incoming supply
- Each tenancy
Electrical K-
Metering Metering Density K 03.01 - Mechanical services 2
Engineer Electrical
- Substantive energy users (140A or greater) within the building
- Separate monitoring of lighting and general power consumption for primary
areas (per floor) greater than 200m2.
- On generator backed up supplies so to indicate the total demand/load on
the generator. This meter must indicate load under normal power and backup
power situations.
Meters must be:
- IEC Class 1 approved
- IEC Class 0.5 accuracy for 800A and above
- WF Energy Controls extended range type CTs with accuracy of AS60044.1
Class 0.5S or approved equivalent
Electrical K- Meter
Metering K 03.02.01 - Capable of measuring Voltage (V), Current (A), Energy (kWhr), Power
Engineer Electrical Requirements
(kW), Total reactive power (KVAr), Total apparent power (kVA), Power Factor
(%), total harmonic distortion (THD) and maximum demand (kW)
- Backlit 6 digit display for reading V, A , kW, kW, kVAr, kVA, PF% and Max
demand kW
- Installed with potential fuses and test block.
Electrical K- Meter All tenancies are to be sub metered. The submeter must be current
Metering Tenancy K 03.02.02
Engineer Electrical Requirements Australian Government National Measurements Institute pattern approved.
All metering must be networked to the University’s BAS (see Section K:
Appendix - Electrical - Item K1):
- Via a BACnet IP interface, (BACnet capable meters or meters connected
via modbus, to a BACnet IP interface)
- A dedicated controller router must not be shared with other building controls
such as HVAC.
- Communicate via an appropriate BTL listed controller router with existing
University BAS systems via native BACnet/IP. The controller router must
Electrical K- Section K: Appendix - Electrical -
Metering Meter Networking K 03.03.01 utilise the University’s ethernet network.
Engineer Electrical Item K1
- Device names and metering values named using the Monash University
standard naming convention (Campus, Building Number/Name/Address,
Location/Plant, Point/Device name)
- All BACnet points must follow the University’s BAS naming conventions as
described in the University BAS standards.
- Must have the flexibility to be updated on any of the university’s BAS
systems (Andover, Alerton, Tridium), using a university appointed BAS
service contractor.
The meter monitoring must be:
- Setup with trend logs and graphics
- Capable of reporting all meters types on a single graph i.e. electricity meter
vs gas meter vs water meter.
- Able to display meter trend logs vs plant trend logs. i.e. mechanical meter
vs VSD speed.
Electrical K-
Metering Meter Networking K 03.03.02 - Able to display at least 5 trend logs on the same graph with each trend log
Engineer Electrical
assigned a selectable colour and graph scale with selectable unlimited time
period.
- Graphs and reporting to be user configurable.
- With at least 30 days of data stored at local controller router level, with
extended logging exported to an open SQL database, providing at least 2
years FIFO. Using maximum 15 minute intervals of logged values.
Following installation all meters must be empirically calibrated and all relevant
Electrical K-
Metering Meter Networking K 03.03.03 measurements including CT ratios, kWh/pulse and meter programs forwarded
Engineer Electrical
to the university BAS administrator.
Electrical K- Single line diagrams of the installed metering network must be generated and
Metering Meter Networking K 03.03.04
Engineer Electrical forwarded to university BAS administrator.
Where building energy display screens are required, a scrolling display must
be provided. 4 pages displaying live building electricity, gas and water
Electrical K- consumption and a page highlighting environmental initiatives such as rain
Metering Meter Networking K 03.03.05
Engineer Electrical water harvesting. Each page must compare current period to an older period
i.e. this week’s consumption vs last weeks consumption and/or this month’s
consumption compared to last month’s consumption.
High voltage cabling must be:
- 3 core copper XLPE insulated cable rated to the appropriate voltage.
- Sized to allow for sufficient load growth in the high voltage rings. Generally
not less than 30%.
Electrical K- High Voltage - High voltage rings must be able to support the entire ring load in either
High Voltage K 04.01
Engineer Electrical Cable direction.
- Buried to a minimum of 900 mm.
- Minimum of 2 x 150 mm (1 used, 1 spare) and 50 mm (comms/SCADA)
conduits per underground run.
- Comply with AS2067, AS1125, AS1429 & AS3863
56

For HV Cable as a minimum the following tests must be carried out at
commissioning:
- Continuity and phase sequence - to prove all conductors are continuous
throughout length of cable and to check phase identification.
Electrical K- High Voltage - Sheath Integrity – to check for damage to outer sheaths
Engineer Electrical Cable Testing - Insulation resistance – to check insulation resistance and pick up major
problems with cable.
- HV VLF or HV DC - to detect manufacturing, installation or workmanship
defects in the cable.
- Test results are to be included in the Operation and Maintenance manuals.
HV switchgear is to comply with AS2067, AS2650 & AS62271. HV switchgear
has been standardised to the Schneider RM6 complete with Sepam
protection relays. Ring Main Units must be of modular design complete with:
- Internal Arc Protection (Minimum AF classification),
- Cable routes via Bottom Entry and Bottom Exit,
- Live High Voltage parts to be have minimum IP rating of IP67,
- Fitted with DC control circuits,
- Minimum of 2 off motorised cable isolators and 2 off transformer feeder
circuit breakers.
- Cable isolators to be minimum rating of 630A,
- Circuit breakers to be minimum rating of 200A,
- Transformer feeder circuit breakers to have motor operated, fast acting,
stored energy operating mechanisms powered by the substation DC auxiliary
supply system and to be controllable by the local control panel and SCADA
system,
- Cable isolator switches to have motor operated, fast acting, stored energy
operating mechanisms powered by the substation DC auxiliary supply system
Electrical K-
High Voltage Ring Main Units K 04.03 and to be controllable by the local control panel and SCADA system,
Engineer Electrical
- Position indicators for each circuit breaker and cable isolator switch,
- Earth switches provided for all feeders, located on the cable side of
functional device,
- Voltage Presence Indicating System (VPIS) for each circuit breaker and
cable isolator switch,
- Functional key interlocks to prevent closing of live equipment to earth and
opening of the dry type transformer enclosure while equipment is live.
- Protection relays and CTs for each circuit breaker
- SEPAM protection relays
- Extensible at least at one end.
- Surge arrestors provided for each cable feeder panel.
- The nameplate must provide the Purchaser's name, Order number,
manufacturer’s name, Item tag number, Year of manufacturer, Rating
information such as voltage, current, frequency, short circuit, insulation level,
impulse level, IP rating etc.
- Identification labels must be attached to each removable cover/door of the
switchboard to identify an internal CT turns ratio, class and rating.
All HV switchgear must be tested in accordance with all relevant Australian
Standards including:
Electrical K- Ring Main Units
High Voltage K 04.04 - Insulation and contact resistance testing
Engineer Electrical Testing
- Secondary protection system and trips
- Mechanism functional tests including any remote tripping
High Voltage Transformers must be:
- Cast resin dry type with copper windings.
- Oil type when installed externally.
- Transformers must be naturally cooled (AN – Air Natural) and able to
perform continuously without assisted means in the design enclosure.
- Minimum of 11 taps +10% to 5% (in 2.5% increments)
- Suitably sized generally 2 MVA to supply the maximum demands of the
Electrical K- High Voltage loads with an allowance for 30% spare capacity (unless otherwise instructed).
Engineer Electrical Transformers - Must have the capability (above the spare capacity) to deliver power at 20%
overload for a period of two (2) hours in each twenty-four (24) hour period.
- Alarms to be connected to the SCADA were available or the BAS system.
- Surge arrestors must be provided at the HV terminals for each transformer
feeder cable.
- Enclosure key interlocked with the HV switch to prevent access while
equipment is live.
- Comply with AS2067, AS2374 & AS3953
Transformers must be tested and commissioned in accordance with all
relevant Australian Standards including:
- Insulation resistance testing
High Voltage
Electrical K- - Alarm (temperature, fan, etc.) and interface system testing
High Voltage Transformers K 04.06
Engineer Electrical - DGA, acidity, water content, dielectric strength and resistivity testing of oil
Testing
for oil transformers.
- Secondary protection system and trips
- Mechanism functional tests including any remote tripping
The substation DC supply system shall provide the DC supply requirements
for:
- Protection Circuits,
Electrical K- High Voltage - Control Circuits,
High Voltage K 04.07.01
Engineer Electrical Battery Banks - Switchgear trip and closed circuits and motors,
- Indications and alarms,
- SCADA system and RTU,
- Other applications as required.
57

Substation DC supply systems must:
- Be enclosed in a steel cabinet of adequate design for the intended purpose
including access to batteries for maintenance.
- Have valve regulated, sealed lead-acid recombination cell type battery
Electrical K- High Voltage banks with a minimum design life of 10 years.
Engineer Electrical Battery Banks - Be rated to supply the full substation DC load allowing for additional 50%
future load for a 24 hour period with battery charger out of service.
- Allow for one operation of every switch and circuit breaker supplied within
the 24 hour period with the battery charger out of service.
- Lifting handles provided for components in excess of 5 kg.
Electrical K- Sufficent access to be provided to substation for the serving and replacement
High Voltage Substations K 04.08.01
Engineer Electrical of equipment.
Indoor substations are to be provided with adequate ventilation/cooling to
Electrical K-
High Voltage Substations K 04.08.02 ensure the operation of the equipment. Appripriate filtering is to be provided
Engineer Electrical
to reduce the buid up of dust and dirt on equipment.
Electrical K- As Installed
High Voltage K 04.09.01 The HV Operation and Maintenance procedure is to be updated.
Engineer Electrical Documentation
Electrical K- As Installed The HV system single line diagram is to be updated and copies mounted in
Engineer Electrical Documentation each substation.
The HV SCADA system applies to Monash owned high voltage infrastructure
on the Clayton campus only. The HV SCADA control and monitoring system
must:
- Provide unmanned operation and control of the high voltage system
- Support distributed processing architecture, be modular and suitable for
future modular expansion (open architecture type with propensity of addition
of new boards),
- Be programmable and use an industry standard real time multitasking
operating system,
- Be capable of being used as a stand-alone system for the substation
equipment,
- Monitor and control, and at the same time integrate with the existing
SCADA Master System on site,
- Support PC (laptop) interface to the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) for
Electrical K- High Voltage SCADA configuration and diagnostic and local Human Machine Interface (HMI)
K 05
Engineer Electrical System functions emulation,
- Capable of monitoring, supervision and control of substation switchgear
and ancillaries, while ensuring a minimum number of hardwired cable signals
from the field to the RTU,
- Capable of protection relay setting download and modification,
- Capable of alarm handling, reporting and recording and downloading of
alarm and disturbance records,
- Notification of alarms via BAS
- Fans or electro-mechanical cooling devices must not be used in the RTUs,
- Measure, record, store and retrieval of demand data for transformers and
cables.
- Secure interface with the BAS/BMS system for the transmission of alarms,
equipment status and load data.
- BAS/BMS must be configured to provide an alert to maintenance staff of
critical alarms.
The architecture of the SCADA system must consist of:
- Server PC and HMI PC located in the main intake substation,
Electrical K- High Voltage SCADA
Architecture K 05.01 - SCADA system network cable reticulated to each substation,
Engineer Electrical System
- Local intelligent electrical devices IED/RTUs located in each substation,
- Local control panels in each substation.
Electrical K- High Voltage SCADA SCADA Backbone The SCADA backbone cabling must be a single mode 8 core fibre terminated
K 05.02
Engineer Electrical System Cable into the fibre optic patch frame in each substation.
A suitably sized and IP rated SCADA communications rack must be provided
in each substation to house the:
- Fibre optic patch frame which is connected to the backbone cable,
Substations K 05.03.01 - 12 port Ethernet switch,
- Substation RTU & IEDs,
- Space for future active equipment for other monitoring or controlled
services (such as BMS, Security, Fire Services Monitoring and the like).
RTUs must act as a gateway for all substation signals (including from the IED’
Substations K 05.03.02 s within the substation) and also present all these signals on screens and
alarm and event lists at the Intake Substation HMI.
All data is to be processed where it is generated. The substation RTUs/IEDs
Electrical K- High Voltage SCADA are to be fully capable of receiving and processing signals, performing the
Substations K 05.03.03
Engineer Electrical System required tasks and relaying the information through the network to the
SCADA server.
All RTUs/IEDs devices must conduct their protection, control and
Substations K 05.03.04 measurement functions in a real time environment and must be capable of
communicating with the existing SCADA system at the HV intake Substation.
Electrical K- High Voltage SCADA RTUs/IEDs must be capable of being taken out of service without disrupting
Engineer Electrical System other RTUs/IEDs and the overall system.
All signals and alarms from the HV equipment must be hard wired to the
Substations K 05.03.06 substation RTU and connected to the HV intake substation SCADA system
via the SCADA system network.
The signals and alarms for substation ancillary services such as AC and DC
Electrical K- High Voltage SCADA supply systems, room pressurising systems, fire systems etc. must also be
Engineer Electrical System hard wired to the substation RTU and connected to the HV intake substation
SCADA system via the SCADA network.
58

An be adequately ventilated IP51 rated local control and monitoring panel
must be installed in each substation;
- To enable the operator to control all RMU switchgear within the substation
and
- Allow signals to be used for remote monitoring and operation via the
campus SCADA system.
Electrical K- High Voltage SCADA Local Control
K 05.04 - Local/ Remote switch or circuit breaker Open/ Close functions,
Engineer Electrical System Panel
- Switch or circuit breaker open green indicator light
- Switch or circuit breaker closed red indicator light
- Earth switch closed white indicator light
- Transformer high temperature yellow indicating light
- Indicating lights, pushbuttons, control switches, relays and indicating
equipment appropriately labelled.
Electrical K- High Voltage SCADA Testing & The SCADA system is to be full function tested with all points, alarms, data,
K 05.05
Engineer Electrical System Commissioning interfaces, controls etc. tested.
All switchboards, switchgear and control gear is to be designed and installed
in accordance with all relevant Australian Standards including but not limited
to:
- AS 1243
- AS 2184
- AS 3111
Electrical K-
Switchboards K 06 - AS 3133
Engineer Electrical
- AS 3190
- AS 3439
- AS 3947
- AS 4506
- AS 60269
- AS 60044
Main switchboards must be designed:
- To mitigate against the occurrence of internal arcing faults
- Have bus bars and switchgear that withstand a short circuit current for 1
second from its respective supply.
- Bus bars sized to the initial load plus 30%
Electrical K- Main - Provided with 10% spare circuit breakers and 20% spare circuit breaker
Switchboards K 06.01.01
Engineer Electrical Switchboards space.
- Form 4 segregation for a designed max. demand ≥1600A
- Form 3B segregation for a designed max. demand <1600A
- Form 2 segregation for a designed max. demand <800A
- Form 1 segregation with shrouded incoming terminals where max. demand
is <400A and is the only switchboard for the building.
A full set of shop drawings are to be submitted to the Services Consultant and
Electrical K- Main
Switchboards K 06.01.02 the Buildings and Property Division Planning department for approval prior to
Engineer Electrical Switchboards
construction.
Electrical K- Main Doors to the switchboard room or cupboard are to be labelled ‘Main
Engineer Electrical Switchboards Switchboard’ or ‘Main Distribution Board’ depending on classification.
59

Main switchboard must be constructed by experienced manufacturer's and
construction must:
- Controls segregated in own compartment.
- IP43 protection for internally installed switchboards and IP54 or above to
suit conditions for external switchboards.
- Allow for easy future extension of busbars without drilling or cutting.
- Cubicles designed for ease of access both for initial installation, wiring and
testing and for maintenance, removal and replacement of equipment and
wiring during the life of the installation.
- Divided into a logical layout for quick recognition of functional groups.
- Mild steel construction unless other materials, e.g. stainless steel are
required. Panels must be furniture grade sheet. Thickness must be
adequate to prevent distortion and to withstand the effect of faults.
- External/Weatherproof switchboards must be marine-grade corrosion-
resistant aluminium or 3CR12 corrosion-resisting steel construction and fitted
with a sloped roof extending over the door. Gutters must be formed around
door openings.
- Rear access to cubicles must be provided by doors or removable panels.
- Doors are to be hung on heavy duty lift off hinges with stainless steel pins.
Each door to be fitted with a recessed or flush type lever handle. A vertical
locking bar system with guides for top and bottom fastenings is to be provided
Main on all doors greater than 1000mm in height.
Electrical K-
Switchboards Switchboards K 06.02 - All door hardware to contain cylinder locks keyed to CL-001 keys. Provide
Engineer Electrical
Construction two keys per lock.
- Escutcheon plates and panels are to be hinged and removable with
chromium plated 'D' lifting handles to assist in lifting off hinges.
- Removable panels must be supplied with suitable lifting handles and
captive knurl-headed fixing screws.
- Heaters with thermostatic control must be mounted in the bottom of
cubicles to prevent condensation in adverse environments and where
exposed to weather.
- Provide ventilation louvres with internal brass mesh screens to prevent
entry of insects.
- Cubicles are to be painted white internally and electrical orange X15
externally. All steel work must be thoroughly degreased and surface
smoothed, treated with rust proofing primer and undercoat and finished with
two coats of semi-gloss acrylic lacquer or equal.
- Custom colours maybe considered where the switchboard is installed
outside or in an open area to fit in with the surrounding aesthetics. Custom
colours will require prior approval from the Facilities and Services, Planning.
- Where combination fuse switches (CFS) are used, three spare cartridges of
each type and rating are to be provided. Ensure units are capable of clearly
displaying on/off mode and interlocked safely with the switchboard door.
- Current transformers must be able to be removed easily.
- Surge protection is to be provided in accordance with AS1768.
Distribution switchboards must be located in circulation spaces, corridors and
Electrical K- Distribution
Switchboards K 06.03.01 foyers in a secure dedicated cupboard/room, dry and free of dust, and
connected to an accessible vertical riser.
Electrical K- Distribution
Switchboards K 06.03.02 Switchboard board cupboard doors are to be labelled ‘Switchboard’.
Electrical K- Distribution Access panels are to be provided in the ceiling near switchboards to provide
Engineer Electrical Switchboards ease of access for future cabling into the switchboard.
60

Distribution switchboards must be:
- Proprietary constructed
- Sized to initial load plus 25%
- Provide 10% spare circuit breakers and 15% spare circuit breaker ways
- Have a main isolating switch
- Minimum form 1 segregation with shrouded incoming terminals.
- Constructed from sheet steel of adequate thickness to prevent distortion
and to withstand the effect of faults.
- External/ Weatherproof switchboards must be marine-grade corrosion-
door openings.
- Lift off pintle hinge doors with flush type lever handles keyed to CL-001
keys.
- Doors greater than 800mm high are to have three point locking.
- Gland plates for top and bottom entry
- Ventilation (where required) by means of louvered vents backed with fine
Distribution
Electrical K- bronze wire mesh.
Switchboards Switchboards K 06.04.01
Engineer Electrical - Fitted with hinged and removable escutcheon.
Construction
- Flush fronted equipment with only toggles, handles, indicators, dials and
like equipment for operational use protruding through the front panel
- Free standing cubicle type assemblies must have adjacent cubicles bolted
together to provide a rigid structure.
- Sheet metal segregation barriers enabling arc fault containment between
adjacent compartments or cubicles where required to suit the form of
construction.
- Explosion vents at the top of each segregated compartment.
- Minimum 10kA fault level on final sub-circuit breakers.
- Use of current limiters to be minimumised.
- Busbars type tested to a minimum fault level of 20kA for 0.2 sec.
- Busbars sized for a maximum temperature rise of 50oC above an ambient
of 40oC.
exposed to weather.
- Powder coated to BS 381C, 694 Dove Grey gloss finish or alternative A.S.
K.185-1968 externally and while gloss internally.
- Comply with AS3439.
The following distribution board manufacturer's are to be used and be
consistent with the existing distribution boards within the building:
Distribution
Electrical K- - Heinemann/Heinelec
Switchboards Switchboards K 06.04.02
Engineer Electrical - NHP/Terasaki
Construction
- Schneider/Merlin Gerin
- Eaton/Cutler Hammer
Mechanical switchboard must be designed:
- With at least 25% spare space in all compartments or cubicles
- Busbars to be sized to the initial load plus 25%.
- A shrouded and insulated incoming unit and line side terminals irrespective
Distribution of Form.
Mechanical K-
Switchboards Switchboards K 06.04.03 - Form 1 segregation for minor control panels with a supply < 400 amps
Engineer Electrical
Construction - Form 2 segregation for all assemblies with a supply ≥400 amps
- Minimum form 2 segregation for switchgear associated with fire and smoke
control equipment.
- Separate compartment for extra low voltage BMS equipment.
- Comply with AS3439.
61

Mechanical Services Switchboard must be constructed by experienced
mechanical services switchgear and control gear assembly manufacturer and
have:
- Be capable of withstanding the potential short circuit fault level at the
incoming terminals.
- Cubicles designed for ease of access both for initial installation, wiring and
testing and for maintenance, removal and replacement of equipment and
wiring during the life of the installation.
- Switchgear mounted such that the 'ON/OFF' and current rating indications
are clearly visible with the cover or escutcheon closed.
- Mild steel construction unless other materials, e.g. stainless steel are
required. Panels must be furniture grade sheet. Thickness must be
adequate to prevent distortion and to withstand the effect of faults.
- External/Weatherproof switchboards must be marine-grade corrosion-
door openings.
Mechanical
- Doors are to be hung on heavy duty lift off hinges with stainless steel pins.
Mechanical K- Services
Switchboards K 06.05 Each door to be fitted with a recessed or flush type lever handle. A vertical
locking bar system with guides for top and bottom fastenings is to be provided
Construction
on all doors greater than 1000mm in height.
- All door hardware to contain cylinder locks keyed to CL-001 keys. Provide
two keys per lock.
- Escutcheon plates and panels are to be hinged and removable with
chromium plated 'D' lifting handles to assist in lifting off hinges.
- Removable panels must be supplied with suitable lifting handles and
captive knurl-headed fixing screws.
exposed to weather.
- Provide ventilation louvres with internal brass mesh screens to prevent
entry of insects.
- Cubicles are to be painted white internally and electrical orange X15
externally. All steel work must be thoroughly degreased and surface
smoothed, treated with rust proofing primer and undercoat and finished with
two coats of semi-gloss acrylic lacquer or equal.
- Custom colours maybe considered where the switchboard is installed
outside or in an open area to fit in with the surrounding aesthetics. Custom
colours will require prior approval from the Buildings and Property, Planning.
Electrical K- Tenancies are to be provied with their own dedicated switchboard. All the
Switchboards Tenancies K 06.06
Engineer Electrical tenant's services are to be supplied from this switchboard.
Switchgear must be:
- Mounted such that the 'ON/OFF' and current rating indications are clearly
visible with the cover or escutcheon closed.
- Air circuit breakers ≥1600A
- Moulded case breakers >100A & <1600A.
Electrical K-
Switchboards Switchgear K 06.07.01 - Miniature breakers ≤100A
Engineer Electrical
- Same manufacturer throughout an installation
- Selected to achieve discrimination for the required prospective fault levels.
Cascading protection is not to be used.
- An approved manufacturer Eaton / Cutler-Hammer, Schneider, NHP /
Terasaki or Heinemann/Heinelec
Protection studies are to be carried out to confirm descrimination when
Electrical K-
Switchboards Switchgear K 06.07.02 upgrading switchboards / switchgear / transformers etc. The protection study
Engineer Electrical
is to be provided with the manuals.
Electrical K- Downstream equipment fault levels are to be checked when upgrading
Switchboards Switchgear K 06.07.03
Engineer Electrical electrical supply infrastructure.
Residual current devices (RCD’s) must:
- Be mounted in switchboards only,
- Be integrated with a miniature circuit breaker with overcurrent and short
Switchgear - circuit current protection,
Electrical K-
Switchboards Residual Current K 06.08 - Be arranged within the switchboard so that the test button is accessible
Engineer Electrical
Devices (RCD's) without the need to remove covers,
- Not trip on power failure,
- Recognise and not trip where dc leakage currents are present.
- Operating time and push button tested whenever installed
Electrical K- As Installed A single diagram is to be mounted in a protective cover in the main
Engineer Electrical Documentation switchboard room.
Switchboard manufacturer’s drawings or updates of the existing must include:
- manufacturer's name and type of any standard equipment,
- general arrangement of equipment,
Electrical K- As Installed - full details of cabinet construction and dimensions,
Engineer Electrical Documentation - busbar dimensions and ratings,
- wiring diagrams and schematics of instrument protection and control
circuits,
- front elevation
A new typed switchboard schedule provided when the update would render
Electrical K- As Installed
Switchboards K 06.09.03 the existing schedule unreadable or more than 30% of it changed from the
Engineer Electrical Documentation
original.
The low voltage distribution system cabling must be selected in accordance
with AS3000 and AS3008 considering:
Electrical K- Low Voltage
Design Principles K 07.01.01 - Current-carrying capacity
Engineer Electrical Distribution
- Voltage drop and
- Short-circuit temperature rise
62

Cable voltage drop must not exceed 5% and follow the below profile
incorporating for spare capacity:
- Building Mains – 1%
Design Principles K 07.01.02 - Sub mains – 1.5%
- Final Sub circuit – 2.5%
Where adjustments are required for additional mains or sub mains cables, the
voltage drop on the final sub circuit is not to be less than 2.0%.
Electrical K- Low Voltage Distribution boards are to be located at a radius of 35m maximum horizontal
Design Principles K 07.01.03
Engineer Electrical Distribution distance to the furthest outlet it supplies.
All cables must:
- be adequately fixed and supported with purpose made clips, cleats or
saddles,
- be installed to permit adequate air circulation around each cable,
- be installed between equipment without any joints,
- be installed on the loop in, loop out principle without the use of connectors
for sub circuit wiring,
- be installed so that they can readily be withdrawn for the purposes of
relocation and/or rewiring,
- be installed such that they are not bent through a radius less than the
Electrical K- Low Voltage minimum bending radius recommended by the manufacturer,
Engineer Electrical Distribution - where installed together over parallel routes, be spaced apart to provide a
gap of one cable diameter, minimum, between adjacent circuit or submain
groups for mains and sub mains cabling. Cables to be de rated accordingly.
- be fixed to permanent structural components of the building where the
cables supply emergency circuits, such as fire services, lifts, emergency
lighting, etc. Additionally, these cables must be positioned above ducts, pipes
and other building components which may become dislodged and cause
interference to the cables. Fixings and supports for these cables must be
suitable for the required fire resistant integrity,
- be spaced from telecommunication and other wiring systems,
- where exposed to the sun be covered or have a UV protected sheath.
All mains and sub mains must:
- be installed over routes which have been fully co-ordinated with other
services,
- be identified at each end by approved labels fixed to cable sheaths or
conduit and identify the cable size, type and purpose. End labels are to be
Mains / Sub-Mains K 07.02.01 installed just prior to the cable entering the switchboard. Labels are to be
durable and securely fitted.
- be sized for to the maximum demand plus required spare capacity (30%
mains, 25% submains).
- fire rated where required.
- have a full size neutral.
Cables are to be of continuous single length. Where it is necessary to divert
or extend existing sub mains, all joints must be:
- Approved by the Buildings and Property Division, Planning
- Use a proprietary joining system,
- In an approved accessible locations to enable access for thermo scanning
Mains / Sub-Mains K 07.02.02 - Within an accessible pit for any underground cable joints for thermal
scanning under load
- Clearly labelled to identify origin of sub mains, i.e., switchboard and circuit
details together with cable size and type
- Be segregated from gaseous piping systems, especially medical gases, by
a minimum of 50 mm in conformance with AS 2896.
Final sub circuit must have:
- A maximum of five (5) double 10A GPO’s are to be connected to any
circuit.
- A maximum of 10 outlets (5 doubles) connected to a 20A MCB in an air
conditioned space
- A maximum of 6 outlets (3 doubles) connected to a 20A MCB in a non-air
conditioned space
- A maximum of 4 outlets (2 doubles) connected to a 20A MCB in kitchens,
serveries and tea rooms.
Electrical K- Low Voltage Final Sub Circuit
K 07.03.01 - Dedicated circuits serving equipment rated at more than 1,000VA.
Engineer Electrical Distribution Cabling
- A maximum of 1 off 15A GPO to be connected to a single 20A MCB.
- Multiphase switch socket outlets on their own dedicated circuit of
appropriate rating.
- Dedicated circuit for direct connected equipment appropriately rated.
- An isolating switch adjacent to any for any direct connected equipment.
- Power 2.5mm2 min. stranded
- Lighting 2.5mm2 min. stranded
- 4.0mm2 for circuits rated/protected at 20A
- 2.5mm2 for circuits rated/protected at 16A
A maximum number of lighting outlets per circuit of:
Electrical K- Low Voltage Final Sub Circuit - 12 outlets, 1,500VA maximum, 10A MCB
K 07.03.02
Engineer Electrical Distribution Cabling - 18 outlets, 2,500VA maximum, 16A MCB
- 24 outlets, 3,000VA maximum, 20A MCB
Electrical K- Low Voltage Final Sub Circuit Lighting and power outlets on each circuit must be adjusted to avoid RCD
K 07.03.03
Engineer Electrical Distribution Cabling nuisance tripping due to earth leakage in electronic devices.
Balance load over the three phases as close as possible taking into
Electrical K- Low Voltage consideration equipment ratings being supplied from each point. Load is to
Load Distribution K 07.04
Engineer Electrical Distribution be balanced at practical completion, once the building is fully occupied and
again at the end of the Defects Liability period.
Electrical K- Cable routes are to be generally in common spaces within a building (e.g.,
Cable Supports K 08
Engineer Electrical corridors) and supported at all times.
63

Underground cables are to be:
- Install in heavy duty rigid PVC orange conduit with the appropriate category
of protection in accordance with AS3000.
- Excavation in sealed surfaces must first be saw cut a minimum of 100mm
wider than the trench.
- Have draw wires installed in all conduits
- Backfill only after the inspection of the installed conduit.
- Surface reinstatement to match existing and surrounding surfaces.
Electrical K-
Cable Supports In-Ground Works K 08.01.01 - Installation of cables into conduits after conduits are installed and backfilling
Engineer Electrical
completed.
- Provided with cable pits at a maximum of 30 m intervals and at all changes
in direction.
- Cables required to be winched or drawn in for direct burial shall be installed
by the use of cable stockings, cable rollers and cable drum supports to
minimise abrasion.
- Pulling stress on the cables is to be no greater than 80% of that
recommended by the manufacturer.
Electrical K- Drill neat fitting holes in pits for conduit/pipe entries and 4 x 50 mm holes in
Cable Supports In-Ground Works K 08.01.02
Engineer Electrical the bottom of the pits for the drainage purposes.
Cable pits shall be:
- prefabricated units manufactured from fibrous cement. In trafficable areas
pits must be of precast concrete or cast in situ concrete construction with
Gatic l covers or equal to suit traffic loading in accordance with AS 3996.
- Fix a 150 x 150 x 1.6 mm brass plate to the cable pit cover.
Electrical K-
Cable Supports In-Ground Works K 08.01.03 - Suitably engrave the plate according to the service cables within the pit, e.
Engineer Electrical
g., power, security lighting, telephone, public address, computer,
miscellaneous services and the like.
- Pits must be sized to suit the bending radius of the cable. In particular solid
pits used for straight through drawing of cables must have a minimum length
equivalent to four times the minimum-bending radius of the cable.
Conduit must adhere to the following conditions:
- Must reduce the use of PVC materials. Use concrete HDPE, galvanised
steel or aluminium as alternatives.
- ‘Unless otherwise approved by the Monash University Project Manager,
Coordinator, no conduit, pipes or conduit fittings must be visible on any wall,
floor or ceiling surface. Contractors and consultants must investigate all
options for cable reticulation to ensure that the aesthetics, appearance and
architecture of the buildings and campus aren't negatively impacted’.
- Conduit or piping must be installed so that wiring may be drawn in and out
at any future time without damage to the building or disruption of the conduit
continuity.
- Conduit, deep drawn-in boxes, and couplings only must be cast in concrete.
Conduit tees and elbows are not be used.
Electrical K- - Corrugated type PVC conduit is not to be used unless specifically required
Cable Supports Conduit K 08.02
Engineer Electrical to maintain flexibility at final connections to equipment or as otherwise
approved in writing by the Facilities and Services Asset Planning.
- Flexible PVC or metallic conduit must only be used to enclose final
connections to permanently connected equipment, equipment that vibrates,
or to equipment that must be moved for inspection purposes.
- Where subject to mechanical damage, exposure to weather or damp
conditions, or to ambient or contact temperatures exceeding 60°C, conduit
must be galvanized screwed steel.
- Conduits must be installed in a manner which will not necessitate
penetration or permit the entry or moisture to any portion of the building.
- Designed to permit ease of draw through of cables.
- Avoid compromising damp proofing of structure.
- When conditions could compromise integrity of conduit and cabling, use
galvanised screwed steel.
Cable trays & ladders must:
- Be sized with at least 50% spare capacity for future additions.
- Be of corrosion resistant finish, pressed and folded zincalume finish or
galvanised sheet steel. The design must comprise a ventilated rib with side
rail and folded edges. Standard perforated cable trays are only acceptable
for switchboard work.
- Use cable trays where supports are closely spaced to support smaller
cables and cable ladders where supports are more widely spaced to support
groups of larger cables
Electrical K- Cable Ladders &
Cable Supports K 08.03.01 - Install cable ladder and trays in accordance with manufacturer's providing
Engineer Electrical Trays
substantial supports comprising plain or angle mounting brackets of
galvanised steel, Unistrut or similar, fixed to walls or floors or suspended from
structure where applicable.
- The support system is to be positioned to give adequate access for
inspecting, replacing, or adding cables.
- Cables are to be installed neatly, generally to one side to allow as much
free space as possible for future cabling.
- Provide removable covers consisting of folded zincanneal finish sheet steel
where ladders and trays are exposed in public areas.
Electrical K- Cable Ladders & All mains and sub mains cables are to be supported by cable tray or ladder.
Cable Supports K 08.03.02
Engineer Electrical Trays Final sub circuits are to be supported by cable tray along main runs.
All fixings adopted must be
- An approved type and pattern.
- Form neatly all fixings holes in concrete or brickwork to a depth equal to the
length of plug to be used, excluding plaster or other soft cladding finish.
Electrical K- Cable Support
Cable Supports K 08.04.01 Fixings must not be into joints between brick or block work.
Engineer Electrical Fixings
Size all load bearing fixings of appropriate size for the anticipated load plus a
50% safety factor. All fixings must be corrosion resistant to suit their installed
location and must be the same or of more noble material, in order that they
will not corrode.
64

Fixing and support materials must be as a minimum:
- electro galvanised where used indoors and not exposed to weather or
Electrical K- Cable Support corrosive atmospheres
Engineer Electrical Fixings - hot dip galvanised or stainless steel where used in locations exposed to
weather
- stainless steel where used in locations exposed to corrosive atmospheres.
All supports must:
Electrical K- Cable Support - have threaded rod hangers,
Engineer Electrical Fixings - have galvanised steel brackets,
- be approved and suitable for the intended purpose.
All nuts and bolts must:
- have heads which are hexagonal in shape,
Electrical K- Cable Support - be provided with suitable washers,
Engineer Electrical Fixings - have metric threads,
- be of length that when tightened to correct tension, will show at least one full
thread
Fixings that rely on a propellant system such as gas or air pressure may be
used subject to:
Electrical K- Cable Support
Cable Supports K 08.04.05 - compliance with the manufacturer’s installation methods,
Engineer Electrical Fixings
- the extent of damage to building substrates and the capability to remove
fixings and make good substrates are equivalent to drilled fixings.
Skirting ducts must:
- incorporate separate compartments for power and data cables minimum 3
compartments;
Electrical K- - an extruded aluminium body;
Cable Supports Skirting Ducts K 08.05
Engineer Electrical - a drop in rust proof steel lid;
- powder coated or clear anodised finish protecting exposed surfaces;
- internal isolation shrouds for power outlets;
- Use Moduline 3 compartment T series 50/150 or approved equal.
Floor boxes must be:
- flush mounted as not to create a trip hazard;
Electrical K- - sized to suit the number of connections required;
Cable Supports Floor Boxes K 08.06
Engineer Electrical - easy and straightforward lid operation;
- lid designed to prevent damage to exiting cables and injury to fingers;
- lid and frame able to withstand constant operation and heavy traffic load.
Electrical K- Cable
Cable Supports K 08.07 All cable terminations must be accessible throughout the installation.
Engineer Electrical Terminations
The university has facilities that a sensitive to electromagnetic interference
(EMI). The main areas of concern are:
- Building 81 and the surrounding area Clayton campus.
Electrical K- Electromagnetic
Cable Supports K 08.08 - Areas of buildings 75, 82 and the surrounding area Clayton campus.
Engineer Electrical Interference
The users of these facilities must be consulted when proposing to do works
that may provide additional EMI to these areas. The use of additional EMI
control measures may be required.
Outlets and accessories must be:
- Clipsal Series 2000 flush mount.
Electrical K- - Clipsal 56 series for three phase
Outlets & Accessories K 09
Engineer Electrical - Labelled designating circuit and switchboard number
- Clipsal IP56 protected in plant rooms
- Mounted not less than 300mm above finished floor level.
Electrical K- Minimum Outlet Single/shared and open plan offices must have a minimum of 3 double GPO's
Outlets & Accessories Offices K 09.01.01
Engineer Electrical Requirements per office with at least 2 double GPO's per desk.
Lecture and tutorial rooms must have:
Lecture - A minimum of 3 double GPO's placed with consideration of the teaching
Electrical K- Minimum Outlet
Outlets & Accessories Theatre / K 09.01.02 position.
Tutorial - A double GPO on either side of the screen
- Additional as required for the AV equipment
Outlets & Accessories Labs K 09.01.03 Power outlets shall be provided to suit the user requirements.
Laboratory emergency stop buttons are to be fitted in accordance with
AS2243.7. Where an emergency laboratory isolation button to isolate power
Outlets & Accessories Labs K 09.01.04 is to be provided the resetting and re-energisation of the power circuits must
only be able after an appropriately qualified person has determined that it is
safe to do so.
Electrical K- Minimum Outlet Outlets connected to a UPS or generator backup power must be a red
Outlets & Accessories Labs K 09.01.05
Engineer Electrical Requirements coloured outlet.
Computer labs must have:
Electrical K- Minimum Outlet Computer
Outlets & Accessories K 09.01.06 - A minimum of 3 double GPOs between 2 workstations
Engineer Electrical Requirements Laboratory
- Additional outlets to service support equipment such as printers.
Conference,
In conference, Seminar and Meeting rooms place GPO’s around the
Electrical K- Minimum Outlet Seminar and
Outlets & Accessories K 09.01.07 perimeter of the room to allow the use of audio visual equipment and
Engineer Electrical Requirements Meeting
presentation / display apparatuses.
Rooms
In toilets and showers place:
- One double GPO adjacent to the vanity
Outlets & Accessories Toilets K 09.01.08 - Electric hand dryer GPO adjacent to unit or hardwired as required. A
labelled isolator is to be mounted at high level for hardwired units. Dryers to
be on individual circuits.
Electrical K- Minimum Outlet Cleaners For cleaners rooms/ cupboards, provide at least one double GPO in an easily
Outlets & Accessories K 09.01.09
Engineer Electrical Requirements Room accessible location
Electrical K- Minimum Outlet Plant Room/ Provide at least one suitably IP rated double GPO in an easily accessible
Engineer Electrical Requirements Enclosure location in each plant room.
65

Provide in communication rooms power outlets:
- Dedicated switchboard
Electrical K- Minimum Outlet Communicati - Outlets to suit eSolutions requirements.
Engineer Electrical Requirements ons Rooms - Outlets around the room to serve service equipment.
- "do not turn off" labels on outlets as required
- UPS to eSolutions requirements.
Electrical K- GPO mounted adjacent to dishwasher with flush control switch labelled
Outlets & Accessories Dishwashers K 09.02
Engineer Electrical "DISHWASHER" to isolate.
Electrical K- Accessible GPO mounted adjacent to unit labelled "DRINKING UNIT". GPO
Outlets & Accessories Drinking Units K 09.03
Engineer Electrical to be IP54 if mounted behind drinking unit.
Electrical K- Boiling Water Boiling water unit GPO to be mounted adjacent to unit on the same side as
Outlets & Accessories K 09.04
Engineer Electrical Units the cable entry into the unit.
Electrical K- Electric hand driers are to use high velocity air rather than electric heating
Outlets & Accessories Hand Dryer K 09.05
Engineer Electrical elements.
Toilet exhaust fans are to be controlled by the BAS system. If no BAS is
Electrical K- Toilet Exhaust available then control by the light switch is required. Wire to lighting circuit
Engineer Electrical Fans and provide weatherproof isolator adjacent to motor. Make final connection in
flexible conduit.
Electrical K- Kitchen Hood Provide weatherproof isolator adjacent to motor and make final connection in
Engineer Electrical Exhaust Fans flexible conduit.
Electrical K-
Outlets & Accessories Ceiling Fans K 09.08 Wire ceiling fans to local lighting circuit.
Engineer Electrical
Electrical K- Roller Shutter For roller shutter doors provide a weatherproof isolator adjacent to motor and
Engineer Electrical Doors make final connection in flexible conduit.
Electrical K- Provide mechanical plant such as AHU, split systems, pumps etc. that require
Outlets & Accessories Mechanical Plant K 09.10
Engineer Electrical power with locally mounted and labelled isolators.
Cleaner outlets shall be provided:
- In each teaching space, lecture theatre and lab allowing for the entire area
can be serviced from a 10m lead.
- Appropriately spaced in open plan offices allowing for the entire area to be
Electrical K-
Outlets & Accessories Cleaners Outlets K 09.11 serviced from a 10m lead. Single or shared offices should be served from
Engineer Electrical
cleaners outlets in corridors.
- Provide cleaners outlets in corridors at no more than 20m intervals and in
suitable locations to ensure service to all single or shared offices.
- Wired to a dedicated cleaner’s circuit and labelled as a cleaner’s outlet.
Lighting shall be designed and installed to:
- Consider occupant safety and facility security
- Comply with AS1680 - Internal
- Comply with AS1158 - External
- Lux levels not to exceed Australian Standard levels by more that 25%
- Appropriate maintenance factor is use. Monash's lighting maintenance
strategy is reactive.
- Uniformity to Australian Standard standards
- Glare eliminated
Electrical K-
Lighting K 10 - Light colour in the order of 3000K-4000K Internal
Engineer Electrical
- Light colour in the order of 4000K-6000K External
- No beam of light generated from within a building or external to a building
must be directed at any point in the sky without falling directly onto a non-
transparent surface.
- Compliance with the relevant Australian Standard relating to minimisation of
light pollution must be adhered to.
- Fittings positioned to enable ease of maintenance.
- Maintenance access to luminaires in high ceilings is to be considered and
discussed with the Buildings and Property Division, Services.
Lighting is to be LED. Other light sources can only be considered when LED
Electrical K- Lamp/Luminaire
Lighting K 10.01 is unsuitable for the application. Prior approval is required. Incandescent and
Engineer Electrical Selection
dichroic halogen fittings are not be used.
Lighting density to not exceed the following limits:
- 4 W/m2 for spaces lit to 80 lux
Electrical K-
Lighting Energy Density K 10.02 - 6 W/m2 for spaces lit to 240 lux
Engineer Electrical
- 9 W/m2 for spaces lit to 400+ lux
The lighting control framework for different space types at Monash University
are outlined Section K: Appendix - Electrical - Item K3. As a standard, lighting
control is to be achieved via local smart sensors that are adjustable by any
qualified electrician. Programmable/networked bus lighting control systems
are acceptable subject to Buildings and Property Planning approval for space
Electrical K- types that require complex functions, e.g. multiple scene settings. Section K: Appendix - Electrical -
Lighting Lighting Control K 10.03
Engineer Electrical Programmable/networked lighting control systems shall: Item K3
- Be open nonproprietary
- Have controllers and devices communicating using KNX protocol.
- Be integrated with the building automation system
- Have controller override switches are to be installed to allow lighting to work
in the event that a controller fails.
66

LED fittings must:
- Use LEDs manufactured by a reputable manufacturer with proven
experience in LED production such as Cree, Osram, Nichea, Xicato and
Luxeon.
- Use high efficiency LED chips.
- Be designed to comply with the LED manufacturer’s specifications
- Provide good optical efficiency and adequate thermal management in
particular the LED junction temperature
- Colour matched in any one area such that LED colour differences cannot
be picked up by the human eye.
- Within 3 SDCM (standard deviation colour matching) MacAdam steps for
internal luminaires and
- Within 4 SDCM MacAdam steps for external luminaries.
Electrical K-
Lighting LED Lighting K 10.04.01 - LED batch bin number must be provided as part of the operation and
Engineer Electrical
maintenance manuals or the fittings order/serial number.
- LEDs in a fitting are to be replaceable. This is to avoid the need to dispose
of the whole fitting in the event of LED failure.
- CRI of 80 or greater
- Achieve an efficacy of 60lm/w or greater.
- LM79 performance testing.
- LM80 ageing test & TM21 institu temperature measurement projection
report.
- Expected life of L70 at 50,000hrs or greater
- NATA certified (or equivalent) photometric testing
- Certified to Australian Standards and regulations or higher and carry an
Australian Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM).
- 5 Year warranty
Drivers must match the optimum and maximum current to suit the LED over
the whole range of input voltages with the following minimum features:
- automatic reset in the event of a fault
- isolation between the primary and secondary sides
- dimming with linear characteristics
- operation in ambient temperatures of -20oC to +50oC
- low power loss
Electrical K-
Lighting LED Lighting K 10.04.02 - integral electronic overload protection circuitry
Engineer Electrical
- integral electronic over temperature protection circuitry
- integral electronic short circuit protection circuitry.
- Power factor: >0.95
- IP20 protection rating minimum
- 100,000 hour life time (min)
- THD < 20%
- 5 Year warranty
External lighting must:

- Ensure the appropriate provision of lighting for pedestrian walkways,
roadways and car-parks,
- Comply with AS1158,
- Primary walks lit to P1.
- Secondary walks lit to P2 or 3 depending upon evaluation of night time
usage.
- Busy at night car parks lit to P11a.
- Other car parks lit to P11b.
Electrical K- - Designated accessible parking bays illuminated to P12.
External Lighting K 11
Engineer Electrical - Roadways lit to P3 except on Scenic Boulevard from Wellington Road and
Robert Blackwood Hall where it is to be lit to P2.
- Pedestrian crossings lit to PX2.
- Help points lit to P6 within a 5 metre radius.
- Supplied from the main switchboard or dedicated external lighting
switchboard.
- Minimisation of the highlighting of building features and entrances with any
such lighting having the capability of being scheduled off,
- No lighting is to be directly exposed to the night sky.
- In ground lights are to be avoided.
External light fittings must be:

- Low energy consumption, both of individual fittings and overall lighting
scheme (incandescent lighting is not acceptable),
- Vandal resistant,
- High impact resistant lenses
Electrical K- - UV stability of component,
External Lighting External Fixtures K 11.01
Engineer Electrical - Resistant to corrosion,
- Robust and durable aluminium alloy or similar approved.,
- IP65 rated,
- Weather proof,
- Easy access for maintenance of lamps,
- Energy management provision and controls.
67

External pole top light fittings must be:
- One of the pre-approved external light fittings (Section K: Appendix -
Electrical - Item K2) i.e. Versalux - STARLED, Iguzzini - Wow or Weef -
RFL500_LED
- Match the existing fixtures to maintain uniformity and aesthetics within any
one space
- Only vary between clearly definable precincts. Consult BPD Planning for
Section K: Appendix - Electrical -
direction
Item K2
Electrical K- - Different fittings can be utilised in different streets, walkways and open
External Lighting Post Top Fixtures K 11.02
Engineer Electrical spaces, however the same fitting must be consistently utilised in any one
street, walkway and space.
Controls - Landscaping
- Mounted on a University approved public realm master palette pole. The
University has a custom design public realm furniture palette. The palette
includes custom design road and pedestrian light poles. The details of the
design are found in the Design and Development Control – Landscape (Part
5 – Furniture Palette).
- Wired with staggered circuiting, every second pole on a different circuit to
prevent total loss of lighting.
Internal lighting must employ the following control:
- Simple uncomplicated 240V lighting control incorporating intelligent sensors
- the lighting control framework for different space types at Monash University
is outlined in Section K: Appendix - Electrical - Item K3 (Networked bus
systems are not preferred.)
- Local switches are to be provided to allow occupant on/off control of lights
irrespective of any automatic controls.
- ADD Factor
- Light switches, installed adjacent to doors at approximately the same height
as the door handle.
- Colour coding: specify with minimum 30% contrast to background, to assist
visually impaired persons to recognise control elements e.g. light switches
- Motion & Lux sensors
Electrical K- Section K: Appendix - Electrical -
Internal Lighting Design Principles K 12.01.01 - Maximise Daylight harvesting – Use natural light in lieu of or in combination
Engineer Electrical Item K3
with artificial lighting to reduce energy consumption. Separate circuits and
light sensor dimmers for lighting near windows and skylights.
- Presence detection – to detect room occupancy and operate lighting
accordingly.
- Absence detection – to detect room vacancy and operate lighting
accordingly.
- Logical zone switching limited to 100m2 UFA in larger areas to avoid turning
all the lights on when only a small section of the areas is occupied.
- Lighting controls and scenes required for audio visual presentations e.g.
dimming, zone switching.
- Consideration must be given to half switching for cleaning and security
purposes.
- DALI dimming protocol where dimming is required.
Fluorescent fittings must be approved prior to design. Where fluorescents
have been approved:
- Use tri-phosphor or quad-phosphor coating and low mercury content lamps.
Lamps shall not exceed maximum mercury content of 4 mg.
- Lamps must be initially operated for a minimum of 100 hours at 100% rated
lumen output to minimise the chance of flicker, premature blackening and
Electrical K- reduced lamp life. Lights may be switched on and off as long as full output for
Internal Lighting Design Principles K 12.01.02
Engineer Electrical 100 hours is reached.
- Incorporate low loss ballasts and be power factor corrected to a minimum of
0.90.
- Separate ballasts are to be provided for each lamp.
- Ballasts must have an energy efficient rating index (EEI) of B1 for reactive
ballasts, A1 for electronic dimmable ballasts and A2 for electronic non-
dimmable ballasts.
Motion detectors must:
- Be capable of constant monitoring. Some sensors on the market only check
conditions at prescribed time intervals, and thus if the sensor switches off it
will not check conditions and therefore will not come back on until the
prescribed time has elapsed, these sensors must not be installed.
- Be passive infrared.
- Passive infrared detectors must not be used in areas with rapidly changing
temperature.
- Microwave detectors must not be used in areas where the frequency of the
emission may interfere with equipment in laboratories, hearing aids or in
areas with lightweight walls or large expanses of glass as they can detect
outside the area.
Electrical K- Occupancy
Internal Lighting K 12.02 - Ultrasonic detectors have recorded issues with hearing aids and must be
Engineer Electrical Detectors
avoided in areas where this may be an issue.
- Detect a 20 cm hand movement (maximum required movement by
occupants).
- Incorporate acoustic / noise activation in toilets and showers.
- Located to provide best coverage of the space
- Located or appropriately masked to avoid triggering from external activities.
- Have adjustable sensitivity in the on and off mode and be programmable via
the lighting control system head end or by wireless remote control at ground
level.
- Have a switch off delay set between 10 and 15 minutes. If the delay is
adjustable it must not be able to be adjusted above 30 minutes.
- Have master/slave functionality
68

Photoelectric detectors must:
- Be either integrated into motion detectors or standalone.
- Have adjustable sensitivity between 50 and 2000 lux.
Electrical K- Photoelectric
Internal Lighting K 12.03 - Have an inherent time lag to prevent transient operation.
Engineer Electrical Detectors
- Use Dali dimming protocol.
- Be programmable via wireless remote control where not connected to a
network lighting control system.
Where central dimmers are used, all dimmers controlling the one space must
be linked by a common control network. The dimmers must be capable of a
Electrical K- minimum of 4 programmed present levels. The dimmer must have a self-
Internal Lighting Dimming K 12.04
Engineer Electrical monitoring function for the activation of the emergency lighting in the case of
dimmer failure. After re-energisation the dimmers must revert to the levels
prior to disconnection. The preferred dimming protocol is Dali.
Recessed light fittings are to be connected to the building wiring via a 3-core,
Electrical K- 4-core or 5 core (depending on separate switching of lamps) flexible cable
Internal Lighting Fittings K 12.05.01
Engineer Electrical and plug. They are to be arranged with suitable retractable fixing brackets so
that the luminaries can readily be removed from beneath the ceiling.
Electrical K- Light fitting control gear must be fixed so as to allow the removal of any part
Internal Lighting Fittings K 12.05.02
Engineer Electrical from below the fitting and whilst mounted in position.
Lighting switches are to be:
- Located at the entry to each space and at each end of the corridors.
- Modular weatherproof type in exposed locations.
- Aligned horizontally with adjacent door hands or other controls within a zone
of 900mm to 1100mm and positioned to suit door swings.
Electrical K- Lighting Controls /
Internal Lighting K 12.06 - Vary in type in accordance with lighting control system requirements but in
Engineer Electrical Switches
general Clipsal Series 2000 with 15A FLM Series mechanisms suitable for
switching fluorescent loads in standard size flush plates (115 mm x 70 mm).
- Labelled designating circuit and switchboard number.
- Fitted with integral indicators or LEDs that illuminate when the switch is in
the off position in spaces that are likely to be blacked out.
The Exit and Emergency Lighting computer monitored system used on the
Clayton and Caulfield campuses must be the Legrand AXIOM with:
- Area controllers within a building connected via a dedicated backbone
cable.
- Connection of the building to the head end PC via the LAN using a Lantronix
UDS1100. (One Latronix router per building to ensure system usability is
maintained.)
Electrical K- Exit and Emergency - Where only a single fitting is being replaced in a non-monitored area, use
General K 13.01.01
Engineer Electrical Lighting System the Legrand AXIOM fitting leaving both the wired and wireless accessories
attached.
- The head end computer is to be updated whenever new installations or
modifications are made to an exit and emergency light installation.
- All modifications, programming and commissioning to the head end software
must be carried out by a suitably qualified and experienced person leaving it
in a fully functional condition. All area controller and fitting data is to be
entered and complete.
The Exit and Emergency Lighting computer monitoring system for Peninsula
and Berwick must be:
- The Famco Master Minder FMX power line carrier for Peninsula.
- The Famco Master Minder FMM communications wired system for Berwick.
- An ITU unit at each switchboard and one SCU unit per building at
Electrical K- Exit and Emergency
General K 13.01.02 Peninsula.
Engineer Electrical Lighting System
- The SCU unit is to be connected onto the LAN via a Lantronix serial to
Ethernet device.
- Where there is no head end computer available. Commissioning is to be
carried out locally via connection to each SCU.
- An update of the tracker log is to be provided to Operations.
Electrical K- Exit and Emergency The Exit and Emergency Lighting system at Parkville must match the existing
General K 13.01.03
Engineer Electrical Lighting System in each building.
Exit and emergency lighting must be designed and installed:
- In accordance with AS2293
- The manufacturer's requirements
- LED range of fittings. Non LED fittings may be used where the LED range
is not suitable for the application.
- Green on black diffusers in theatres
Electrical K- Exit and Emergency - Fittings numerically identified with an approved label with numbers
General K 13.01.04
Engineer Electrical Lighting System corresponding to the logbook/monitoring system identification and those on
the as installed drawings.
- All as installed documentation including drawings and log books are to be
updated when removing and adding emergency and exit fittings.
- Connected to an un-switched active from the adjacent normal lighting
circuit.
- Illuminate switchboards, FIPs and EWIS panels .
Electrical K- Power Factor Provide power factor correction from buildings with a maximum demand
Engineer Electrical Correction above 400A to correct power factor to better than 0.95.
Power factor correction units are to be provided with:
- De-tuning reactors to avoid harmonic problems
Electrical K- Power Factor
Design Principles K 14.01.02 - General unit alarm connected to the BAS
Engineer Electrical Correction
- An allowance for 3 spare steps for 30% load increase
- Supply cable rated at 30% spare capacity
69

The Power Factor Correction system must be full function tested in
accordance with relevant Australian Standards including but not limited to:
- The following manufacturer's tests:
- Power frequency voltage withstand tests on the main circuit as per AS
3439.1.
- Insulation resistance.
- Continuity of all wiring and control circuits.
- Operation of controller, switches and indicators.
- Functional operation and interlock checks of all control circuits including
simulated operation.
- The following site tests:
Electrical K- Power Factor
Testing K 14.02.01 - Check insulation resistance of all busbars, wiring and capacitor steps and
Engineer Electrical Correction
switch each stage into operation separately under manual control.
- Verify that the PF correction capacitor bank is being switched in and out
correctly to maintain power factor between present limits.
- Verify that the dead-band setting of the PF controller is set correctly to
prevent 'hunting'.
- Determine the level of harmonic voltages present on all phases using a
harmonic voltage analyser with print-out.
- Determine range of system load current and power.
- Determine range of system phase voltages.
- Where de-tuning reactors are not fitted, measure the level of harmonic
currents in PFC equipment.
Electrical K- Power Factor Measurements must be carried out at periods of maximum load and at
Testing K 14.02.02
Engineer Electrical Correction average and minimum load.
Electrical K- Power Factor Test and Commissioning records are to be included in the Operation and
Testing K 14.02.03
Engineer Electrical Correction Maintenance manuals.
Electrical K- Provide lightning protection in accordance with AS 1768 with test points
Lightning Protection K 15
Engineer Electrical identified, labelled and provided in easy to access areas within the building.
Electrical K- Standby Emergency The standby generator set must be complete with all controls, safety devices
General K 16.01.01
Engineer Electrical Electrical Generators and auxiliaries to provide safe and unattended operation.
Where it is assessed that a standby generator is required, generators must:

- Comply with AS3000 & AS3009
- Only provide power to essential circuits
- Consolidated to avoid the installation of numerous smaller generators for a
building
Electrical K- Standby Emergency - Be sized to consider additional future load being that the maximum
General K 16.01.02
Engineer Electrical Electrical Generators connected load is <80% of the generator rating and the minimum connected
load is >30% of the generator rating.
- Have a fuel tank that provides for 8hrs of full load running.
- Have infrastructure designed so the essential load is monitored separately
from non essential in normal and power outage modes.
- Have a maximum demand meter that monitors the essential load.
Electrical K- Standby Emergency A load bank connection point rated to at least 80% of the generator rating is
General K 16.01.03
Engineer Electrical Electrical Generators to be provided.
Generator statuses and alarms are to be monitored by the BAS such that:
- Mode status and alarm is monitored to provide an alarm when the
generator is not set to automatic and therefore won’t start automatically upon
power failure.
Electrical K- Standby Emergency - Fault alarm is monitored to provide an alarm if the generator fails to start
General K 16.01.04
Engineer Electrical Electrical Generators upon power failure.
- General alarm is monitored to provide an alarm when the generator has a
fault.
- An ATS transfer alarm is monitored to provide an alarm when mains to
generator or generator to mains transfers fail.
Incoming supplies and terminals to the ATS are to be segragated to allow

Electrical K- Standby Emergency
General K 16.01.05 safe access for removal and or installation of cabling without the other supply
Engineer Electrical Electrical Generators
being turned off.
70

Standby generator systems must be tested in accordance with relevant
Australian Standards including but not limited to:
- The following manufacturer's tests:
- Engines must be tested to determine power output and specific fuel
consumption in accordance with AS 4594.
- Alternators must be tested in accordance with AS 1359.
- Fuel tank pressure test/leak test.
- Interstitial vacuum test of bulk tanks with secondary containment.
- The following site tests:
- Insulation resistance and high voltage tests of all electrical switchgear
and wiring
- Operation of switchgear and associated protection and controls
- Function of all instruments and meters
Electrical K- Standby Emergency - Function of all auxiliary equipment and associated controls
Testing K 16.02
Engineer Electrical Electrical Generators - Function of all alarms, protection circuits and safety devices for engines,
generators and auxiliary equipment including fuel system.
- Check of engine settings, clearances, lubricating oil levels and lubrication
system;
- Tightness of cable terminations;
- Tightness of all engine and piping joints;
- Circulation and temperature levels of oil and water circuits;
- Oil pressure;
- Governor including over speed functions
- Voltage regulation
- Automatic and manual control features
- Capacity and performance of battery and battery charger systems
- Testing of all modes of start/stop control
- Full load test run including one hour at 10% overload
Uninterruptable power supply units (UPS) are to be designed and installed in
accordance with the UPS and Battery manufacturer’s specifications all
Electrical K- Uninterrupted Power
General K 17.01.01 relevant Australian Standards including but not limited to:
Engineer Electrical Supply Units
- AS2676
- AS3011
UPS systems must:
- Have a sign located at each entrance to the room indicating battery voltage
and the prospective short circuit current for battery systems that exceed
100Ah or the extra low voltage classification.
- “Batteries” are to have a suitably designed rack or enclosure and are not to
be located on the floor of the room or in a non-approved enclosure.
- Both battery system conductors and leads from the housing rack are to be
protected by an over current device (i.e. a circuit breaker or fuse). If the
battery is larger than 110 volts, additional circuit breakers or removable links
must be installed to disconnect the battery continuity for maintenance.
- All battery enclosures and racking are to provide adequate access for
inspection, testing and maintenance. Generally a minimum of 75mm spacing
is to be maintained between the upper most part of the battery terminal and
the rack or shelf above it. An exclusory distance of 25mm is also to be
maintained between the batteries and the side of the racking
- Adequate ventilation is to be provided to ensure a cross flow of air past the
battery. Therefore vents must generally be on opposite sides of the room or
enclosure.
- All battery terminals must be tightened to meet the manufacturer’s
Electrical K- Uninterrupted Power suggested torque settings.
General K 17.01.02
Engineer Electrical Supply Units - Each battery cell or mono block is to be marked with a number starting with
1 being the most positive end of the battery.
- Each terminal must be cleaned of dirt and corrosion before connection and
a light film of Vaseline applied as a protective moisture resistant layer.
- The deflexion on any rack must not exceed 3mm when fully loaded with
batteries.
- A 900mm minimum clearance must be maintained to allow a safe exit in the
case of an emergency.
- If the ambient temperature is likely to exceed 30oC a ventilation system
must be incorporated in the design of the installation.
- An external “Manual Bypass Switch” is to be installed on all systems above
6 KVA to allow maintenance to be performed on the unit without interference
to the connected under normal conditions.
- UPS alarms are to be connected to the BAS system.
- A copy of the manufacturer’s specifications and commissioning report
including test values established at setup is to be included in the Operation
and Maintenance manuals and in the system’s enclosure.
- In accordance with the BCA any battery or batteries installed that have a
voltage exceeding 24 volts and a capacity exceeding 10 amp hours are to be
fire separated.
The UPS must be suitable for supplying electronic equipment with high
Electrical K- Uninterrupted Power harmonic content.
General K 17.01.03
Engineer Electrical Supply Units The UPS rectifier input harmonics must be limited to suit the project specific
requirements.
71

UPS systems must be tested in accordance with relevant Australian
Standards including but not limited to the following manufacturer's tests:
- Insulation resistance tests.
- Functional tests of all controls, indicators and alarms including set points.
- Load test for minimum of 8 hours at full rated load.
- Output Voltage and Frequency recorded graphically to show transient
response under all operating conditions and with battery connected. Input
and output currents and power factor must be recorded simultaneously. Tests
must include:
- main supply on and off;
Electrical K- Uninterrupted Power Testing &
K 17.02.01 - bypass effected automatically by simulated component failure;
Engineer Electrical Supply Units Commissioning
- bypass effected manually;
- 50% to 100% load step with balanced load;
- 100% to 150% load step with balanced load;
- 50% to 100% load step with one phase 30% unbalanced;
- 100% to 150% load step with one phase 30% unbalanced;
- 150% overload.
- Output voltage harmonic content under no-load and 100% load conditions.
- Angular displacement of output phase voltages at 100% load and 50%
unbalanced load.
- Battery voltage must be measured under all of the above conditions.
UPS testing must be carried out during manufacturer and at completion in
accordance with the manufacturer's normal test programme. Load and
performance tests must be carried out at a power factor between 0.8 and
unity. The power factor must be recorded. The following site tests:
- Insulation resistance tests of all equipment including wiring.
- Functional tests of all controls, indicators and alarms.
- A capacity test should be run on the system to determine the UPS’s ability
to adequately support the expected load for the required amount of time
Electrical K- Uninterrupted Power Testing & determined by the manufacturer’s specifications. (i.e. load test for minimum
K 17.02.02
Engineer Electrical Supply Units Commissioning of 6 hours at full rated load. During which the performance of the battery
must be checked by switching mains off.)
- Waveform of input current and voltage with both mains supply and diesel
generator supply at no-load and 100% load and with UPS battery both fully
charged and discharged. Waveforms must be analysed for harmonic content.
- Test UPS on standby generator supply. The UPS must be connected to
the dummy load bank to deliver full load. Tests must include:
- Transfer and retransfer from mains to standby generator.
- Full load test of UPS.
The UPS commissioning report is to include as a minimum:
- UPS identification details including manufacturer, model, serial number and
location with the building and room number.
- Battery identification details including manufacturer, type, number of
Electrical K- Uninterrupted Power Testing & cells/battery blocks and number of strings.
K 17.02.03
Engineer Electrical Supply Units Commissioning - The initial float voltage and internal impedance of the battery strings and
each battery block in each string.
- The line conditions of any phases present.
- The battery conditions reflecting any defects found need to indicate that the
battery terminals have been checked for tightness and are clean of any dirt
UPS maintenance is to be carried out in accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications during the defects liability period maintenance. Maintenance
must be:
- Quarterly inspections and as a minimum must include the reporting of:
- General appearance and cleanliness of the battery area.
- Charger output voltage and current
- Cracks or distortion in battery housings and racking
- Corrosion of terminals and connections
- Condition of ventilation equipment and condition of ventilation vents and
filters (If installed)
Electrical K- Uninterrupted Power
Maintenance K 17.03 - Voltage, current and surface temperature readings of individual cells/battery
Engineer Electrical Supply Units
blocks and strings.
- Cell or individual battery block internal impedance measurements
- A yearly inspection which is to include:
- Tension tests of the bolts, connections to manufacturer’s specifications
regarding correct torque to link connection bolts.(i.e.(9Nm)
- A check of the voltage drop across internal connections between
cells/blocks
- The integrity of the battery stand or enclosure.
- Ensure correct signage is displayed on access doors and adjacent to battery
banks.
Harmonic filters must be provided to limit harmonic distortion in accordance
with the Authority Service and Installation Rules where required. Where the
Electrical K-
Active Harmonic Filters General K 18.01.01 campus has a Monash’s owned HV network the point of common coupling in
Engineer Electrical
addition to that in the Service and Installation Rules is also for Monash’s
purposes the main switchboard of each building.
Active harmonic filters must:
- compensate both harmonics and reactive power energy,
Electrical K-
Active Harmonic Filters General K 18.01.01 - have the ability to operate in either overall harmonic compensation or
Engineer Electrical
individual harmonic compensation modes,
- be equipped with RFI filtering.
The active harmonic filters must be placed within the electrical system to best
protect the rest of the installation from the areas where harmful levels of
Electrical K- harmonics are generated. For example: Mechanical switchboards tend to
Active Harmonic Filters General K 18.01.01
Engineer Electrical supply power to a number of non-linear loads that create harmonics. The
mechanical electrical system must be designed to limit the harmful harmonic
content to the rest of the installation.
Electrical K-
Public Address System K 19 Public address system must integrate with building evacuation system
Engineer Electrical
72

Electrical K- Consult Buildings and Property, Planning in regards to the master clock
Master Clock System K 20
Engineer Electrical system.
Labels are to provide to equipment to facilitate operation and maintenance.
Labels must be traffolyte or 3 layered laminated plastic generally,
Electrical K-
Labelling General K 21.01.01 White/Black/White, with special or emergency equipment labelled in other
Engineer Electrical
colours e.g. Red/White/Red for main switches. Labels must be permanently
fixed.
Size labels to suit the importance and application. Size must be uniform for
Electrical K-
Labelling General K 21.01.02 similar items. The minimum letter size must be 5 mm and 0.3 mm line
Engineer Electrical
thickness.
Electrical K-
Labelling General K 21.01.03 Labels must correspond to the relevant wiring diagrams.
Engineer Electrical
Electrical K- A schedule of labels is to be submitted to the Services Consultant and
Labelling General K 21.01.04
Engineer Electrical Buildings and Property Planning for approval prior to manufacturer.
Main Switchboard naming must follow:
Electrical K- Switchboard
Labelling K 21.02.01 “BUILDING (building number) MAIN SWITCHBOARD" e.g.: BUILDING 40
Engineer Electrical Naming
MAIN SWITCHBOARD
Distribution Switchboard naming must follow:
“DB(level).(sequence number)-(descriptor*)” e.g.: DB 1.4
Mechanical Services Switchboards must follow:

“MSSB(level).(sequence number**)-(descriptor*)” eg.: MSSB 4.2
Electrical K- Switchboard * The descriptor is optional and should be used to provide additional
Labelling K 21.02.02
Engineer Electrical Naming information about what the switchboard supplies i.e. DB2.5-LAB or DB1.2-
External LGT. It should generally be used for switchboards that supply a
certain area and not for the general floor distribution boards.
** The sequence number is unique to each switchboard. Subsequent digits

are to be used to identify the sub switchboard i.e DB 2.5.1 is a sub
switchboard supplied from DB 2.5.
The main switchboard name label must include as a minimum:
- Switchboard name
- Mains size and type
- Origin of mains
- Rated current
Electrical K- Main
Labelling K 21.03.01 - Rated voltage
- Short circuit withstand
- Degree of Separation
- Degree of Protection
- manufacturer
- Date of manufacturer
Main Switchboard labelling is to include:
- Main isolator: Label to include rating
- sub mains Protective Devices: Label with name of switchboard or equipment
Electrical K- Main
Labelling K 21.03.02 served, sub mains cable size/type and rating of protection (HRC fuse
cartridge or CB protection setting).
- Special equipment (time switch, contactor, push button, etc.).
- Terminal strip labels to indicate function
Labelling for distribution boards and mechanical services switchboards is to
include:
Distribution and - Switchboard name label mounted on the front of the switchboard
Electrical K- Mechanical - Main isolator
Engineer Electrical Services - Control switches
Switchboards - Special equipment (time switch, contactor, push button, etc.).
- Pole space phase and number identification
- Terminal strip labels to indicate function
Distribution and Where a circuit breaker within a distribution board or mechanical service
Electrical K- Mechanical switchboard supplies another switchboard or special/dedicated equipment the
Engineer Electrical Services circuit breaker must be identified by a label mounted next the circuit breaker
Switchboards indicating the switchboard number and its location or the equipment.
A typed circuit schedule must be provided for all switchboards. It must:
Distribution and
- Be mounted in a suitable holder inside the switchboard door.
Electrical K- Mechanical
Labelling K 21.04.03 - Indicate the size and origin of the incoming sub main
Engineer Electrical Services
- Circuit schedules must identify the circuit number, rating and a description
Switchboards
of the equipment and relevant room identification codes.
On completion of electrical installation works, provide certification in
accordance with Authority requirements that all works have been inspected
Electrical K- and tested and comply with regulations and standards including copies of all
Testing & Certification General K 22.01.01
Engineer Electrical essential services certifications.
Copies of the compliance certification must be included in the Operation and
Maintenance manuals.
For major construction works all parts of the electrical installation must be
Electrical K-
Testing & Certification General K 22.01.02 inspected and certified by an independent and qualified Electrical Inspector.
Engineer Electrical
Self-certification by the Installation Contractor is not acceptable.
Provide certificates of manufacturer's works tests for the following:
- Switchboard type
Electrical K-
Testing & Certification Work Tests K 22.02 - switchgear in accordance with specified requirements of AS 3439.1;
Engineer Electrical
- UPS;
- Standby generator set.
73

A thermographic scan of transformer terminations, substation switchboards,
main switchboards, mechanical services switchboards and distribution
switchboards that are applicable to the project must be carried out 6 weeks
prior to the end of the defects liability period. Include in the scans all busbars,
Electrical K-
Testing & Certification Commissioning K 22.03.01 isolating links, switches, circuit breakers and cable joints.
Engineer Electrical
All components, joints, etc., that show the presence of abnormal
temperatures must be checked and the fault rectified. A subsequent
thermographic scan must be carried out to prove that the problem has been
rectified.
Electrical K- Load is to be balanced as evenly as possible over all phases at Practical
Testing & Certification Commissioning K 22.03.02
Engineer Electrical Completion, and again at the end of the Defects Liability Period.
Commissioning includes but is not limited to the following:
- Operating sequences, interlocks and safeties;
- Final controls calibration;
- System operation under all operating modes and under all conditions of
load;
Electrical K-
Testing & Certification Commissioning K 22.03.03 - Inter-system operation and correct interfacing connections under all
Engineer Electrical
operating conditions and under simulated fire conditions;
- Noise and vibration tests;
- Thermoscan survey of switchboards;
- Environmental audit as required by Authorities;
- Rectification and correction of any defects and deficiencies.
Site tests must include but are not be limited to the following:
- Insulation resistance tests in accordance with AS/NZS 3000;
- High voltage tests in accordance with AS 1931.1 between phases and
phase to earth on all switchgear assemblies;
- Earth resistance tests in accordance with AS/NZS 3000;
- Polarity and connection tests in accordance with AS/NZS 3000;
- Earth fault-loop impedance tests;
- Verification of polarity and phase rotation;
- Functional tests of all switchgear, controls and systems including safety
devices.
- Testing as specified in Australian Standard 3017.
Electrical K-
Testing & Certification Site Tests K 22.04 - Correct torque of bolted connections;
Engineer Electrical
- Trip tests of protective circuit breakers;
- Interlock operation;
- Verification of operation of all power outlets and isolators;
- Verification of operation of all luminaires and lighting switches. Rectification /
replacement of any noisy/defective luminaires;
- Testing of all RCD devices;
- Verification of all lighting controls;
- Intersystem testing and verification for mechanical, fire, security and lift
interfaces;
- Thermographic scan of all switchboards cable joints and busduct joints;
- Harmonic tests for variable speed drives.
Pre-energisation tests must include but are not be limited to the following:
- Tightness of screwed and bolted connections;
- Physical integrity;
- Correct phasing. Check phase rotation is consistent throughout the project
Electrical K- Pre-Energisation and is the same as the supply;
Testing & Certification K 22.05
Engineer Electrical Tests - Insulation resistance tests;
- Test operation of all trips, interlocks, motor driven devices, contactors and
control circuits and devices by instigating or simulating inputs;
- Test reports and certificates must be submitted in the Operation and
Maintenance manuals.
Provide Operating and Maintenance Manuals including a:
- Description of the systems;
- Switchboards list stating exact locations and copies of the circuit schedules;
- Emergency and exit light list with description of fittings and maintenance
code no's.;
- Equipment lists including luminaires with manufacturer's, agents and name
plate data;
- Operating instructions for systems and equipment
Electrical K- Operation & - manufacturer's maintenance instructions for all equipment
K 23
Engineer Electrical Maintenance Manuals - Spare parts list with manufacturer and catalogue No.
- Emergency lighting testing & maintenance requirements.
- Copy of any discrimination studies and circuit breaker settings.
- Copy of design calculations,
- Copies of commissioning records.
- Copies of all test and approval certificates.
- Copies of as-installed drawings.
The as installed drawings or the updating of the existing drawings is to be
carried out as part of any works.
Provide schematic diagrams (SLD) for all major assemblies mounted in a
Electrical K- Operation & Diagrams & protective cover adjacent to the assembly. Drawing must include:
K 23.01.01
Engineer Electrical Maintenance Manuals Schedules - All equipment including manufacturer, model, ratings and settings;
- Size, rating and length of all incoming and outgoing cables and busways.
Provide wiring diagrams of all protection, instrumentation and control circuits.
Fix in Perspex faced holders in approved locations within cabinet, cupboard
Electrical K- Operation & Diagrams & or room. Drawings must be cross referenced to labelling and identify:
K 23.01.02
Engineer Electrical Maintenance Manuals Schedules - Equipment;
- Wiring;
- Terminals.
74

Provide circuit schedules for all sub-circuits. Type schedules on white card
and fix in Perspex faced holders on the back of the switchboard or cupboard
doors, or on wall adjacent. Schedules must be cross referenced to labelling
and identify:
Electrical K- Operation & Diagrams &
K 23.01.03 - Circuit;
Engineer Electrical Maintenance Manuals Schedules
- Location and type of equipment connected;
- Rating of protection for fused circuits;
- Source of supply
- sub mains size.
Provide update to University asset registers to the University standard and

format for the addition and removal of assets:
- Electrical, includes: light and power, switchboards, generators, LV air
circuit breakers, residual current devices, emergency and exit lighting, ring
main units, power factor correction units
Electrical K-
Asset Register K 24 - Transformers
Engineer Electrical
- Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)
- HV battery banks
- HV switchgear
- HV Cables
The structured cabling system is managed by eSolutions. Compliance is

Electrical L- Structure Cabling
L 01 required with the eSolution's Communications Cabling Manual for
Engineer Communications System Data/Voice
compliance.
Vertical travel where multiple floor/level buildings are proposed, sufficient
means of vertical travel (stairs, ramps, lifts and the like), must be introduced
M-
to minimise occupant journey/waiting times, and comply with Statutory
Architect Vertical General Design Principles M 01
Regulations BCA & DDA in terms of use, access & egress, and total number
Transportation
of building occupants. Vertical transport must be designed to minimise
operational energy use.
M-
Lifts must have a minimum capacity of 1500 kg or as otherwise noted in the
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Capacity M 02.01
project Technical Specification and include Non Proprietary components.
Transportation
M-
Lifts have to be designed in accordance with current Australian Standards
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Accessibility M 02.02
and DDA.
Transportation
M- Machine room-less lifts with regenerative drives are to be used. Energy
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Energy Efficiency M 02.03.01 efficiency is a priority design consideration for equipment and control
Transportation algorithms.
M-
Lighting to be LED and occupancy detectors are to be used to ensure lights
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Energy Efficiency M 02.03.02
and extraction fans are shut down when lift is not in use.
Transportation
M- Each lift must include the supply of a protective blanket for the walls of the
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Protective Blanket M 02.04 car. The car interior must be designed to allow easy installation of the
Transportation blanket.
M-
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts EWIS M 02.05 Connected to EWIS.
Transportation
M-
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts MCE Networked M 02.06 Controls to be MCE networked control and monitoring system. (Caulfield)
Transportation
M-
Provide handrails to side walls. Preference is for finished stainless steel
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Interior M 02.07.01
shrouds and skirtings.
Transportation
M-
Lift car walls to be non–scratchable, no smear surfaces and allow for easy
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Interior M 02.07.02
clean surfaces.
Transportation
M-
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Interior M 02.07.03 Floor to be hard wearing, non-slip and allow ease of removal of gum.
Transportation
M-
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Sizing M 02.08 Door width to be minimum 900 mm.
Transportation
M-
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Operation M 02.09 Visual and audio direction and floor information.
Transportation
M-
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Lift buttons M 02.10.01 Lift buttons to be located between 850 mm and 1200 mm above floor.
Transportation
M-
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Lift buttons M 02.10.02 Label lift buttons with visual and tactile indicators.
Transportation
M- As a minimum, capable of comfortably transporting an elevated work platform
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Area M 02.11 and two persons, or an ambulance trolley and three passengers, whichever is
Transportation the greater.
M-
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Signage M 02.12 Provide tactile and visual indicators to assist accessibility.
Transportation
75

Machine room-less lifts must be used, but where this is not deemed
practicable, the following conditions prevail:
- The machine-room access doors, closer and notice must comply with SAA
M- Lift Code.
Architect Vertical Passenger Lifts Lift machine room M 02.13 - Room must be fitted with fresh intake and exhaust fans. All fans must be
Transportation controlled by VSD’s and thermostat and connected to BAS.
- All lift room must be equipped with emergency evacuation lighting.
- All lift rooms must have racks and shelves to store technical documentation
and drawings.
M-
Installation of escalators must be considered only if other forms of vertical
Architect Vertical Escalators General M 03.01.01
transportation are not possible or practical.
Transportation
For escalators, the following conditions prevail:
- Provide tactile strips at entry and exit.
- Provide barrier flags at entry and exit.
M-
- Provide colour contrasting steps.
Architect Vertical Escalators General M 03.01.02
- Provide floor indication.
Transportation
- All motors to be VSD controlled,
- Presence detection allowing speed set-back or stopping of escalators when
not in use must be included in designs
Designating stairs for everyday use:
- Provide one or all stairs in a building for everyday use, whether in the form
of a grand staircase or fire stairs that also serves as the principal means of
travel.
M- - Focus on stairs rather than lifts as the principal means of vertical travel for
Designating stairs
Architect Vertical Stairs M 04.01 those who are able to climb stairs.
for everyday use
Transportation - In high-rise buildings, provide an integrated vertical circulation system that
incorporates stair use for travel between adjacent floors, so that lifts are used
primarily for vertical travel of four floors or more.
- Integrate the stairs with the principal areas of orientation and travel within
the building.
Stair location and visibility:
- Locate stairs near the building’s entrance.
- Locate an appealing, visible stair directly on the building’s principal paths of
travel
- Design stairs to be more visible. Use one or more of the following:
M- - Fire-rated glass enclosures instead of traditional opaque enclosures.
Stair location and
Architect Vertical Stairs M 04.02 - Open stairs between two or more floors with either the same or associated
visibility
Transportation tenancies.
- ADD Factors
- Stairway overhangs - Ensure they can be easily detected by visitors
especially visually impaired persons to avoid injury at head height (e.g. by
enclosing or provision of TGI's)
- Handrails - Install with 30% contrast to background surfaces
To create an appealing stair environment:
- Incorporate architecturally articulated and unique stair compositions which
provide an exciting and appealing proposition for users.
M-
Appealing stair - Highlight interesting views, such as prospects onto nature or indoor
Architect Vertical Stairs M 04.03
environment gathering areas.
Transportation
- Incorporate artwork into the stair environment.
- Incorporate natural ventilation.
- Select bright, inviting colours.
Design safe stairs:
M- - Provide colour or textural contrasts at tread nosings.
Architect Vertical Stairs Design safe stairs M 04.04 - Provide well-lit stair environments.
Transportation - Incorporate natural daylight into the stair environment.
- Provide illumination levels of 75 percent to equal that of adjacent corridors
Cool rooms must adhere to the following conditions:
N-
- The thickness of the cool rooms’ wall must be not less than 75 mm.
Mechanical Special Services
Cool Rooms N 01 - Slip Resistant Industrial Floor Plates must be used for the cool room
Engineer & Central Energy
flooring.
Systems
- Appropriate warning or hazard signage to be installed at point of entry.
Compressed air systems must adhere to the following conditions:
- Use “Compair” compressors or equal, with air cooled after-cooler.
N-
- Size receiver to start four times per hour on a differential of approx. 200 kPa
Compressed Air General N 02.01 - Provide oil filters to discharge side of compressor before the air receiver.
- Provide refrigerated non-cycling air dryer and line filter after air receiver.
Systems
- Screw style air compressor to be considered as an option.
- Compressor must be BAS controlled and monitored.
N-
Provide 240v supply for a vacuum pump where required with on/off isolator
Compressed Air Vacuum Systems N 02.02 and remote switch with neon indicator mounted on skirting wiring duct over
fume cupboard (generally one pump for two fume cupboards).
Systems
N-
Mechanical Special Services Sanitary
Compressed Air N 02.03 Sanitary Incinerators must be not used, unless specified.
Engineer & Central Energy Incinerators
Systems
N-
Mechanical Special Services Centralised Energy Refrigeration Plant The refrigeration plant must comply with the requirements outlined in Section
N 03.01
Engineer & Central Energy Systems – Chillers I - HVAC, specifically under the Chilled Water Systems category.
Systems
76

Boiler to be gas fired and fully automatic condensing type with the following
combustion control:
N-
- Air to fuel ratio control with programmed set-points at full and part load
Mechanical Special Services Centralised Energy
Boilers N 03.02.01 operation,
Engineer & Central Energy Systems
- Air to fuel ratio controller with oxygen trimming and variable speed
Systems
combustion air fan.
- Modular configuration
Boilers will need to meet the following conditions:
- Have fully modulating burners
N-
- Low NOx burners
Boilers N 03.02.02 - Have flue gas heat recovery options
- Provide an appropriate flame failure testing system
Systems
- Ensure each boiler appropriately identified
- Use condensing boilers with COP of 0.9 or greater
N-
Mechanical Special Services Centralised Energy The start button is to be mounted and covered to avoid accidental operation.
Boilers N 03.02.03
Engineer & Central Energy Systems Start function controlled by campus/building BAS.
Systems
N-
Boilers N 03.02.04 Ensure mounts do not transfer vibration to building fabric.
Systems
N-
Boilers N 03.02.05 Provide test points at appropriate locations.
Systems
N-
Mechanical Special Services Centralised Energy All new boilers, pumps and pipe work must have 20% redundancy for future
Boilers N 03.02.06
Engineer & Central Energy Systems expiation.
Systems
N-
Mechanical Special Services Centralised Energy Heat Exchange
N 03.03 Heat exchangers are to be (preferably) free Flow Plate type.
Engineer & Central Energy Systems Plant
Systems
N-
Electrical Special Services Electricity Generating Standby Power The Standby Power Generators within Electricity Generating Plants must
N 03.04
Engineer & Central Energy Plant Generators comply with Section K
Systems
Only SMA grid-tie DC-AC inverters must be used.
The grid-tie DC/AC inverter(s) must have capacity rated to match the PV
N-
array and must meet AS 4777. It should also have the ability to synchronise
Electrical Special Services Electricity Generating Photovoltaic (PV)
N 03.05.01 with the mains supply through PV distribution board. This must not feed back
Engineer & Central Energy Plant Arrays
into the building electrical supply system in the event that the building
Systems
electrical system is de-energised. Surge protection mechanism, connection
to earthing, BCSE Approval being the other requirements.
PV arrays must include a Sunny Sensorbox weather sensor. This must read
N- as a minimum irradiance, module temperature, ambient temperature and
Electrical Special Services Electricity Generating Photovoltaic (PV) wind speed. The sensor must be hardwired – Bluetooth is not to be used.
N 03.05.02
Engineer & Central Energy Plant Arrays All PV, inverter and weather station data must be communicated to a single
Systems Sunny Webbox, which must then in turn transmit to/from an external SMA
Sunny Portal website.
Automatic anti-islanding protection is to be provided – this protection must
detect a loss of mains power and immediately shut down supply from the
N-
system to the point of connection with the building. This must occur without
N 03.05.03 manual intervention. Where this protection is to be provided by the inverter,
documentation is to be provided to prove this capability. The contractor must
Systems
provide a practical demonstration at the completion of works to confirm that
the system meets this requirement.
Scope of works must include all liaison and coordination with authorities, area
N- electrical distributors and retailers on the University’s behalf. This must
Electrical Special Services Electricity Generating Photovoltaic (PV) include production of all drawings/schematics required by authorities,
N 03.05.04
Engineer & Central Energy Plant Arrays distributors and retailers prior to, during, and following construction. The
Systems contractor must act on the University’s behalf to arrange electrical connection
agreements and configuration of utility meters to be solar-capable.
The mounting frames must be light, strong enough to support the module
loading and corrosion resistant as appropriate. The frames and fixtures must
also comply with relevant wind loading requirements. The framing must come
N-
with full certification, including wind loading certification. The installation itself
N 03.05.05 must come with wind loading certification, specifically certifying the
installation’s suitability to the building. The method of fixing and actual
Systems
installation must be certified to be safe and suitable for the roofing onto which
it is being fixed. Where the roof structure permits, a system which minimises
roof penetrations is desirable.
Phase balancing is to be provided as part of the system. This may be
N-
achieved by use of appropriate 3-phase inverters with inbuilt balancing
N 03.05.06 capabilities, or another form which provides phase balancing across the
installation. Phase balancing must meet all requirements set by the area
Systems
electrical distributor.
N-
Electrical Special Services Electricity Generating Photovoltaic (PV) Provide necessary, testing commissioning, labelling and certification as per
N 03.05.07
Engineer & Central Energy Plant Arrays Australian Standards.
Systems
77

N-
Electrical Special Services Electricity Generating Photovoltaic (PV) Provide training/demonstration of the system to University maintenance staff
N 03.05.08
Engineer & Central Energy Plant Arrays during and after installation.
Systems
As built electrical schematic/layout drawings, estimated annual energy output
analysis, wind loading certifications, Certificate of Electrical Safety, all other
relevant certifications, data sheets etc. This information, as well as any other
N-
relevant data, must be provided in a bound Operation & Maintenance Manual.
N 03.05.09 A total of one (1) Operation & Maintenance Manuals must be provided in
hard-copy form at conclusion of the works. The manual must also be
Systems
provided in two (2) copies in softcopy form on CD, with all as-built drawings in
AutoCAD or agreed equivalent and all documentation in MSWord or MS
Excel format as appropriate.
N-
Electrical Special Services Electricity Generating Photovoltaic (PV) All penetrations and damage caused to the building must be sealed or
N 03.05.10
Engineer & Central Energy Plant Arrays repaired to prior condition.
Systems
The supply and installation must comply with all applicable standards, codes
and regulations, including but not limited to, the following standards:
- AS 5033 Installation of Photovoltaic (PV) Array
- AS 4777.1 Grid Connection of Energy Systems via Inverters: Installation
Requirements
- AS 4777.2 Grid Connection of Energy Systems via Inverters: Inverter
Requirements
N-
- AS 4777.3 Grid Connection of Energy Systems via Inverters: Grid
N 03.05.11 Protection Requirements
- AS 3000 SAA Wiring Rules
Systems
- AS 1170.2 Structural Design Actions – Part 2: Wind Actions
- IEC 61836 Solar Photovoltaic Energy Systems Terms, Definitions and
Symbols
- IEC61215 Design qualification and type approval class (II)
- IEC 61730-2 Photovoltaic (PV) module safety qualification - Part 2:
Requirements for testing
- Building Code of Australia
N- Photovoltaic (PV) modules will be IEC certified, provided with the appropriate
Electrical Special Services Electricity Generating Photovoltaic (PV) number of bypass diodes, provided with appropriate performance and
N 03.05.12
Engineer & Central Energy Plant Arrays mechanical warranty, light (weight) as far as possible, produced under ISO
Systems certification, and included in BCSE Approved List.
N-
The system must be sufficiently accessible for maintenance purposes, and
N 03.05.13 must have sufficient clearances from roof edges to allow for practical
maintenance of the building.
Systems
N-
Electrical Special Services Electricity Generating Photovoltaic (PV) DC and AC Isolators will be designed as per BCSE guidelines and will meet
N 03.05.14
Engineer & Central Energy Plant Arrays present BCSE requirements.
Systems
Architect & O-
Section O - Grounds & Landscaping must be read in conjunction with the Monash Design and Development
Civil Grounds & General O 01
Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL) Controls - Landscape (DDCL)
Engineer Landscaping
Greenfield sites must not contain threatened or vulnerable species. Where
Architect & O- such species exist adequate protection shall be provided. Necessary
Civil Grounds & General Design Principles O 01.01.01 protection measures shall be determined through liaison with the relevant
Controls - Landscape (DDCL)
Engineer Landscaping Monash university Project manager / coordinator and any applicable
Australian standards and/or environmental legislation.
There is to be no net reduction in native vegetation and tree canopy
cover. Where existing trees are approved for removal in accordance
Architect & O-
with University Tree Policy, tree canopy must be maintained by means of Monash Design and Development
Civil Grounds & General Design Principles O 01.01.02
replanting so as to achieve coverage, upon maturity. The Environmental Controls - Landscape (DDCL)
value of the site is not to be diminished beyond its previous state (refer
EcoAccord).
Architect & O- Plantings will consist of vegetation suitable for the intended application and
Civil Grounds & General Design Principles O 01.01.03 generally be an Australian native species in accordance with the University
Engineer Landscaping Planting Policy.
Architect & O- Plantings will enhance biodiversity through the provision of local specific
Civil Grounds & General Design Principles O 01.01.04 species and habitat structures that attract desired native fauna and maximise
Engineer Landscaping benefits to the broader ecosystem.
Architect & O- - Paving – 5 years
Civil Grounds & General Warranty Periods O 01.02 - Asphalt tanking – 15 years
Engineer Landscaping - New or replacement Shrub planting – 3 months
- New or replacement Tree/Palm planting - 12 months
It is expected that the following design life are provided:
Architect & O-
- Civil Works – 60 years
Civil Grounds & General Design Life O 01.03
- Electrical Works - 15 Years
- Mechanical Works - 25 Years
78

A tree assessment of all trees with the construction foot print needs to be
carried out by a qualified Arborist and report tabled. The default stance
is retention of all trees on site but where any removal is necessary, approval
must be sought from the Executive Director, Buildings & Property, Monash
University in accordance with University Tree Policy. As per AS4970, all trees
within construction sites must be protected and Project Arborist engaged pre-
Architect & O- Construction & construction, during construction and post-construction. A bank guarantee for
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Demolition: Root O 02.01.01 the value of trees as per CTLA tree valuation method within the construction
Engineer Landscaping Zones site, may be required by the University. All landscape/grounds elements trees
within construction site and fencing including trees, gardens, irrigation,
furniture, is the responsibility of the contractor/builder to maintain.
Reinstatement and reparation must be carried out prior to site handover back
to the University. A formal inspection and/or meeting will be organised prior to
the expected handover. Where reinstatement or reparations are inadequate,
liability will still remain with contractor/builder.
Architect & O- Construction &
Erect protective fencing and signage in accordance with AS4970 for the
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Demolition: Root O 02.01.02
protection of trees and their root systems during construction.
Engineer Landscaping Zones
Where any Building Work is being carried out, the person in charge of a
building site must ensure that the building site is developed and managed to
minimise the risks of stormwater pollution, through contaminated runoff of
chemicals, sediments, or other associated Builder's refuse in accordance
with best practice guidelines as issued by EPA Vic, and Melbourne Water. ie:
- Construction techniques for sediment pollution control, EPA Vic Best
practice environmental management series, Pub No. 275
- Environmental guidelines for major construction sites, , EPA Vic Best
practice environmental management series, Pub No. 480
- KEEPING OUR STORMWATER CLEAN - A BUILDER’S GUIDE.
Information to help you control sediment and litter from your building site and
comply with Council and State regulations -Melbourne Water
This includes measures to:
- minimise the amount of mud, dirt, sand, soil or stones deposited on the
Architect & O- Minimisaing
abutting roads, adjoining land or washed into the stormwater system,
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Stormwater O 02.02
- prevent building clean-up, wash down or other wastes and Builder's refuse
Engineer Landscaping Pollution
being discharged off site or allowed to enter the stormwater system, for
example runoff from concrete cutting.
- ensure all wastes from builders site sheds, including kitchen waste are
contained on site or discharged to sewer
- ensure all vehicles delivering materials to the site are prevented from
depositing mud, sand, soil or stones onto Monash University’s road network,
- ensure that any waste which has spilled onto the road, nature strip or
surrounding area is removed as soon as practicable so that any residues are
prevented from entering the stormwater system and to avoid traffic hazards,
- ensure that any footpath adjacent to the building site or likely to be affected
by the building work is kept clear of mud and dirt at all times
Note: As per Section B - Design Controls - Item B 01.11, large construction
works require a Water Management Plan to be prepared for review by the
Sustainability Compliance & Integration Officer.
Architect & O-
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Restricted Material O 02.03 No polystyrene to be used in the construction of stormwater system.
Building work must not cause an impediment or detriment to, or be carried out
in an unsafe manner so as to pose a risk to the safety of, pedestrians and
vehicles. For the purposes of this clause, impediment, detriment and risk to
safety to pedestrians or vehicular traffic may be caused by:
Architect & O- - mud or debris on a road or footpath;
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Safety O 02.04 - material referable to building work on a road or footpath;
Engineer Landscaping - equipment referable to building work on a road or footpath;
- excavation on or immediately adjacent to a road or footpath;
- damage referable to building work on, or directly adjacent to, a road or
footpath; or
- building work on a road or footpath.
Works required to be undertaken within the road may be subject to the
requirement of a traffic management. For every instance where works either
include roadways, pathways or bicycle lanes or it is envisaged that plant and
Architect & O- equipment will spill onto these areas the contractor must prepare a traffic
Traffic
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation O 02.05 management plan. The plan shall detail what mitigation measures will be
Management
Engineer Landscaping employed to manage traffic, pedestrian and/or cyclists and provide safe
alternate routes for the entire duration of works. The traffic management plan
shall be submitted to the relevant Monash University Project manager/
coordinator for approval prior to works commencing.
A waste management plan must be provided to the university prior to
demolition. The waste management plan shall include the following:
Architect & O- i. How all waste generated on the site will be measured;
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Demolition O 02.06.01 ii. Types of waste that will be collected for reuse, recycling or for landfill;
Engineer Landscaping iii. The waste contractor(s) engaged to collect and dispose of the waste;
iv. How reuse and recycling of the demolition will occur, and
v. The person responsible for each of the parts in the plan.
Waste streams are to be segregated and recycled appropriately. A target of
90% (by weight) of demolition waste to be diverted from landfill. As per B1.
Architect & O- 01.04 Monthly waste and recycling data must be provided and forwarded to
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Demolition O 02.06.02 the Sustainability Compliance & Integration Officer. Copies of EPA waste
Engineer Landscaping transport certificates must be provided to the Sustainability and Compliance
officer for the disposal of EPA prescribed industrial wastes, examples of
which include, asbestos, contaminated soils, waste sludges, waste oils etc.
79

Architect & O- If works, trenching, scaffolding etc. is unavoidable within the Structural Root
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Site Clearance O 02.07.01 Zone 'SRZ' or Tree Protection Zone 'TPZ', advice from the Project Arborist
Engineer Landscaping must be sought as per AS4970.
Architect & O-
Any pruning, either branches or roots must comply with Australian Standard
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Site Clearance O 02.07.02
4373-2007, be carried out by a qualified arborist
Payment of damages must be the replacement costs. If replaced with a
Architect & O-
smaller tree the difference between replacement costs will be assessed as
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Site Clearance O 02.07.03
damages costs. Tree values shall be based on CTLA (Council of Tree and
Landscape Appraises) method.
No stockpiles of materials or storage on garden beds or grassed areas
without prior approval of the Grounds Curator. The contractor will be
responsible for the reinstatement of all Monash garden beds or grassed areas
to the same level or better than was previously there. Where turf is damaged,
Architect & O- Excavation of they must be re-sodded with “Kikuyu” grass in amenity lawns or
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Topsoil and O 02.08.01 'Santa Anna' Couch grass in sporting fields. Contractor will thereafter be
Engineer Landscaping Stockpile of Spoil responsible for watering and establishment of the turf for a period up to 4
weeks. Subject to approval by the Grounds Curator, hydroseeding or
broadbacsting turf seed may be permissible for short term coverage only
during winter months but must be re-sodded subsequently during warmer
months or when sod becomes available.
Architect & O- Excavation of All Topsoil must be separated from the construction site and protected from
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Topsoil and O 02.08.02 degradation for reuse at the completion of the project. There should be no net
Engineer Landscaping Stockpile of Spoil change in the volume of topsoil on the site.
Architect & O- Excavation of
At the completion of any works all rubble and equipment must be removed
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Topsoil and O 02.08.03
and the area left in a clean and tidy condition.
Engineer Landscaping Stockpile of Spoil
The excavation must be finished off with an even surface and thoroughly
Architect & O-
Reduced Level consolidated until a firm and uniform subgrade has been obtained throughout
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation O 02.09.01
Excavation the entire area. Depressions which develop during rolling shall be filled with
sand.
Architect & O- The existing soil must be graded and trimmed to the extent necessary to
Reduced Level
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation O 02.09.02 conform with the finished levels, grades and cross sections indicated, and
Excavation
Engineer Landscaping shall allow for the placing of topsoil, paving and new structures.
Any over-excavation performed by the Contractor for any purpose or reason,
except as may be directed by the Superintendent and whether or not due to
Architect & O-
Reduced Level the fault of the Contractor, must be at the expense of the Contractor. All such
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation O 02.09.03
Excavation over excavation shall be refilled as directed by the Superintendent and the
cost of furnishing and placing this fill shall be at the expense of the
Contractor.
Architect & O- The Contractor must effectively and properly stabilise all excavations to
Reduced Level
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation O 02.09.04 prevent any fall or run off the ground resulting from the excavation and to
Excavation
Engineer Landscaping prevent settlement or damage to structures adjacent to the excavation.
Architect & O- Filling to Make Up
Civil Grounds & Site Preparation Garden Bed O 02.10 Use clean, weed free top soils for all non-load bearing fill.
Engineer Landscaping Levels
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and All road and kerb design and construction must comply with relevant
Grounds & Roadways O 03.01.01
Engineer Paved Areas standards and codes.
Landscaping
O- Provide opportunities for a variety of construction techniques, materials and
Civil Roads, Footpaths and
Grounds & Roadways O 03.01.02 treatment of roadways e.g. the use of porous pavements or cobbled stone
Engineer Paved Areas
Landscaping effect to reduce car speeds and improve aesthetics.
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Provide vehicle set down points adjacent to the entrances to buildings where
Engineer Paved Areas appropriate
Landscaping
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Public transport stops to provide adequate shelter from prevailing weather
Engineer Paved Areas conditions.
Landscaping
O- Disabled parking to be appropriately designed and located close to building
Grounds & Roadways O 03.01.05 entrances and major pedestrian routes to provide convenient access for
Landscaping people with disabilities.
O-
Grounds & Roadways O 03.01.06 Kerbs should not present barriers to pedestrian or cyclist movement paths.
Landscaping
O- Provide properly identified services conduits under roads at appropriate
Grounds & Roadways O 03.01.07 locations for future expansion, and ensure locations and conduit sizes are
Landscaping documented.
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Speed humps must only be used on paved roads where passive means of
Grounds & Speed Humps O 03.02.01
Engineer Paved Areas slowing vehicles is not available.
Landscaping
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and All speed humps must be constructed, signposted and marked in accordance
Grounds & Speed Humps O 03.02.02
Engineer Paved Areas with the relevant Australian Standard, preferably of recycled content material.
Landscaping
O-
Grounds & Crossovers O 03.03 Reinforce vehicle cross-over points.
Landscaping
Pedestrian crossings to be designed in accordance with Australian Standards
and DDA requirements. Pedestrian crossings near driveways must be
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Pedestrian minimised and any adjacent bushes or shrubs shall not obscure the view of
Grounds & O 03.04
Engineer Paved Areas Crossings motorists or pedestrians approaching the crossing. Raised pedestrian
Landscaping
crossing with at-grade interface with top of kerb is preferred to provide ease
of access for cyclists, pedestrians, prams and wheelchairs.
80

O- Bollards are to be manufactured and installed in accordance with the Monash
Grounds & Bollards O 03.05.01 University master plan public realm furniture and fixtures palette which is
Landscaping further defined under the Landscape Design Development Controls.
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Removable bollards must also have a spare gib and socket installed adjacent
Grounds & Bollards O 03.05.02
Engineer Paved Areas to pathway for housing the bollard when removed from its typical location.
Landscaping
O- The intent of any bollard installation must be properly considered. Any area
Grounds & Bollards O 03.05.03 requiring impact protection must propose an alternative barrier type to be
Landscaping approved by the Monash University Project Manager/Coordinator.
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Paths & Paved Design to eliminate trips, slips and falls. Adopt accessible gradients in
Grounds & O 03.06.01
Engineer Paved Areas Areas accordance with current standards and safe separation of bicycles.
Landscaping
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Paths & Paved
Grounds & O 03.06.02 Design to ensure accessibility at kerbs when paths intersect with roadways.
Engineer Paved Areas Areas
Landscaping
O- Provide hazard and/or directional tactile indicators for visually impaired at
Grounds & O 03.06.03 required locations from the Warning TGSI selection in the Monash Design
Landscaping and Development Controls - Landscape (Part 2)
Major pedestrian paths must consider the need for emergency vehicle access
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Paths & Paved and manoeuvrability. Swept path analysis must be completed on all
Engineer Paved Areas Areas landscape areas with consideration to the likely vehicles and their frequency
Landscaping
accessing the pathways.
O- Roads, footpaths and paved areas to comply with the type (standard, custom
Grounds & O 03.06.05 or bespoke) specified in the Monash Design and Development Controls -
Landscaping Landscape (DDCL)
O- The use of permeable pavements, where possible, is encouraged however
Grounds & O 03.06.06 consideration must be given to its limited structural strength compared to
Landscaping conventional pavement.
All trafficable paths and roadways, including emergency vehicle access
routes, must be designed, at a minimum, to carry an MFB Scania Car 115
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Paths & Paved Pumper Tanker with a rear axle load of 10.94 tonne (total gross load 17.62
Engineer Paved Areas Areas tonne). Design safety factors are to be applied on top of these loads, in
Landscaping
accordance with good design practice and the appropriate Australian
Standards.
Any concrete or pathway saw cutting and replacement must be done on
O- whole panels to ensure replacement sections tie in neatly with existing. All
Grounds & O 03.06.08 replacement panels shall be dowelled into the existing concrete using 12mm
Landscaping dowels at 250mm centres. Dowels shall be chemically set a minimum of
250mm into existing concrete prior to the new concrete pour.
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and External Car
Grounds & Car parks O 03.07.01 Water Sensitive Urban Design must be implemented for all car parks.
Engineer Paved Areas Parks
Landscaping
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and External Car Use landscaping to screen, shade and enhance the appearance of car parks.
Grounds & Car parks O 03.07.02
Engineer Paved Areas Parks Tree planting must target 20% shade cover within 5 years.
Landscaping
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and External Car Provide opportunities for a variety of construction techniques, materials and
Engineer Paved Areas Parks treatment of parking areas e.g. the use of porous pavements.
Landscaping
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and External Car Provide appropriately designed car parks to meet the need of special users
Engineer Paved Areas Parks including people with disabilities.
Landscaping
O-
Grounds & Car parks O 03.07.05 Ensure safe and convenient pedestrian access from vehicles and facilities.
Landscaping
O-
Grounds & Car parks O 03.07.06 Ensure safe and convenient traffic circulation.
Landscaping
O-
Grounds & Car parks O 03.07.07 Minimise conflict between service vehicles and other car park users.
Landscaping
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and External Car Provide sufficient turning areas on site to ensure vehicles can exit in a
Engineer Paved Areas Parks forward direction.
Landscaping
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and External Car Use ‘Replas’, or approved equal, recycled plastic parking wheel stops,
Engineer Paved Areas Parks coloured yellow.
Landscaping
O- Provide bicycle racks at convenient locations to each building, based on 1
Grounds & Bicycle facilities O 03.08.01 bicycle bay per 1,000m2 of floor area, and adequately designed to prevent
Landscaping theft.
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Bike rails and bicycle racks to be visible, well lit, protected from weather and
Grounds & Bicycle facilities O 03.08.02
Engineer Paved Areas meet requirements of class 3 (secure) parking facilities of AS2890.3.
Landscaping
O-
Civil Roads, Footpaths and Bicycle racks are to be manufactured and installed in accordance with the
Grounds & Bicycle facilities O 03.08.03
Engineer Paved Areas Monash University master plan public realm furniture and fixtures palette.
Landscaping
O- Design interconnected bicycle pathways and establish an underpinning
Grounds & Bicycle facilities O 03.08.04 network of unbroken through routes across the campus, consistent with the
Landscaping Masterplan (Access and Wayfinding Strategy).
81

Retaining walls above 1m require structural engineer design and approval. All
O- retaining walls to have adequate drainage layer behind the wall. Drainage
Civil Boundary walls,
Grounds & Retaining Walls O 04.01.01 layer to be a uniform 20mm aggregate free from organic matter or fines. For
Engineer Fencing and gates
Landscaping walls exceeding 400mm timber retaining walls must not be used.Refer also to
the Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL).
The Contractor on completing the retaining walls must backfill the wall with
O-
Civil Boundary walls, compacted soil to within 75mm of the top of the wall if the retained area is to
Grounds & Retaining Walls O 04.01.02
Engineer Fencing and gates be mulched or to within 5mm of the top of the wall if the retained area is to be
Landscaping
seeded down or turfed
Following placement of backfill the area must be raked to blend into the
O-
Civil Boundary walls, existing profile of the surface behind the retaining wall and to either side of
Grounds & Retaining Walls O 04.01.03
Engineer Fencing and gates the terminating ends. All off cuts and debris shall then be removed from the
Landscaping
site.
O-
Boundary walls,
Architect Grounds & Fencing O 04.02.01 Design for low maintenance where practical.
Fencing and gates
Landscaping
O-
Boundary walls,
Architect Grounds & Fencing O 04.02.02 Use low level massed planting groups in lieu of fencing where appropriate.
Fencing and gates
Landscaping
Landscaping principles must include:
- Creation of a distinctive campus character, with a diversity of flora and
O- fauna under the requirements of the Monash Design and Development
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Principles O 05.01 Controls – Landscape (DDCL)
Areas
Landscaping - Identification of landscape zones, and linkages of them.
- Respecting existing cultural and historical evolution.
- Responding adequately to climatic and environmental characteristics of site.
O-
Landscaped Species to be selected from the planting palette of the Monash Design and
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Plantings O 05.02.01
Areas Development Controls – Landscape (Part 3).
Landscaping
When designing a new landscape which requires planting of new trees,
shrubs or garden beds, it is incumbent upon the designer to ensure that:
- No new plantings occur over existing in ground mains services including,
sewer, storm water, potable water, harvested rain water, electricity, gas,
telecommunications, fire services and thermal services, with a minimum
clearance from either side of the outermost in ground service being 2 metres
to the new planting, excluding any service contained within an existing
O- service tunnel.
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Plantings O 05.02.02 - Positioning of all new plantings in proximity to any built structure must
Areas
Landscaping ensure that the fully mature planting will not impact the built structure to
cause damage and wear and that there is adequate space remaining to allow
access for an elevated work platform to be maneuvered between the planting
and the built structure in order to carry out maintenance of the façade and
external fittings.
- Positioning of all new plantings in proximity to any pathway or roadway will
not constrain the future trafficability of the pathway when the new planting is
fully mature.
Stakes to be durable hardwood, straight, free from knots or twists and pointed
O-
Tree Stakes & Landscaped at one end. Stakes should be positioned in place without penetrating the root
Architect Grounds & Landscaping O 05.03.01
Ties Areas ball of the tree. Tree ties to be woven polypropylene webbing (50 mm wide),
Landscaping
tied in a figure eight.
Installation numbers to be as follows:
O-
Tree Stakes & Landscaped - Plant Height | Stake Number | Stake Size,
Ties Areas - >3.5m | Minimum 3 | 50 x 50 x 3000 mm
Landscaping
- 2.0 – 3.5M | Minimum 2 | 50 x 50 x 2400 mm
In general regarding soil:
- Recycle soil where possible, provided that it does not contain subsoil
O-
Landscaped material.
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Soil O 05.04
Areas - Use local screened soils for garden beds if soil needs to be imported.
Landscaping
- Use well-draining soil or soil mixes must comply with Australian standards
(i.e. AS 4419)
A minimum depth of 300 mm of topsoil is required for garden beds and a
O-
Landscaped minimum depth of 100 mm topsoil for turfed or seeded areas. A minimum
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Topsoil O 05.05
Areas depth of 1 m of topsoil is required for planter boxes and beds within paved
Landscaping
areas.
O- Mulch must comply with AS 4454 and be of the following types:
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Mulch O 05.06.01 - Shredded pine flake,
Areas
Landscaping - Woodchip/leaf mulch mix with a minimum of 70% woodchip content.
Mulch must meet the following conditions:
O-
Landscaped - Forestry products to be from plantation sources only.
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Mulch O 05.06.02
Areas - The selection of garden mulch type is to be approved by Grounds curator.
Landscaping
- Depth of mulch must be that as recommended based on mulch type.
The following principles apply in regards to the use of fertiliser:
- Avoid the use of fertilisers when planting trees and shrubs.
O-
Landscaped - Use low phosphorous formulations on turf areas containing or near to
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Fertiliser O 05.07
Areas native trees.
Landscaping
- Use fertilisers which minimise the potential to rapidly enter the water table
and waterways.
O-
Horticultural Landscaped Minimise use of herbicides, fungicides and insecticides, particularly those
chemicals Areas which leave a residue.
Landscaping
O-
Horticultural Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping O 05.08.02 Avoid use of chemicals when there is potential for them to enter waterways.
chemicals Areas
Landscaping
82

Should herbicides be required for weed elimination, they must be approved
O-
Horticultural Landscaped by the Grounds Curator and organic, non-mineral compounds are preferred.
chemicals Areas Application of herbicides must be carefully controlled with no overspray
Landscaping
impacting on human, fauna or adjacent plant life.
O-
Landscaped All timber edging to be 50 mm treated pine or similar. Prior approval by
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Edging O 05.09
Areas Grounds Curator required.
Landscaping
Use permeable paving as an alternative to concrete for internal and external
O-
Landscaped pedestrian and vehicular environments, including tree surrounds, driveways,
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Concrete O 05.10
Areas car parks, and water feature surrounds. Use StoneSet or approved similar
Landscaping
product.
All paving must comply with slip resistance testing. Where possible, pervious
paving should be used, particularly in pedestrian and lightly trafficked areas.
O- This will:
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Paving O 05.11 - Prevent water collecting in puddles in wet weather,
Areas
Landscaping - Reduces stormwater run-off and nuisance flooding in small storms,
- Recharge the aquifer,
- Reduce irrigation loads in areas adjacent to paving.
O-
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Steps and Ramps O 05.12.01 All steps and ramps are to comply with Australian Standards.
Areas
Landscaping
O-
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Steps and Ramps O 05.12.02 Face brickwork and open treads MUST NOT be used for stairs and steps.
Areas
Landscaping
O-
Landscaped Where stairs/steps are sufficiently wide, a central handrail must be used
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Steps and Ramps O 05.12.03
Areas rather than a handrail on one or both sides.
Landscaping
O-
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Steps and Ramps O 05.12.04 All tread nosings must be in a contrasting colour.
Areas
Landscaping
O- Handrails must comply with Australian Standards and in particular, must
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Steps and Ramps O 05.12.05 project a minimum of 300mm beyond the top riser and one tread width plus
Areas
Landscaping 300mm beyond the bottom riser.
O-
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Steps and Ramps O 05.12.06 Handrails must also be curved over in line with DDA requirements.
Areas
Landscaping
O-
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Steps and Ramps O 05.12.07 All steps and ramps must have a kerb edge or guard rail on both sides.
Areas
Landscaping
O- Single steps are to be avoided. Where a single step is unavoidable, a kerb
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Steps and Ramps O 05.12.08 ramp must also be provided. A flight of 3 risers should be a minimum. With
Areas
Landscaping long flights of stairs, provide a landing every 10 risers.
O- Public realm furniture is to be manufactured and installed in accordance with
General Seating Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping O 05.13 the Monash University master plan public realm furniture and fixtures palette.
& Furniture Areas
Landscaping These items are to be procured by university contracted suppliers only.
O- Barbeques are prescribed in accordance with the Monash Design and
Landscaped Monash Design and Development
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Barbeque O 05.14 Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL). For outdoor barbecues without
Areas Controls - Landscape (DDCL)
Landscaping overhead shelter, fixed/hinged lids must be installed over heating surfaces.
O- Waste enclosures are to be manufactured and installed in accordance with
Landscaped Monash Design and Development
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Bin Enclosures O 05.15 the Monash University master plan public realm furniture and fixtures palette.
Areas Controls - Landscape (DDCL)
Landscaping These items are to be procured by university contracted suppliers only.
No water features are permitted that require the use of potable water as its
O-
Landscaped main or backup source. A water feature that does not have an "alternative
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Water features O 05.16.01
Areas water"source must be designed in such a way as to remain aesthetically
Landscaping
pleasing when dry.
It is encouraged that any water feature should follow the principles of Water
Sensitive Urban Design, WSUD. Water features must:
O-
Landscaped - Avoid sites prone to collecting debris in feature,
Architect Grounds & Landscaping BA O 05.16.02
Areas - Ensure ease and safety of access to pit and pumps for maintenance,
Landscaping
- Provide drainage valve,
- Provide overflow outlet.
O-
Landscaped Link to building roof rain water outlets (maximise rainwater harvesting) or the
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Water features O 05.16.03
Areas campus wide harvested storm water network
Landscaping
O- All timber decking must satisfy the requirements of DDCL (Part 2) section
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Timber Decking O 05.17.01 covering timber decking, including provision of documentation certifying
Areas
Landscaping compliance with FSC standards and timber grading.
As a minimum, the structural bearing capacity of the timber decking design
must accommodate an electric buggy towing a fully laden trailer transporting
O-
Landscaped 20 full X 240 litre landfill or comingle bins. Where the timber decking is in the
Architect Grounds & Landscaping Timber Decking O 05.17.02
Areas vicinity of a building façade or any elevated structure, then the timber decking
Landscaping
and support structure must be capable of supporting any elevated work
platform required to maintain these elevated structures.
All timber decking is to be designed to allow ease of access to any in ground
O-
Landscaped or above ground service that may exist under the decking. This includes lift
Areas off sections of decking to allow access to any pit covers located under the
Landscaping
deck.
The proposer of any timber deck must submit a fully costed annual
O-
Landscaped maintenance procedure which will allow the proposer to provide a 10 year
Areas warranty for the timber deck, assuming that Monash University adheres to the
Landscaping
annual maintenance procedure.
83

For all projects involving refurbishment or creation of new landscaped areas
with associated hard and soft landscaping, an appropriate Defects Liability
Period (DLP) term will apply, during which the Builder/Contractor is expected
O-
Defects Liability to maintain the landscaped areas for a period not less than 13 weeks and up
Period to 52 weeks. The DLP term of 13 weeks will apply instances where
Landscaping
the monetary value of landscaping is under $200,000 and
comprising predominantly softscape works. In all other scenarios, the
DLP term of 52 weeks will apply.
During the DLP term, the Builder/Contractor will be expected to maintain the
grounds and open space to the same Service Levels and frequency
O- schedules, as prescribed in the Grounds Maintenance Service Contract. This
Defects Liability
Architect Grounds & Landscaping O 05.18.02 will be determined in consultation with Grounds Curator and appropriate
Period
Landscaping financial allowance made in the project to ensure no drop in perceivable
quality and maintenance of the space during DLP. Builder/Contractor will be
expected to furnish regular reports of maintenance activity.
Adopt water saving smart technology in irrigation systems, i.e. weather
station driven controllers, drip and micro systems. All new landscaped areas
O-
Landscaped must have their irrigation requirements met via a non-potable water source –
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Overview O 06.01.01
Areas either a precinct ring main or from dedicated rainwater or grey water
Landscaping
harvesting. All new irrigation systems subject to pre-approval by the Grounds
Curator.
Where possible, irrigation systems are to have a single point of connection to

O-
Landscaped the water supply for each controller. A master valve and flow sensor is to be
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Overview O 06.01.02
Areas installed at this point and connected to the controller to enable flow
Landscaping
monitoring and error reporting.
O- Irrigation to be designed as to apply the appropriate amount of water to the

Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Design Principles O 06.02.01 plant and soil. Design is to incorporate multiple stations for effective water
Areas
Landscaping management of different zones, e.g. lawn areas, garden beds.
Uniformity of application is essential to ensure efficiency of the irrigation

system. System design should ensure the following uniformity coefficients are
O-
Landscaped achieved:
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Design Principles O 06.02.02
Areas Distribution Uniformity (DU) > 75%
Landscaping
Christiansen Coefficient of Uniformity (CU) > 84%
Scheduling Coefficient (SC) < 1.33
The following irrigation design must be applied to the relevant applications:
- Garden beds: Depending on the area and type of planting garden beds will
be irrigated by drip irrigation, pop up sprinklers with spray or rotator heads, or
O-
Landscaped heads on fixed risers.
Areas - Trees: Drip tube installed in a circular layout around the trunk to cover the
Landscaping
root area, or poly pipe with multiple drip emitters installed in the root area.
- Turf areas: Pop up rotor sprinklers.
All works shall be carried out to the appropriate Australian Standards for
installation of the total system other than conditions covered in these
specifications. Wherever there is conflict between these specifications and
the Australian Standards, the Australian Standards shall be adopted.
The following standards apply:-
1. Municipal Water Supply By-Laws.
2. Local By-Laws & Regulations.
3. AS4765, MPVC pipes and fittings manufactured for pressure application,
O-
Landscaped 4. AS2033 & interim AS4130, Installation of polyethylene pipe systems,
Areas 5. AS 2032, Codes of practice for installation of UPVC.
Landscaping
6. AS 1477, UPVC pipes and fittings manufactured for pressure application, .
7. AS. 35001, Latest edition of The Electrical Rules & Regulations.
8. AS/NZS 3500: 2003-Plumbing & Drainage.
9. AS2053, UPVC wire conduits.
10. Australian Electrical Authority, electrical specifications and codes.
11. AS 1345, Identification of the contents of Pipes, Conduits and Ducts.
12. Any other relevant or Australian Standard or code of practices associated
with supply and installation of any components proposed.
The contractor shall maintain one set of plans to document Draft "Works as
Executed" changes during the progress of installation. All the following items
shall be surveyed and drawn up in AUTOCAD for the Client by the Irrigation
Contractor unless otherwise advised. The following items shall be
documented:
- Sprinklers.
- Valve boxes.
O- - All pipework.
Drawings and Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Irrigation O 06.03 - Changes of direction of mainline.
Documentation Areas
Landscaping - Intersection points of mainline.
- QCV's.
- Air Valves.
- Isolation valves
- Scour valves.
- Pressure Regulation Valves
- Cable paths.
- Any other significant items.
84

The drip pipe will be supplied as 13mm or 19mm LDPE with integrated
emitters. For dense planting drip tube is to be installed in parallel rows with
the pipe runs up to 40cm apart.For sparse planting, tree ferns and other
plants that require them, individual drip emitters to be installed or alternatively
O- a ring of drip tube placed around the base of the plant. Individual pipe run
Drip Tube for Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Irrigation O 06.04 lengths not to exceed manufacturer’s recommendation. Each drip station to
Garden Bed Areas
Landscaping have pressure regulated control valve, inline filter, air valve and flushing
valve. Drip tube to be pegged every 3 metres. Where garden beds are
mulched drip tube is to be installed beneath the mulch layer. Drip tube to be
installed is Netafim Techline or equivalent (40cm spacing and 2.3 litres per
hour).
Sprinklers for garden beds to be:
- Rain Bird 1800
- Hunter Pro Spray
O-
Sprinklers for Landscaped - Toro 570Z
Architect Grounds & Irrigation O 06.05
Garden Bed Areas All sprinklers to be furnished with integrated check valve and pressure
Landscaping
regulator, fitted with ‘Rotator’ type nozzles and 300mm (12”) pop ups for
perimeter areas and 300mm pop ups or fixed risers within garden beds to suit
the type of planting.
Sprinklers for small turf areas up to 9 metres radius to be:
- Rain Bird 1800
O-
Sprinklers for Landscaped - Hunter Pro Spray
Small Turf Areas Areas - Toro 570Z
Landscaping
All sprinklers to be furnished with integrated check valve and pressure
regulator, fitted with ‘Rotator’ type nozzles and 150mm (6”) pop up.
Sprinklers for medium turf areas up to 12 metres radius to be:
O- Sprinklers for Rain Bird 5000
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Medium Turf O 06.07 Hunter I20
Areas
Landscaping Areas Toro T5
All sprinklers to be furnished with integrated check valve.
Sprinklers for large turf areas to be:
- Rain Bird 6504 or 8005
O- Sprinklers for - Hunter I25 or I40
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Large Turf Areas O 06.08 - Toro T7 or TS90
Areas
Landscaping and Sports Turf All sprinklers to be furnished with integrated check valve. All pop up sprinklers
are to be installed on articulated risers.
Satellite Controllers are to be linked to the Toro Sentinel Central Control

System Computer via either GRPS or short range radio communication if
applicable to the site. Satellite controllers are to be either conventional 12, 24,
32 or 48 station or Decoder where suitable. Weather stations are installed at
O-
Central Irrigation Landscaped Clayton, Caulfield and Peninsula campuses and are linked to irrigation
Architect Grounds & Irrigation O 06.09.01
Control System Areas programs to provide automatic rain shutdown and seasonal or ET program
Landscaping
adjustment. Each controller is to be positioned in a secure location in a
lockable cabinet rated to IP54, (refer to AS 60529) mounted at a height for
ease of access at ground level.
The following conditions apply in the selection of solenoid control valves:

- All Station Control Valves to be Rain Bird, Hunter or Toro with pressure
O- regulators.
Central Irrigation Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Irrigation O 06.09.02 - Each system shall be fitted with a Master Control valve and flow control
Control System Areas
Landscaping Valve where there is a single water source. All Master Control Valves to be
Rain Bird, Hunter or Toro with pressure regulators.
O-
Central Irrigation Landscaped Fit backflow prevention devices as per relevant Victorian water supply and
Control System Areas sewerage plumbing regulations.
Landscaping
Install isolation valves to mainlines immediately downstream of water source

for small systems and lateral isolation valves upstream of station solenoid
valves for large sports fields systems.
(i) Mainline:
Valves shall be cast iron fusion bonded epoxy coated Resilient seat, either
gate or sluice, sized the same as the pipe diameter on which it is to be
installed. Valves shall be selected to have pressure losses not exceeding the
O-
Central Irrigation Landscaped equivalent of 10m of pipe. All valves up to 80mm diameter may be threaded.
Control System Areas All valves greater than 80mm diameter shall be flanged to Table D.
Landscaping
All valves to have metal tags marked with the area of isolation (eg. Soccer
Field 2).
Valves shall be Crevet flanged type or similar
(ii) Laterals and off takes for Quick Coupling Valves:
Valves shall be FIP Plastic ball type. All valves shall be constructed with
materials suited to the site water and soil conditions and rated to not less than
1000 kPa.
O-
Central Irrigation Landscaped Air valves shall be A.R.I. 'Barak' Model D-040 (50mm) double acting including
Control System Areas ball valve.
Landscaping
Mainline pipework shall be either rigid “Rhino” PVC to AS 1477 and shall be
O-
Central Irrigation Landscaped rubber ring jointed, and shall be rated for pressures of 120.0 metres
Control System Areas (minimum) or butt welded Polyethylene PE100 PN12.5 SDR 13.6 as an
Landscaping
alternative.
85

Lateral pipework shall be either rigid PVC AS 1477 and shall be Solvent
Welded for sizes 50mm and below, also rated for pressures of 120.0 metres
(minimum) or MDPE PE100 PN12.5 SDR 13.6. Fittings for PVC mainline pipe
shall be Ductile Iron rubber ring jointed. .(other than lateral pipe offtakes for
O-
Central Irrigation Landscaped valve-in-heads and QVC’s for which cast iron or gunmetal tapping saddles
Control System Areas are suitable).
Landscaping
All mainline fittings for MDPE shall be butt welded or electro-fusion. Fittings
for PVC mainline pipe shall be cast iron above 50mm and PVC for 50mm and
below. All PVC lateral fittings shall be solvent weld. All MDPE lateral fittings
shall be compression.
24 Volt Station Wires - Low voltage cable to be either single conductor with
polyethylene insulation or multi-core cables with polyethylene insulation with
O-
Landscaped PVC sheathing. Cables whether single or multi-core are to have 1.5mm2
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Cabling O 06.10.01
Areas conductors.
Landscaping
O-
Landscaped Common Wires are to be single conductors with polyethylene insulation and
Areas to have a minimum conductor size of 1.5mm2.
Landscaping
O-
Landscaped 2-Wire paths for Decoder satellites are to be to be a twisted pair of
Areas polyethylene insulated 2.5mm2 conductors.
Landscaping
240 volt power cable joins must be made in accordance with Australian
O- Standards. 24 volt cable joints shall be DBRY type. Communication cable
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Cabling O 06.10.04 joins in Satellite Units or Weather Station only. 2-wire path cable joints shall
Areas
Landscaping be DBRY.
All sprinklers shall not be installed until all mains and lateral lines have been
thoroughly tested and flushed. All sprinklers shall then be mounted on swing
O- joint risers of the types specified and the contractor shall ensure all joints are
Installation - Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Irrigation O 06.11 tightened to prevent leaks. All sprinklers shall be set flush with the surface
Sprinklers Areas
Landscaping and the soil around sprinkler must be compacted to same density as adjacent
soil using existing soil or sand.
All automatic valves shall be installed in valve boxes (rectangular) with

adequate timber, concrete or brick support under valve box to prevent heavy
maintenance machinery knocking the valve box out of alignment or onto the
pipework. Support for these boxes shall be either timber, concrete or brick
and the bottom of the support work, as well as a weed-mat type cloth wrap,
O- Installation -
Landscaped shall ensure that no backfill material or soil is allowed to enter the valve box.
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Automatic Control O 06.12
Areas Furthermore a 100mm bed of gravel shall be compacted and used as a base
Landscaping Valves
for the box support. Alignment of the valve box shall make sure the valve is
centrally located. Control wire should be of adequate length and coiled to
allow easy removal of solenoid coil if service is required. Pressure regulators
should be adjusted to provide the specified sprinkler operating pressure.
All quick coupling valves shall be installed on threaded O-ring seal swing joint
risers and rotation of the valve must be prevented when being opened. This
O-
Installation - Quick Landscaped shall be achieved by using an anti-rotation collar. This shall be achieved by
Coupling Valves Areas driving a 1.0m. long angle iron into virgin soil and clamping the valve to it by
Landscaping
means of a 'U'-bolt clamp. Soil must be compacted around valve to same
density as adjacent soil.
The satellite unit shall be wall mounted and shall be furnished with an
incoming power isolation switch as well as lightning/ surge protection. The
unit shall be wall mounted at a suitable viewing height.
The central, interface units must have lightning protection equipment provided
on incoming and outgoing circuits as well as grounding grids at each location.
Also, protection for the power supply and communication cable is required, as
recommended by the controller manufacturer. The communication cable path
shall have the control system manufacturer’s recommended lightning
O- protection from the central end and at the Interface Units end. The minimum
Installation - Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Irrigation O 06.14 protection for the control system is specified below or as recommended by
Control Equipment Areas
Landscaping the manufacturer.
(i) Power supply
240 volt isolation switch.
(ii) Decoders & Wire Paths
Toro Sentinel System:
Decoder Surge Devices need to be placed along the 2-wire path and at no
more than 250m interval along the 2-wire path. This means that the maximum
distance from a Surge Device to a decoder outlet is 125m in either direction
from the Surge Device.
All risers must be installed to ensure correct sprinkler height. All threads
O-
Installation - Landscaped must be adequately tightened (but not over tightened) to ensure there are no
Risers Areas leaks. In the case of the O-ring seal type, if the riser is to be totally
Landscaping
assembled by the contractor.
All isolation valves on the mainline must be installed with spindles or levers
O-
Installation - Landscaped having adequate room to be operated and install top of valve no less than
Isolation Valves Areas 100mm from top of valve box. All mainline valves must be thrust blocked and
Landscaping
strapped to thrust block. Straps shall be galvanised steel rod.
86

Valve boxes are to be installed with lids flush with finished grade. Each box
must have either bricks or concrete blocks placed under to support box and
O-
Installation - Valve Landscaped prevent the box from resting on pipework. This support work as well as
Boxes Areas plastic or other sheet material must ensure that backfill material or
Landscaping
surrounding soil does not enter the valve box. Furthermore, a 100mm bed of
gravel shall be compacted to support the bricks or timber base of the box.
Air valves may be installed above ground where they are not obtrusive. In
O-
Installation - Air Landscaped prime viewing areas, place valve underground in a rectangular valve box. A
Valves Areas 25mm. hole should be drilled into the valve box lid to allow air to vent from the
Landscaping
box.
In general, the contractor must excavate in materials as found in the sub

grade to a sufficient depth to ensure a minimum cover of 450mm over
mainlines and 300mm lateral pipework to the finished surface level. Backfill
material shall be placed in layers of 150mm compacted to the same density
as adjacent soil to eliminate any subsequent subsidence. Where excavation
is in clay, the pipework shall be laid on a bed of sand and sand placed around
the pipe to a depth of a minimum of 50mm above the top of the pipe. Then
selected backfill shall be used for the remainder. Furthermore if the base
material is clay it should not be mixed with top soil and used as backfill
material for the entire profile. If topsoil is a different material to base material
then the trench shall be backfilled with the excavated material to the existing
level of the base and the remainder shall be backfilled with topsoil. If rock is
encountered, then approved friable backfill material or sand shall be used as
bedding material. In rocky areas the trenching depth shall be 50mm below
O-
Excavation and Landscaped normal trench depth to allow for this bedding. Sand or selected backfill shall
Backfill Areas be placed to 50mm above the pipe and the remainder of the backfill shall
Landscaping
contain no lumps or rocks larger than 50mm. The top 150mm of backfill shall
be free of rocks larger than 25mm. All trenches that are opened during any
particular working day shall be closed and backfilled on the same day after
Works As Executed information has been collected. No open trenches or
partially backfilled trenches shall be left overnight. Backfill material shall be
placed in layers of 150mm compacted to the same density as adjacent soil to
eliminate any subsequent subsidence. The Contractor shall remove all
excess trench material and incorporate in earthworks in general as part of the
price. Mainline pipework shall be open trenched with a chain digger or
excavator and lateral pipework can be either open trenched with chain digger
or mole ploughed. See Section O: Appendix - Grounds & Landscaping for
diagram.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, the construction of

sprinkler lines and installation of control cables shall include excavation and
backfill compaction, the furnishing, installing and testing of pipework and
restoration of existing utilities and all other works in accordance with the plans
and specifications. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or required, all
pipework shall be installed with a minimum cover of 450mm over all mainline
pipework and 300mm over lateral pipework based on finished surface level.
Generally, piping under concrete or asphalt shall be installed by jacking,
boring or hydraulic driving. Where any cutting or breaking of pathways,
concrete and/or asphalt is required approval shall be obtained from those
having proper jurisdiction. Where piping is shown under paved areas, but
O-
Landscaped running parallel and adjacent to planted or turf areas, the intent of the drawing
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Pipework O 06.20.01
Areas is to install the piping in the planted or turf areas. Minimum cover under
Landscaping
roadways or paving shall be 600mm and pipe shall be bedded and covered
with sand to a minimum of 100mm above the pipe. The remainder shall be
backfilled with DBG20 crushed rock compacted to 100% standard dry density
and all road or path surfaces must be restored to its original condition.
Pressure pipes to be inserted within enveloper pies and have no joints within
enveloper section. Where conduits are required under roads, they shall be
installed as described in the above paragraph.
Plastic pipe shall be installed in a manner to provide for expansion and
contraction as recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with the
Australian Standard.
87

A Tracer Wire of polyethylene insulated 1.5 mm2 single strand copper is to be
buried with all pipework to facilitate future location.
(a) Rubber Ring Jointed Pipework:
All mainline pipework shall be thrust blocked in accordance with the
Australian Standards (or the guide inserted as appendix A in this
specification) at all changes of direction of the pipework, pipework junctions,
pressure regulation valves and isolation valves.
Installers must use the manufacturer’s lubricant and observe the witness
mark on the spigot end.
If pipes need to be cut the spigot end must be chamfered with a taper of
approximately 15 degrees and inserted into the socket end minus the rubber
ring and pushed home. A pencil mark should be made on the outside of the
spigot end in line with the socket mouth. A further bolder pencil mark should
be made after withdrawing the pipe 10mm. The pipe is then withdrawn and
the procedure below is to be followed:-
(i) Clean any dirt or grit from socket (particularly ring groove).
(ii) Insert rubber ring so it seats evenly.
(iii) Clean spigot back to witness mark and apply lubricant to chamfer. Do not
apply lubricant to rubber ring as this could cause misplacement when spigot
is inserted.
(iv) Align spigot and socket and push pipe home until witness mark is just
visible at socket mouth.
(b) Solvent Welded Pipework:

The following solvent cement types shall be used:
(i) Fast- For small diameters and cool conditions.
(ii) Medium - For general purpose and ambient temperatures below 30
O-
Landscaped degrees C.
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Pipework O 06.20.02
Areas (iii) Slow - For large diameter(200mm upwards) and hot conditions.
Landscaping
Joints made with fast or medium solvent should not be disturbed for 10
minutes or pressure tested for 24 hours. Joints made with slow solvent
should not be disturbed for 20 minutes or pressure tested for 30 hours.
Procedure:
(i) Ensure spigot end is cut square.
(ii) Mark spigot with pencil where socket mouth will end.
(iii) Clean and degrease both inside of socket and outside of spigot with
priming fluid.
(iv) Using a clean dry brush apply an even coat of solvent cement, first to the
socket, then to the spigot. Care should be taken to prevent ponding of
solvent cement at back of socket.
(v) The spigot should be quickly pushed into the socket squarely and held for
a few seconds.
(vi) Wipe off excess solvent cement.
(c) Butt welded and Electrofusion Pipework:

Australian Standards at all changes of direction of the pipework, pipework
junctions, pressure regulation valves and isolation valves.
(d) Thrust Blocks

Australian Standards at each change of direction of the pipework, pipework
junctions, pressure regulation valves and isolation valves.
Plastic sheeting must be placed between the fitting and the concrete to
simplify access to fittings in the event repair work is required in the future.
O-
Landscaped
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Pipework O 06.20.03 All irrigation pipework fittings and valve boxes to be lilac.
Areas
Landscaping
(a) 415 & 240 volts :

All 415 volt and 240 volt cable must be installed in underground conduit
strictly in accordance with the relevant Electrical Authority Code and
Australian Standards. All cable paths shall have indicator tape placed above
the cable 250mm below the surface level.
(b) 2-Wire Decoder Wire Path Cable :

The 2 wire cable shall be carefully installed alongside the mainline pipework
O-
Landscaped with expansion loops at each change of direction and at each point where
Architect Grounds & Irrigation Electrical Cables O 06.21
Areas decoders are to be installed. Adequate slack must be allowed along the
Landscaping
trench lines to prevent stressing the cables during the backfilling process.
(c) Decoder to valve or valve-in-head wiring shall be direct buried alongside

pipework and coiled at each solenoid valve or valve-in-head. All changes of
direction shall incorporate an expansion coil. Adequate slack must be allowed
along the trench lines to prevent stressing the cables during the backfilling
process.
Reduce the use of PVC materials. Use concrete, vitrified clay, HDPE, zinc,
P- Best Practice Guidelines for PVC in
Civil cast iron, copper, galvanised steel or aluminium as alternatives. Where PVC
Site General Design Principles P 01.01.01 the Built Environment - Verification
Engineer is used, it must be sourced in accordance with the GBCA's 'Best Practice
Infrastructure Guidance
Guidelines for PVC in the Built Environment - Verification Guidance'
The principles of water sensitive urban design (WSUD) must prevail for all
P-
Civil relevant works. Runoff to stormwater systems is to be minimised and designs
Site General Design Principles P 01.01.02
Engineer realised that reduce peak flows and reduce the risk of contamination of
Infrastructure
natural waterways.
88

P-
Civil Rainwater harvesting of roof area must be incorporated into any new building
Site General Design Principles P 01.01.03
Engineer or substantial redevelopment of a building (greater than 30% of UFA).
Infrastructure
P-
Civil - Stormwater drainage – 10 years
Site General Warranty Periods P 01.02
Engineer - Sewer drainage – 10 years
Infrastructure
- Other building waterproofing – 10 years
In-ground stormwater construction to be in accordance with the local city
council in which the campus is located, pipe material can be of the following
P- types:
Civil External Stormwater
Site Construction P 02.01.01 - reinforced concrete (RC),
Engineer Drainage
Infrastructure - fibre reinforced cement (FRC) or
- polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
- RC and FRC to be spigot and socket jointed. PVC to be solvent welded.
P-
Civil External Stormwater Where absolutely necessary, siphon drainage systems may only be used with
Site Construction P 02.01.02
Engineer Drainage prior approval by relevant Monash University BPD Planner.
Infrastructure
Where buried PVC pipework is greater than 2.5 m below finished surface,
side support and overlay must be inspected and approved before backfilling.
P-
Civil External Stormwater Pipe work strength class and installation must be in accordance with
Site Construction P 02.01.03
Engineer Drainage manufacturer’s requirements and to the relevant authorities’ standards.
Infrastructure
Stormwater pipe shall not pass under another building and is to be installed
with a trace wire.
P- Minimum pipe size to be 225 mm diameter. In all cases, piping to be
Site Piping Size P 02.02 designed to accommodate maximum foreseeable static and dynamic peak
Engineer Drainage
Infrastructure flows of appropriate runoff return periods.
P-
Civil External Stormwater Cast in situ or precast reinforced concrete with 200 mm deep silt sump below
Site Entry Pits P 02.03.01
Engineer Drainage lowest pipe invert and knockouts for pipe entries.
Infrastructure
P- Internal sizes to match cover and surround dimensions, make good pipe
Site Entry Pits P 02.03.02 connections with watertight 100 mm (min) thick epoxy concrete collar. Make
Engineer Drainage
Infrastructure connection with cover surround watertight using epoxy concrete or grout.
P- Grated pits located within hard pavements stands are to be flush with their
Site Entry Pits P 02.03.03 surroundings. Pavements must grade towards grates to promote proper
Engineer Drainage
Infrastructure drainage of the area.
Grated pits and lids located in garden beds must sit minimum 50 mm proud of
P-
Civil External Stormwater their surrounds to prevent general garden mulch and leaf litter from entering
Engineer Drainage pits. Garden beds must be shaped so that they grade towards pits and runoff
Infrastructure
can pond around the pits during periods of intense rainfall.
P-
Civil External Stormwater Downpipes to discharge over a 300 mm square grated pit with a 150 mm
Engineer Drainage wide concrete dished surround.
Infrastructure
Stormwater pit covers must be lightweight lockable fiberglass reinforced such
P- as Terra Firma manufacturer, or approved equivalent. Covers must be of
Site Entry Pits P 02.03.06 strength class suitable to their location. Strength class must consider all types
Engineer Drainage
Infrastructure of scenarios, including emergency vehicle access routes or heavy cleaning
equipment.
P- Identify pits classified as confined spaces, in accordance with Monash’s
Site Entry Pits P 02.03.07 standard labelling system. The Project Manager/ Coordinator will provide
Engineer Drainage
Infrastructure details.
P-
Civil External Stormwater Provide concrete junction or grated pit at all changes of direction for pipes
Engineer Drainage equal to or greater than 225 mm diameter.
Infrastructure
P- Sump and pumps for groundwater disposal to be located externally.
Site Sumps P 02.04.01 Potentially contaminated groundwater is to be pumped to sewer. Basements
Engineer Drainage
Infrastructure to be externally tanked.
P-
Site Swales P 02.04.02 Design swales in accordance with water sensitive urban design requirements.
Engineer Drainage
Infrastructure
P-
Civil External Stormwater Submersible pumps to be stainless steel. provide local level control and local
Site Pumps P 02.05
Engineer Drainage on/off control pnel connected to campus BAS
Infrastructure
A risk assessment including reliability of supply; water quality; requirements
for the end use and associated treatment requirements; collection, storage
and distribution issues must occur prior to detailed design activities. Water
treatment must be appropriate to both the incoming water quality and the end
P- use of the harvested water and include integrated water management
Civil External Stormwater Water Harvesting
Site P 02.06.01 principles. This risk assessment and detailed design should reference:
Engineer Drainage Systems
Infrastructure - National Water Quality Management Strategy Australian Guidelines for
Water Recycling: Managing Health and Environmental Risks (Phase 2)
Stormwater Harvesting and Reuse
- Review of the Regulatory Framework for Alternative Urban Water Supplies
November 2009, DSE & Dept of Health
Harvested water storage systems must:
- be designed for reliability and maintainability and metering included to
monitor the volume of water harvested and consumed as well as any potable
P- make-up water.
Civil External Stormwater Water Harvesting
Site P 02.06.02 - be sized to match both the available resource collection area and the
Engineer Drainage Systems
Infrastructure projected beneficial end use.
- include provision for interconnection to a campus-wide non-potable water
ring main and be installed with a trace wire above with suitable location of
isolation valves in valve boxes at regular intervals.
89

All stormwater lines are to be inspected with closed circuit television (CCTV)
prior to handover. CCTV footage is to be handed over as part of the as-built
P-
Civil External Stormwater Commissioning package. Stormwater lines are to be handed over free from debris or silt in
Site P 02.07
Engineer Drainage and Handover lines, it is the responsibility of the contractor to jet clean and vacuum truck
Infrastructure
any silt or debris from the constructed lines prior to handover, if deemed
necessary by a suitable Monash Project Manager/ Coordinator.
P- All sewer works to be designed and constructed in accordance with the
Hydraulic
Site External Sewer P 03 sewerage code of Australia WSA02-2002-2.3 Melbourne Retail Water
Engineer
Infrastructure Agencies Version 1.0.
Minimum pipe size of external sewer to be 150 mm diameter sewer quality
P- Piping Minimum
Hydraulic PVC class SN8 with rubber ring joints or of higher strength class depending
Site External Sewer Size and Strength P 03.01
Engineer on engineer’s calculations and site specific conditions. Sewer pipe must not
Infrastructure Class
pass under nearby or adjoining buildings.
P- Provide concrete junction sewer grade pits at all changes in direction or
Hydraulic
Site External Sewer Inspection Pits P 03.02.01 grade. Alternative smart sewer junctions may be installed with prior approval
Engineer
Infrastructure from a relevant Monash University Project Manager/ Coordinator.
P- All inspection chambers to be constructed and adequately backfilled and
Hydraulic
Site External Sewer Inspection Pits P 03.02.02 compacted in accordance with sewerage code of Australia WSA02-2002-2.3
Engineer
Infrastructure Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 1.0.
P- To be precast concrete arrester similar to C.I.& D c/w with heavy duty
Hydraulic Grease Arrester
Site External Sewer P 03.03.01 concrete lid with Gatic covers and frames . Coat all internal surfaces with acid
Engineer Pit
Infrastructure and alkaline resistant epoxy. Brace internally during backfilling operations.
P- Provide ground vent and duct vent as required. Take care to extend the duct
Hydraulic Grease Arrester
Site External Sewer P 03.03.02 vent up to a height to release gases away from habitable areas and prevent
Engineer Pit
Infrastructure offensive odours entering buildings.
P- Covers to be round cast iron and of appropriate strength class depending on
Hydraulic
Site External Sewer Covers P 03.04 location. Strength class must consider all types of scenarios, including
Engineer
Infrastructure emergency vehicle access routes or heavy cleaning equipment.
Purpose of pre-treatment to be identified and treatment system designed
P-
Hydraulic Treatment accordingly.
Site External Sewer P 03.05
Engineer Systems Show on the drawings the basis of design of pre-treatment pits and chemicals
Infrastructure
known to be discharged at the time of design.
P- Identify pits classified as confined spaces, in accordance with Monash’s
Hydraulic Labelling and
Site External Sewer P 03.06 standard labelling system. The Project Manager/ Coordinator will provide
Engineer Identification
Infrastructure details.
Pipe testing and commissioning is to be in accordance with sewerage code of
Australia WSA02-2002-2.3 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 1.0. All
sewer lines are to be inspected with closed circuit television (CCTV) prior to
P-
Hydraulic Pipe Testing and handover. CCTV footage is to be handed over as part of the as-built package.
Site External Sewer P 03.07
Engineer Commissioning Sewer lines are to be handed over free from debris or silt in lines, it is the
Infrastructure
responsibility of the contractor to jet clean and vacuum truck any debris or silt
from the constructed lines prior to handover, if deemed necessary by a
suitable Monash Project Manager/ Coordinator.
P- All pressurised water works to be designed and constructed in accordance
Hydraulic
Site External Potable Water P 04 with the water supply code of Australia WSA03-2011-3.1 Melbourne Retail
Engineer
Infrastructure Water Agencies Version 2.1
P-
Hydraulic Pipe size to be determined based on achieving satisfactory operating
Site External Potable Water Piping Size P 04.01
Engineer velocities, reduce stagnation and minimise system head losses.
Infrastructure
Pipe and fittings pressure class to be selected based on anticipated operating
P-
Hydraulic Piping Pressure pressures, and in accordance with the water supply code of Australia
Site External Potable Water P 04.02
Engineer Class WSA03-2011-3.1 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 2.0 and relevant
Infrastructure
Australian Standards.
All fittings to be compatible with the pipe material selected. Fittings must be a
P- strength class as determined by anticipated operating pressures, and in
Hydraulic
Site External Potable Water Fittings P 04.03 accordance with the water supply code of Australia WSA03-2011-3.1
Engineer
Infrastructure Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 2.0 and relevant Australian
Standards.
P- Install valves, surface boxes and fittings, including covers and surrounds, of
Hydraulic Valves, Surface
Site External Potable Water P 04.04 type, size and locations in accordance with the water supply code of Australia
Engineer Boxes and Fittings
Infrastructure WSA03-2011-3.1 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 2.0.
P- All external potable water pipelines constructed through open trench
Hydraulic
Site External Potable Water Detector Tape P 04.05 techniques are to have detectable tape with tracer wire installed above the
Engineer
Infrastructure first backfill layer above the pipework.
P-
Hydraulic
Site External Potable Water Scours P 04.06 All scours to discharge to the closest stormwater chamber.
Engineer
Infrastructure
P- Pipe testing and commissioning is to be in accordance with the water supply
Hydraulic
Site External Potable Water Pipe Testing P 04.07 code of Australia WSA03-2011-3.1 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version
Engineer
Infrastructure 2.0.
P-
Hydraulic External gas lines to be supplied and installed in accordance with the relevant
Site External Gas P 05
Engineer gas authority and Australian Standards.
Infrastructure
Pipework to suit test pressures of 500 kPa. Pipework materials to be Nylon,
P- polyethylene or copper, Denso or polyethylene sleeve copper pipes. Where
Hydraulic
Site External Gas Pipework P 05.01 open trenching techniques have been employed for non-copper pipes, then a
Engineer
Infrastructure detectable tape with tracer wire must be installed above the first backfill layer
above the pipework.
Provide wall-mounted manual shut-off valve at the point of entry to each
building. The valve is to be accessible and external to each building. Each
P-
Hydraulic branch or junction off a service main to a building is to also include an
Site External Gas Isolation Points P 05.02.01
Engineer isolation valve both upstream and downstream of the "T" junction, as well as
Infrastructure
the isolation valve on the "T". All valves are to be suitably protected and
accessible in a valve box.
90

A durable and permanent sign is to be provided in a prominent position
P-
Hydraulic adjacent to the valve and chained around the valve stem. The sign with black
Site External Gas Isolation Points P 05.02.02
Engineer lettering 25mm high on yellow background is to include the following wording:
Infrastructure
“GAS VALVE”.
P-
Hydraulic Below ground valves to be similar to 'Richards Spherical Ball Valves' and
Site External Gas Isolation Valves P 05.02.03
Engineer installed under a cast iron surface box.
Infrastructure
P-
Hydraulic Valves to be quarter turn ball type. Valves up to 50mm to be screwed; 65 mm
Site External Gas Isolation Valves P 05.02.04
Engineer and larger to be flanged.
Infrastructure
P- Provide surface markers at each change of direction or pipeline end. Markers
Hydraulic
Site External Gas Labelling P 05.03 to be directional arrows engraved on a brass plate, mounted on a concrete
Engineer
Infrastructure block or in concrete pavement and installed flush with the finished surface.
P-
Hydraulic Low and medium pressure regulators must be diaphragm type similar to
Site External Gas Regulators P 05.04.01
Engineer 'Jeavons'
Infrastructure
P-
Hydraulic On major supply systems, provide two full capacity regulator installations in
Site External Gas Regulators P 05.04.02
Engineer parallel so that supply to the building will be maintained during servicing.
Infrastructure
P- No by-passes to the regulators are permitted. Where supply is to continuous
Hydraulic
Site External Gas Regulators P 05.04.03 flow water heaters or Bunsen burners, provide additional step down regulator
Engineer
Infrastructure to 1.75 kPa.
P-
Hydraulic
Site External Gas Regulators P 05.04.04 Provide test point on the inlet and outlet.
Engineer
Infrastructure
Fire
P-
Protection & Above ground pipework inside and outside buildings must be hot dipped
Site External Fire Protection Pipework P 06.01.01
Hydraulic galvanised after fabrication.
Infrastructure
Engineer
Fire In-ground pipework must be ductile iron cement lined, welded steel, welded
P-
Protection & copper, welded HDPE or UPVC polyethylene. All pipework and fittings must
Site External Fire Protection Pipework P 06.01.02
Hydraulic conform to the Australian Standards. Ductile iron cement lined and uPVC
Infrastructure
Engineer pipelines must utilize rubber ring joints.
External pipework directly buried under concrete slab must have a minimum
Fire
P- cover depth of 75 mm from the underside of the concrete slab. Brass
Protection &
Site External Fire Protection Pipework P 06.01.03 engraved marker tile must be installed on concrete surface over alignment of
Hydraulic
Infrastructure fire pipework clearly stating “buried fire main directly under slab”. All non-
Engineer
metallic buried fire main is to incude a trace wire above the pipe.
Fire
P- All pipelines must be capable of withstanding working pressures of up to:
Protection &
Site External Fire Protection Pipework P 06.01.04 - 1400 kPa for non-boosted pipelines
Hydraulic
Infrastructure - 1700 kPa for boosted pipelines (Clayton)
Engineer
Booster pumps must meet the following conditions:
- Pumps must be and approved single and/or multi staged centrifugal pump
with close coupled TEFC, non-overloading, motor.
Fire - The pump must be of back pull out design and sized to allow for a 10%
P-
Protection & upgrading of the maximum impeller size.
Site External Fire Protection Booster Pumps P 06.02.01
Hydraulic - Pumps to incorporate dip wells and screwed outlets under the exposed ends
Infrastructure
Engineer of the glands. Copper drain pipework must run from each drip well to
discharge over the waste point.
- The base must be bolted via vibration isolating mounts to the 150mm high
concrete plinth.
Diesel engines must meet the following conditions:
- The pump set must be a proprietary manufactured fire booster pump
system, complete with control panel, safeties, starting system and fuel
storage.
Fire
P- - Must be multi cylinder, water cooled complete with fuel tank, starter motor,
Protection &
Site External Fire Protection Booster Pumps P 06.02.02 batteries (two sets), generator, voltage regulator and exhaust system.
Hydraulic
Infrastructure - The engine must be mechanically governed, have direct fuel injection and
Engineer
be continuously rated for 24 hours operation.
- The engine must be fitted with thermostatically controlled electric crankcase
or water jacket heaters to warm the engine for full load capabilities directly
after start up.
Fire
P- The pump must be electric low flow, high pressure jacking pump, complete
Protection &
Site External Fire Protection Booster Pumps P 06.02.03 with a self controlled cut in/out mechanism. The pump must draw water from
Hydraulic
Infrastructure towns mains supply.
Engineer
Static storage tanks must meet the following conditions:
- Water storage tanks must be constructed from prefabricated epoxy coated
steel.
Fire
P- - The tank must be constructed on site from hit dip galvanised High Tensile
Protection & Static Storage
Site External Fire Protection P 06.03 steel sectional plates. Side plates must be bolted together externally using
Hydraulic Tanks
Infrastructure galvanised or stainless steel bolts.
Engineer
- The tank must be internally braced as necessary to suit the application.
- A membrane of approved non corrosive insulating material must be installed
between the plinth and the bottom tank plates.
Booster connections and their location must be in accordance with the
Australian Standards and requirements of the local fire authority. Booster
must also meet the following conditions:
Fire
P- - The Booster connections must be provided with Storz couplings to suit.
Protection & Booster
Site External Fire Protection P 06.04 - Pressure gauges must be provided to indicate booster pressure.
Hydraulic Connections
Infrastructure - If the booster connections are enclosed, the enclosure must be suitable
Engineer
labelled externally.
- Block plan of the site, the installation, working and test pressure must be
provided within the enclosure.
91

Fire
P-
Protection &
Site External Fire Protection Hydrants P 06.05.01 External hydrants to be dual head standpipes complete with Storz couplings.
Hydraulic
Infrastructure
Engineer
Fire Provide isolating valve on branch line to permit landing valve servicing. Wrap
P-
Protection & pipe with Denso tape to isolate from concrete and install concrete anchor
Site External Fire Protection Hydrants P 06.05.02
Hydraulic block at tee and bend and provide 100 thick x 450 square concrete pad
Infrastructure
Engineer around standpipe. Top surface to be level with finished ground level.
Q-
BAS & The Building Automation System to be used on any project must be
Building
Mechanical Introduction General Q 01.01.01 confirmed by the Asset Planning Engineer - Mechanical Services at Project
Automation
Engineer Concept phase.
Systems
Any proposed refurbishment/upgrade works that are likely to impact on a
current BAS installation is to be discussed with and approved by the Campus
Q- BAS Coordinator and Asset Planning Engineer – Mechanical Services or the
BAS &
Building relevant campus Maintenance Manager. They must be consulted prior to any
Mechanical Introduction General Q 01.01.02
Automation (RFT) Request for Tender to ensure that the proposed works will comply with
Engineer
Systems the University’s BAS Strategy and will not compromise / conflict with an
existing BAS installation and the relevant building’s BAS migration/upgrade
plan.The same applies to the design and construction of any new building.
Q-
BAS & Any system proposed must have the ability to seamlessly integrate into the
Building General BAS BAS Front End
Mechanical Q 02.01.01 University’s approved front ends either Andover Continuum or Alerton
Automation Requirements Interface
Engineer Envision/Web Talk-or Tridium Niagara.
Systems
The BAS must have the ability for multiple users to access the system via a
web interface without the need for workstation licenses or dongles. At least 6
Q-
BAS & concurrent users must be able to access programming and at least 30
Building General BAS BAS Front End
Mechanical Q 02.01.02 operators via a web interface. The functionality and supplier’s technical
Automation Requirements Interface
Engineer capability of implementing and maintaining this interface must be
Systems
demonstrated and approved by the University’s BAS Coordinator before
issuing or commencing any work instruction.
Any system proposed must have a guaranteed and proven software and
Q-
BAS & firmware upgrade path to ensure that advances in BAS technology are
Building General BAS
Mechanical Upgrade Path Q 02.02 available well into the future. Any available software and firmware upgrades
Automation Requirements
Engineer to the system must be provided free of charge for two years from the date of
Systems
practical completion.
For any BAS design, consultants must provide comprehensive point
Q- schedules detailing point descriptions, locations, functions, types and any
BAS &
Building General BAS special requirements. Passing this responsibility to competing contractors Section Q: Appendix - Building
Mechanical Point Schedule Q 02.03
Automation Requirements when tendering is not acceptable as it is difficult to manage and compare Automation Systems - Item Q1
Engineer
Systems competing submissions and opens the door for interpretation. A typical point
schedule is described in Section Q: Appendix - Item Q1
Any new BAS installation must be connected to the University’s Ethernet IT
network. The University has developed a three tier BAS architecture, as
Q-
BAS & follows:
Mechanical BAS Networks Q 02.04.01 - Tier 1: Central server and databases
Engineer - Tier 2: BACnet/IP BAS router controllers, high level interfaces and other
Systems
third party router
- Tier 3: BACnet/MSTP University approved DDC controllers.
For new projects an IP address and associated configuration details will be
provided by the BAS Coordinator upon submission of the new BAS device
application. New data point requirements must be lodged with the project
Q-
BAS & Manager / Coordinator. Ethernet data points are provided either by the
Mechanical BAS Networks Q 02.04.02 University’s IT department or in some projects by the data installation
Engineer contractor. However in both cases, the data points patching process is
Systems
managed by the University’s IT department. The relevant BAS subnet details
are provided by the BAS Coordinator. All BACnet/MSTP tier cabling is the
responsibility of the BAS supplier.
Q-
BAS & To ensure systems operate at optimum speed and reliability with the ability
Mechanical BAS Networks Q 02.04.03 for expansion, the number of controllers on a network must not exceed 60
Engineer DDDc per MSTP network
Systems
All alarms, control programs and logging must be done on the associated
field controller within the local MSTP network, and must not rely on the
Q-
BAS & Monash Ethernet network to function. The Monash Ethernet network is to be
Mechanical BAS Networks Q 02.04.04 used to transfer data to the front end and database, for system monitoring
Engineer and storage and system interrogation and must not become congested due to
Systems
high unnecessary communications traffic flow. System functionality must not
rely on high level Ethernet communication.
Q-
BAS &
Building General BAS The proposed BAS network topology must be approved by the BAS
Mechanical BAS Networks Q 02.04.05
Automation Requirements Coordinator before the start of the physical installation.
Engineer
Systems
The following equipment must be connected to the BAS as a minimum
(where practicable):
- Mechanical equipment (chillers, boilers, fans, pumps, VSDs, AHU’s, FCU’s,
Q- VAV’s, VRV’s, etc.);
BAS &
Building General BAS - Electrical equipment (meters, power factor correction, UPS, etc.);
Mechanical BAS Networks Q 02.04.06
Automation Requirements - Lighting controls;
Engineer
Systems - Generator and ATS (status and alarms);
- Fire panel via high level interface;
- Research freezes
- Other special equipment.
92

The BAS must be capable of implementing Conservation Management
programs including:
- time programmed start/stop
- optimum start/stops
- supply air reset
- economy cycle
- lighting control where appropriate
- occupancy control
Q- - energy calculations
BAS &
Building General BAS Energy & Water - adjustable temperature dead band settings for heating and cooling set
Mechanical Q 02.05
Automation Requirements Conservation points in summer and winter
Engineer
Systems - Variable Speed Drives and CO2 sensors where appropriate.
- Adjustment of temperature bandwidths based on load and conditions.
- Optimum plant operation. For example, ventilation to lecture theatres being
controlled on air quality level. Occupancy sensors must be used.
- load shedding
- Any other monitored points which may assist in producing energy saving or
energy consumption statistics.
- water consumption
- Gas consumption.
Q- Spaces not used to a fixed time schedule must be fitted with approved motion
BAS & Occupancy
Building General BAS detectors, for example lecture theatres, teaching spaces, areas of infrequent
Mechanical Detector Q 02.06
Automation Requirements use. The motion detectors must be connected to the building’s BAS system
Engineer Requirements
Systems to control lighting and air conditioning in the affected areas.
Q-
BAS &
Building General BAS No combination or sequence of operations of the BAS relays must cause a
Mechanical Safety Q 02.07.01
Automation Requirements condition which is unsafe, unhealthy or liable to cause damage to equipment.
Engineer
Systems
Functionality which is essential for safe operation must be mechanically
Q- interlocked. Design consideration must be given to a controller failure, for
BAS &
Building General BAS example, fire / smoke mode of HVAC plant, dampers and fans. Heating hot
Mechanical Safety Q 02.07.02
Automation Requirements water (HHW) pumps must be fitted with mechanical run-on timers connected
Engineer
Systems to the boiler status or HHW temperature, rather than relying on the control
device to run the pump for a period of time after the boiler stops.
Q- The BAS system must use the BACnet standard logging object and have the
BAS &
Building General BAS ability to store logged data, including all input / output points, in memory on a
Mechanical Trend Logging Q 02.08.01
Automation Requirements long-term basis. Trend data must be easily retrievable for export to an Excel
Engineer
Systems spreadsheet.
Q- Each point must have individual time scales for system reporting. The time
BAS &
Building General BAS scale must be adjustable in one minute increments. It must also be possible
Mechanical Trend Logging Q 02.08.02
Automation Requirements to register the start/stop sequence of any selected plant using the trend log.
Engineer
Systems The system must have the facility for printing out any display log.
The system must be capable of logging all inputs and outputs on the system
Q-
BAS & without the need for additional hardware or memory at a later stage. The
Mechanical Trend Logging Q 02.08.03 intention is for all logging associated with a particular piece of equipment to
Engineer be undertaken within the same controller that is controlling that piece of
Systems
equipment.
All alarms will be generated by standard BACnet Standard compliant
enrolments and notifications. Alarms must be generated and report to a
specified BACnet Standard compliant Workstation or Workstations and the
Q-
BAS & alarm messages must be displayed on that Workstation or Workstations;
Mechanical BAS Alarms Q 02.09.01 simultaneously a SMS and an email must be generated where an urgent,
Engineer critical response is required. The BAS must prioritise alarm groups. Critical
Systems
areas must have fail-safe alarms in the event of power failure. Text within the
Enrolments will clearly define the object in alarm and the purpose of the
alarm.
The University is responsible for providing the required information for alarm
Q-
BAS & action requests, message descriptions and details for recipients of alarms
Mechanical BAS Alarms Q 02.09.02 and messages for coordination by the contractor for programming. The
Engineer contractor is responsible for providing and programming alarm signals in
Systems
coordination with the University’s nominated representative.
All BAS products must support BACnet alarming and must be able to
Q-
BAS & integrate alarms into a designated BACnet alarm viewing device that is
Mechanical BAS Alarms Q 02.09.03 currently being used at the time of installation (Continuum Alarm Viewer for
Engineer Andover Continuum and Alerton Envision and Tridium alarm viewer for
Systems
Niagara Framework based systems).
The system must be capable of alarming all inputs and outputs on the system
Q-
BAS & without the need for additional hardware or memory at a later stage. All alarm
Mechanical BAS Alarms Q 02.09.04 limits must be user adjustable on a user friendly graphical tool without the
Engineer need access BMS programs (i.e. filter and temperature alarm set points must
Systems
be adjustable from the BMS graphic).
The University has adopted the BACnet standard of communications protocol
Q-
BAS & BACnet Open and any new installation must be capable of a full and transparent interface.
Mechanical Communication Q 02.10.01 All configuration files, bindings, graphics, etc. must be able to be edited or
Engineer Protocol amended by the University or its appointed BAS Services Provider from the
Systems
main system BAS terminal or associated web interface.
Q-
BAS & BACnet Open
Building General BAS No system will be accepted that relies solely on locally connected or
Mechanical Communication Q 02.10.02
Automation Requirements proprietary software to interface with or make system program changes.
Engineer Protocol
Systems
Q-
BAS & BACnet Open Any software, protocols, passwords, dongles and training required to use,
Mechanical Communication Q 02.10.03 change or program the system must be provided to the University as part of
Engineer Protocol the completed system handover.
Systems
93

Q- BACnet MSTP network details and device instance address ranges are
BAS & BACnet Open
Building General BAS supplied by the BAS Administrator, this instruction must be strictly adhered to.
Automation Requirements Failure to adhere to assigned device instances could cause conflicts within
Engineer Protocol
Systems devise and could cause critical system malfunction.
Q-
BAS & BACnet Open Device naming standards must be followed, a guide to the standard can be
Building General BAS Section Q: Appendix - Building
Mechanical Communication Q 02.10.05 found in Section Q: Appendix - Item Q2 Building Automation Device Naming
Automation Requirements Automation Systems - Item Q2
Engineer Protocol Examples
Systems
Q-
BAS & BACnet Open
Building General BAS BBMD (BACnet broadcast management device) configuration/re-
Automation Requirements configuration must be strictly supervised by the BAS Coordinator.
Engineer Protocol
Systems
Q-
BAS & BACnet Open Newly introduced BACnet/IP level devices must be updated on the main BAS
Mechanical Communication Q 02.10.07 network diagnostic menu, and Critical alarms (fail safe) must be set up for
Engineer Protocol the device offline condition.
Systems
Q-
BAS & BACnet Open
Building General BAS ACnet devices from different manufacturer's must not be mixed in a single
Automation Requirements MSTP network
Engineer Protocol
Systems
Q-
BAS & BACnet Open
Building General BAS Accepted protocols are BACnet/IP and BACnet/MSTP. BACnet/Ethernet is
Automation Requirements not acceptable.
Engineer Protocol
Systems
Space or accessible return air temperature sensors must be fitted in as many
Q-
BAS & zones as are independently controlled by the heating/cooling system. In the
Building General BAS Temperature
Mechanical Q 02.11.01 case where a zone covers several rooms, sensors must be installed in each
Automation Requirements Monitor
Engineer “typical” area and the average temperature must be used to modulate the
Systems
heating/cooling valve.
Q-
BAS & A supply air duct temperature sensor must be fitted immediately after any
Building General BAS Temperature
Mechanical Q 02.11.02 heating/cooling coil, (before a humidifier), to provide the BAS with diagnostics
Automation Requirements Monitor
Engineer for valve operation/status feedback etc.
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building General BAS Temperature For economy cycle applications, mixed air and return air temperature sensors
Mechanical Q 02.11.03
Automation Requirements Monitor must be included before any heating/cooling coil.
Engineer
Systems
Status must be verified, for example, “Positive Feedback” status of fans and
pumps and actuator, etc must be provided. This must be achieved by using
Q-
BAS & application appropriate devices such as differential pressure switches,
Mechanical Status Monitor Q 02.12.01 pressure sensors, flow switches.
Engineer Status / fault via HLI must not be used as the only method to verify or alarm
Systems
the operation of a piece of equipment. This verification must be accompanied
by use of a low level input directly wired to the BMS controller.
Q- Sufficient statuses must be provided to the controller to allow the function of
BAS &
Building General BAS the system to be monitored and diagnosed. Where the BAS controls a chiller
Mechanical Status Monitor Q 02.12.02
Automation Requirements or a boiler, all other associated parameters such as status, alarm, water flow
Engineer
Systems and return temperatures, pump status, etc., shall be monitored.
Q-
BAS &
Building General BAS Fire panel status, indicating fire mode shutdown of the plant, must be
Mechanical Status Monitor Q 02.12.03
Automation Requirements provided to the controller as a status input.
Engineer
Systems
Any control of plant and equipment critical to the building operation, e.g.
Q- laboratory temperature and pressure conditions, must be connected directly
BAS &
Building General BAS to the BAS and not rely on a high level interface from third party equipment.
Mechanical Critical Equipment Q 02.13.01
Automation Requirements Single points of failure must be negated by either default conditions or
Engineer
Systems redundant equipment serving critical areas. Third party high level interfaces
are acceptable for monitoring only.
Q-
BAS & DDC controllers connected to critical systems/equipment must have an
Mechanical Critical Equipment Q 02.13.02 internal alarm flag to indicate it’s offline status. Disconnection of critical
Engineer equipment must raise a failsafe off-line alarm.
Systems
It is preferable for chiller and boiler operating temperature to be controllable
Q- externally via the BAS. This setting must be provided to the BAS controller,
BAS &
Building General BAS Set Point with appropriate safety measures mechanically incorporated. Where this is
Automation Requirements Adjustments not possible, boilers and chillers may be fitted with internal set points where
Engineer
Systems this is appropriate for the design and safe and efficient operation of the
device.
Occupants of a space must not be provided with the facility to vary the set
Q-
BAS & point but system Coordinator and maintenance department must have access
Building General BAS Set Point
Mechanical Q 02.14.02 to setpoints, time schedules, alarm configuration, logging and manual
Automation Requirements Adjustments
Engineer override of outputs. Dual setpoints to be utilised where possible for
Systems
summer/winter control.
Q-
BAS &
Building General BAS Mechanical Air Local temperature control should not be provided, unless controlled
Mechanical Q 02.15
Automation Requirements Delivery temperature space e.g. incubation room.
Engineer
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building General BAS Mechanical Ceiling Allow for local user control of ceiling/wall fans and consider linking to
Mechanical Q 02.16
Automation Requirements Fans occupancy detection sensors that are in place for lighting.
Engineer
Systems
94

Q- The Consulting Engineer must liaise with the nominated BAS Engineer,
BAS &
Building General BAS Project or Maintenance Manager from the University Facilities and Services
Mechanical Liaison Q 02.17
Automation Requirements Division, on BAS design, requirements and obtain information on the existing
Engineer
Systems BAS systems before commencing the initial design phase.
Q- All items of equipment associated with the BAS must be suitably identified
BAS &
Building General BAS with traffolyte labels. Control panels, field controllers, VAV boxes, valves,
Mechanical Labelling Q 02.18.01
Automation Requirements dampers, and sensors must be labelled with identification that matches the
Engineer
Systems relevant item programmed on the graphical interface.
Q- All works must be adequately documented so that every wire can be
BAS &
Building General BAS subsequently identified by wire number, colour code or termination frame
Mechanical Labelling Q 02.18.02
Automation Requirements location. All wires must be numbered individually, multi-core cables must be
Engineer
Systems terminated according to the standard colour code.
The BAS installation must be commissioned and fully operational at the
Q-
BAS & practical completion stage of the project. Commissioning procedures must be
Mechanical Commissioning Q 02.19.01 carried out at the end/field equipment device to verify correct operation of
Engineer equipment. Once completed, all alarms, system operation and interfaces
Systems
must be demonstrated fully to the satisfaction of the University.
Q- A commissioning process standard must be followed and proven to have
BAS &
Building General BAS been used, such as AIRAH’s Design Application Manual for Building
Mechanical Commissioning Q 02.19.02
Automation Requirements Management and Control Systems (DA28) or CIBSE Commissioning Code C:
Engineer
Systems Automatic Controls.
Q-
BAS & Any third party interfaces must be demonstrated to the University BAS
Mechanical Commissioning Q 02.19.03 Coordinator end to end, i.e. from end device though gateway to BAS
Engineer monitoring terminal to ensure full seamless integration with BAS.
Systems
Q-
BAS & All commissioning / test reports are to be included in the Operating and
Mechanical Commissioning Q 02.19.04 Maintenance Manual and provided to the BAS Coordinator, Facilities and
Engineer Services Division.
Systems
Once the system is fully operational and building occupied, full system tuning
Q-
BAS & must be conducted to ensure control loops are operating effectively,
Mechanical System Tuning Q 02.20.01 parameters and setpoints are tuned to improve performance of building
Engineer ensuring that no hunting is occurring and design conditions are achieved. All
Systems
settings and changes are to be documented.
Network tuning must also be provided to ensure that minimal traffic and data
Q-
BAS & transfer across IP and MSTP networks is achieved, in order to provide stable
Mechanical System Tuning Q 02.20.02 communications and prevent network interruption across a shared building
Engineer automation network. This relates to smart programming and the correct
Systems
configuration of points and change of value settings.
Q- As-Built Drawings,
BAS &
Building General BAS Operating & Full programming documentation and system manuals must be provided,
Automation Requirements Maintenance sufficient to allow full user modification and maintenance of the system.
Engineer
Systems Manuals
The Contractor must provide one (1) suitably bound hard copies and two (2)
soft copy of a comprehensive Operation and Maintenance Manual, covering
all aspects of the work of the contract, at the completion of the work. As a
minimum the manual must include the following:
- Index
- General description of the system.
- A complete set of “as installed” drawings, with a complete and correct
drawing schedule.
- Complete details of all component parts of the installation. Note: this must
include a list of the manufacturer's of all items of equipment and contacts for
service and spares.
BAS & - Operational descriptions and sequencing for all systems and equipment.
Building General BAS Operating &
Mechanical Q 02.21.02 - Comprehensive circuit / wiring diagrams for all equipment as relevant
Automation Requirements Maintenance
Engineer - Controller point schedules.
Systems Manuals
- List of available spare points by controller.
- Communications schematic drawings.
- Installation, Operating and Maintenance instructions for all items of
equipment provided under this contract.
- Commissioning reports for all equipment and details of the settings for all
such equipment.
- A detailed report on the set up and commissioning of the control systems.
- Commissioning and test results for all items.
- A set of normal operating and maintenance instructions for the major plant
items, in the form of simple, A4 size, sheets with “point by point” procedures
for normal starting, stopping and operation of the plant.
Q- As-Built Drawings, Schematic of BAS system showing controllers and the connections to
BAS &
Building General BAS Operating & Monash IT network, HLI interfaces for Modbus, lighting control system, 3rd
Automation Requirements Maintenance party BACnet devices, connections to paging & SMS, showing alarming to
Engineer
Systems Manuals terminals in boiler house and engineering and WEB connection.
BAS & Soft Copies of drawings and manuals must be in an editable format, e.g.
Building General BAS Operating &
Mechanical Q 02.21.04 AutoCAD, Visio, Word, to enable future changes and additions to be
Automation Requirements Maintenance
Engineer incorporated.
Systems Manuals
BAS &
Building General BAS Operating & Finalised soft copy of the total O&M manual package must be uploaded on
Automation Requirements Maintenance BAS server and linked on the relevant building front end main graphic menu.
Engineer
Systems Manuals
95

After completion and full system witnessing by the Consulting Engineer a final
Q-
BAS & system handover must be provided to the Monash University nominated
Mechanical System Handover Q 02.22.01 Project Manager / Coordinator. It is expected that the system will be fully
Engineer tested and functional at this time so that it is in a state to be accepted by the
Systems
University.
Q- If this is not the case the system will not be accepted and a defect list will be
BAS &
Building General BAS created and rectification managed by the Consulting Engineer. The system
Mechanical System Handover Q 02.22.02
Automation Requirements will not be deemed to be completed until handed over to the satisfaction of
Engineer
Systems Monash University Facilities and Services Division.
Q-
BAS & The specification must require the BAS Contractor to instruct relevant
Mechanical Training Q 02.23.01 University personnel and its nominated Contractors in the operation of the
Engineer system.
Systems
Q-
BAS & Training must be provided to allow the University staff to perform future
Mechanical Training Q 02.23.02 alterations and additions to the system without dependence upon the controls
Engineer supplier.
Systems
A training course must be conducted on site to enable operators to operate
the system on a day to day basis, understand the operation of the system,
and perform programming procedures including the following:
- View building control parameters such as setpoints, PID settings, time
Q- schedules, manual overrides and control strategies.
BAS &
Building General BAS - Acknowledge and alter alarm settings
Mechanical Training Q 02.23.03
Automation Requirements - Select and alter system programs and point settings
Engineer
Systems - Turn on and off controlled points manually
- Log trend data
- Create reports
- Identify and test field equipment including controllers, end devices
interfaces and communications.
Q-
BAS & The amount of training and number of attendees to be trained is project
Mechanical Training Q 02.23.04 specific and should be agreed with the University Facilities and Services
Engineer Maintenance Manager prior to completing and finalising tender documents.
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building General BAS On project completion, a further 1 day (or as appropriate) must be spent on-
Automation Requirements site, with specific training on the system as installed.
Engineer
Systems
Q- Six months into the Defects Liability Period, or at a time nominated by the
BAS &
Building General BAS University staff, a further 1 full day on site training must be provided if and
Automation Requirements when requested by the University. Such training must concentrate on higher
Engineer
Systems level functioning and control of the system.
All interfacing with control devices must conform to the following standards:
- Binary input: voltage-free contact
- Binary output: voltage-free contact
- Analogue input: 0 - 10V, 0 - 5V, 4 - 20 ma constant current, current device
sensor, resistance device sensor, voltage device sensor
Q-
BAS & - Analogue output: 0 - 10V, 4-20 ma
Building Hardware
Mechanical Input / Output Q 03.01 - Service meters (gas, water, electricity): smart meter for electricity, gas and
Engineer water consumption
Systems
- Control relays must operate at 24V AC.
- Transformers must be oversized to enable 30% future expansion.
Note: Other interfacing standards are only acceptable in unusual
circumstances, where sensors and devices conforming to the above
standards are not available.
Q- The field Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) must support the BACnet
BAS &
Building Hardware Direct Digital communications standard and have BTL certification. Must operate as a
Automation Requirements Controllers (DDC) completely independent stand-alone unit with all firmware and software to
Engineer
Systems maintain control on an independent basis.
The Controllers must receive various analogue and digital input signals and
Q-
BAS & consequently provide analogue and digital output signals to perform specific
Building Hardware Direct Digital
Mechanical Q 03.02.02 functions. It must have a range of standard software programs to suit all
Automation Requirements Controllers (DDC)
Engineer normal heating, ventilation and air-conditioning control and energy
Systems
management requirements.
Q-
BAS &
Building Hardware Direct Digital The Plant Controllers must be enclosed in panels of similar construction to
Automation Requirements Controllers (DDC) that specified for switchboards.
Engineer
Systems
The system must allow various controllers and sub-controllers to be
networked and have the flexibility to readily permit modifications and
additions of the control functions. Should one controller in a network fail, it
Q- must not affect the performance and functionality of any others. DDCs losing
BAS &
Building Hardware Direct Digital communication with either the peer DDCs or the relevant controller
Automation Requirements Controllers (DDC) router/master controller/global controller must not affect the system
Engineer
Systems functionality. Router level device losing BAC/IP level communication must not
affect the functionality of the system. This is to ensure the robustness and
also network communications traffic is reduced by selecting a controller with
the correct number of inputs and outputs for a specific application.
Q-
BAS & The input and output of a control loop must be on the same controller and not
Mechanical Q 03.02.05 rely on the communications network to function. E.g. pressure sensor input
Engineer and variable speed drive output signal must be on the same controller.
Systems
96

BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) must be used as plant field
Q-
BAS & controllers, capable of data sharing, alarm and event management,
Mechanical Q 03.02.06 scheduling, trending, and device and network management without the need
Engineer to rely on the building network controller for these functions. Any deviation to
Systems
this must be approved by the BAS Coordinator.
Q-
BAS &
Mechanical Q 03.02.07 Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC) are subject to approval.
Engineer
Systems
Q- A minimum of 10% spare capacity for expansion should be included for each
BAS &
Building Hardware Direct Digital type of hardware I/O point, at each main controller location and 30% free
Automation Requirements Controllers (DDC) space within each panel enclosure, i.e. switchboard / panel location not
Engineer
Systems necessarily every VAV and small point controller.
Q- The computer terminal interface must be a Microsoft Windows compatible PC
BAS & Front End and
Building Hardware with current Windows software and an LCD monitor. The specifications must
Mechanical Associated Q 03.03.01
Automation Requirements be confirmed with the Project Manager /Coordinator to ensure adherence to
Engineer Equipment
Systems the current University’s IT and BAS versions and standards.
Q-
BAS & Front End and The BAS server must provide access to web pages that must be accessed
Building Hardware
Mechanical Associated Q 03.03.02 locally using a web browser over an intranet, WAN, etc., with remote access
Engineer Equipment over the Internet.
Systems
The BAS software (client and server) must be an operating system and
hardware system that is able to run on the current and the last version of
Q-
BAS & Front End and Windows operating system. The intent of the thin-client architecture is to
Building Hardware
Mechanical Associated Q 03.03.03 provide the operator(s) complete access to the BAS system via a web
Engineer Equipment browser. The thin-client web browser Graphical User Interface (GUI) must be
Systems
a browser and operating system that is capable of supporting Microsoft
Explorer / Google Chrome/Mozilla Firefox Browsers.
The web browser GUI must provide a completely interactive user interface
dependant on adequate password access level and must offer the following
functionality as a minimum:
- Trending
Q-
BAS & Front End and - Scheduling
Building Hardware
Mechanical Associated Q 03.03.04 - Real time ’live’ Graphic Programs
Engineer Equipment - Tree Navigation
Systems
- Parameter change of properties
- Set point Adjustments
- Alarm/Event information
- Configuration of operators
Q- Temperature sensors must be resistance, voltage or current device types with
BAS &
Building Hardware Temperature ranges selected to suit particular applications and, having an error of no more
Automation Requirements Sensors than 0.3°C. In critical temperature controlled environments accuracy must be
Engineer
Systems no more than 0.1°C
Q-
BAS & Sensors must not require regular re-calibration and must be protected in a
Building Hardware Temperature
Mechanical Q 03.04.02 neat plastic or metal casing so that access to terminal strips and cabling can
Automation Requirements Sensors
Engineer easily be achieved by removal of a cover.
Systems
Q- Sensors must not normally be locally adjustable. Where two or more sensors
BAS &
Building Hardware Temperature are provided for one zone, an average signal must be used. Sensors must be
Automation Requirements Sensors mounted such that effects of radiation from heating / cooling sources (e.g.
Engineer
Systems direct sunlight, heat generating equipment, draughts, etc.) are minimised.
Q-
BAS & Humidity sensors must be suitable for the location and environment in which
Building Hardware
Mechanical Humidity Sensors Q 03.05.01 they are used including allowance for functions, cleaning, etc. which occur in
Engineer laboratory applications.
Systems
Humidity sensors must include the following features:
Q-
BAS & - Ultra fast response polymer capacitance type.
Building Hardware
Mechanical Humidity Sensors Q 03.05.02 - Not affected by condensation, fog, high humidity or contaminants.
Engineer - Accuracy of ± 3% or better and not require regular re-calibration.
Systems
- 0-5v or 0-10v output signal
Q-
BAS &
Building Hardware Pressure switches must have adjustable switching setpoints to suit the
Mechanical Pressure Switches Q 03.06.01
Automation Requirements application.
Engineer
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building Hardware Pressure switches must be sensitive enough (as low as 20 pa if necessary) to
Mechanical Pressure Switches Q 03.06.02
Automation Requirements ensure correct monitoring of small fans.
Engineer
Systems
Q-
BAS & All filters are to have a differential pressure sensor installed with sensing
Building Hardware Air Pressure
Mechanical Q 03.07.01 points both sides and the ability to run a dirty filter report and raise an alarm
Engineer to maintenance staff.
Systems
Q-
BAS & Pressure sensors must be selected with a range to suit the application, the
Building Hardware Air Pressure
Mechanical Q 03.07.02 mechanical contractor to advise of equipment pressure settings, e.g. dirty and
Engineer clean filter differential pressures.
Systems
97

Damper actuators must be controlled by an electrical signal, 0-10V DC,
capable of operating the dampers fully against the system pressure. For
critical applications dampers must incorporate spring return facility so that in
Q-
BAS & the event of power failure, they will ’fail safe’ in either the normally open or
Building Hardware
Mechanical Damper Actuators Q 03.08 normally closed position to suit the application. Mounting must be rigid
Engineer without distortion during operation. Linkages must be securely fixed to shafts
Systems
without the risk of slipping on the shaft. Operation to be confirmed through an
algorithm using actuator input (0-10V) and downstream change of
condition/status. Critical applications to include blade operated limit switches.
Valve actuators must have sufficient power to ensure tight sealing against
working pressure. Operating voltage must be 0-10V DC. Valve actuators
Q-
BAS & must be linear in operation fitted with a manual override such that, in the
Building Hardware
Mechanical Valve Actuators Q 03.09 event of a power failure, manual operation can be achieved. Visual indication
Engineer of the status of each valve must be provided. Operation to be confirmed
Systems
through an algorithm using actuator input (0-10V) and downstream change of
condition/status.
Control valves must be two or three way to suit application. Valves must be
Q-
BAS & linear of the equal percentage type and have a characterised plug. Ball and
Building Hardware
Mechanical Control Valves Q 03.10 rotary shoe valves are not acceptable. Operation to be confirmed through an
Engineer algorithm using actuator input (0-10V) and downstream change of
Systems
condition/status.
Q- Variable Speed Drives must be of the HVAC type incorporating fire interlock
BAS &
Building Hardware Variable Speed where required and IP 54 enclosure. Approved suppliers are Danfoss and
Automation Requirements Drives ABB. Any alternatives require approval from the University Maintenance
Engineer
Systems Manager. (Refer Section”I” HVAC).
Control of VSD’s can be either via a direct analogue input & associated
Q-
BAS & output connection on a BMS field controller or via a direct input into the VSD’s
Building Hardware Variable Speed
Mechanical Q 03.11.02 own PID control loop. must the latter operation be used, the VSD must be
Automation Requirements Drives
Engineer able to accept a control setpoint from the BMS via HLI. VSD’s HLI’s are only
Systems
acceptable for transfer of information must not be used to control the drive.
Q-
BAS & The wiring for data communication between sensors, controllers, valve and
Building Hardware
Mechanical Wiring Q 03.12.01 damper actuators must be shielded so as not to be susceptible to electrical or
Engineer magnetic interference.
Systems
Q- All works must be adequately documented so that every wire can be
BAS &
Building Hardware subsequently identified by wire number, colour code or termination frame
Mechanical Wiring Q 03.12.02
Automation Requirements location. All wires shall be numbered individually, multi-core cables shall be
Engineer
Systems terminated according to the standard colour code.
Q-
BAS &
Building Hardware All MSTP wiring must conform to BACnet standards in relation to termination
Automation Requirements and shielding.
Engineer
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building Hardware All MSTP wiring must be installed in accordance with BACnet wiring
Automation Requirements standards and must not contain star point segments.
Engineer
Systems
All MSTP network wiring must only contain controllers and field devices of the
same manufacturer, mixing of devices from different manufactures on a
Q-
BAS & single MSTP network is not allowed.
Building Hardware
Engineer This provides isolation between different manufactured devices on a MSTP
Systems
network level preventing common issues and incompatibilities that sometimes
arise between different vendors.
Q- Connection at the
BAS & Controls must be designed so that the equipment will work safely and without
Building Hardware Mechanical
Mechanical Q 03.13.01 risk to University staff or property in the event of a loss of power from the BAS
Automation Requirements Services
Engineer controller.
Systems Switchboard
BAS &
Building Hardware Mechanical Control cabling must be wired to mechanical switchboards and be terminated
Automation Requirements Services in terminal strips provided in each board.
Engineer
Systems Switchboard
All control wiring for enabling plant must pass through Auto-Manual-Off
Q- Connection at the switches, mounted on the Mechanical Services switchboard. These switches
BAS &
Building Hardware Mechanical must conform to the University's usage, and must be provided with indicator
Automation Requirements Services lamps as follows:
Engineer
Systems Switchboard RED: ALARM, or device in FAULT.
GREEN: Device switched ON (either manually or remotely).
In general, controllers must be segregated, but close to a Mechanical
Q- Connection at the Services Switchboard which must supply the necessary power to the
BAS &
Building Hardware Mechanical controllers. Note: all cabling passing through a mechanical services
Automation Requirements Services switchboard must conform to appropriate standards (e.g. 500V insulation),
Engineer
Systems Switchboard but the controller must be limited to extra low voltages (less than 35V), and
data cable must be rated accordingly.
BAS &
Building Hardware Mechanical Demonstrate that the power supply to the controllers is from the same supply
Automation Requirements Services as the plant that it is monitoring.
Engineer
Systems Switchboard
Q-
BAS & Uninterruptable The BAS is to be supported with an uninterruptable power supply (UPS)
Building Hardware
Mechanical Power Supply – Q 03.14.01 which must be capable of supporting all memory and clock for a minimum of
Engineer Essential Services 200 hours if the controller power supply is interrupted.
Systems
98

Q-
BAS & Uninterruptable To prevent serious damage to control equipment from power surges, RFI,
Building Hardware
Mechanical Power Supply – Q 03.14.02 electronically induced spikes, etc., suitable power quality protection must be
Engineer Essential Services provided.
Systems
Q-
BAS & Uninterruptable Each controller must have ample on-board RAM AND EPROM memory for
Building Hardware
Mechanical Power Supply – Q 03.14.03 program, data and processing purposes. Volatile memory must be battery
Engineer Essential Services backed and sustained for a minimum of 48 hours under power loss.
Systems
Q- Where essential equipment is controlled and alarms monitored by the BAS
BAS & Uninterruptable
Building Hardware then the applicable control system must be powered from the same essential
Mechanical Power Supply – Q 03.14.04
Automation Requirements services supply. Transition between mains power and generator power must
Engineer Essential Services
Systems be done smoothly via a properly arranged UPS system.
Q-
Building Hardware Mains power failure alarm, UPS failure alarm, Generator running alarms,
Automation Requirements Generator status mismatch alarm must be set in a fail safe manner.
Systems
Q-
Building Hardware Ethernet network racks and hubs where BMS field equipment is connected
Automation Requirements must be UPS backed up to ensure end-to-end alarm delivery.
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building Employ systems that measure temperature variations between internal air
Mechanical Software Requirements Set Points Q 04.01
Automation and external air to control the system.
Engineer
Systems
The BAS software must perform the following functions:

- Schedule start/stop
- Optimum start/stop
- Duty cycling
- Automatic temperature control
- Maximum demand control
- Control mode selection i.e. P, PI or PID
Q- - Calculation point
BAS &
Building - Lighting control
Mechanical Software Requirements Capabilities Q 04.02
Automation - Integration with scheduling programs (where applicable)
Engineer
Systems - Integration with metering devices
- Scanning and alarm processing
- Alarm functions (via SMS and email)
- Load shedding
- Temperature set point reset algorithm
- Graphics reporting
- Trend logging
- Global communication (including web functionality and remote access).
The BAS software must be easy to operate and to program. Operators must
be able to perform the following operations after a maximum of one day of
Q- training:
BAS &
Building - View building parameters;
Mechanical Software Requirements User Friendliness Q 04.03
Automation - Select relevant pages, systems and points;
Engineer
Systems - Acknowledge alarms;
- Turn on and off controlled points manually; and,
- Log trend data.
Where required, Graphics must be included for ease of system operation.
Graphical displays must comply with Monash University standards and must
include but will not be limited to:
- Chilled water plant schematic
- Heating hot water plant schematic
Q- - Energy and water consumption data
BAS &
Building - Tabular information where appropriate
Mechanical Software Requirements Graphical Displays Q 04.04.01
Automation - AHU & FCU Mechanical schematics
Engineer
Systems - Main Campus Menu to contain Buildings and Remote Sites
- Main Building Menu to contain submenus and standard navigation buttons
- Separate AHU ,FCU Menu to be easy navigated by level
- Floor Plans with room temperatures facing North in direction.
- AHU Page graphic to have link to easy reference serving equipment.
- AUTO Manual ON OFF sliders.
Graphics Standards including colours, symbols and links as per Monash
Q-
BAS & University standard, examples shown in Section Q: Appendix - Item Q3
Building Section Q: Appendix - Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Graphical Displays Q 04.04.02 Sample Monash University BAS Graphical Displays. Approval of format
Automation Automation Systems - Item Q3
Engineer proposed to be obtained by the Monash University BAS Coordinator before
Systems
implementation.
Points must be identified using the Monash University standard naming
convention as follows
- Campus
Q-
BAS & - Building Number / Name
Building Naming
Mechanical Software Requirements Q 04.05 - Location / Plant
Automation Convention
Engineer - Point / Device name
Systems
- Controllers must not be configured until the naming and numbering
convention has been approved by the Monash BAS Coordinator. A guide to
naming convention can be found in Appendix D of Design Document Q
99

If required, the system may need to be engineered using a commissioning
Q- dashboard. This is a basic graphic based format displaying values that will be
BAS &
Building Dashboard properly labelled any logically located. The purpose of this will be to aid in
Mechanical Software Requirements Q 04.06.01
Automation Displays project commissioning and the building of graphics in the chosen University
Engineer
Systems format. The requirement of either graphics or dashboard will be to the
discretion of the University BAS Coordinator.
Q- The Dashboard application must not be supplied from a third party where this
BAS &
Building Dashboard application is not compatible with BAS. The application must be either a part
Mechanical Software Requirements Q 04.06.02
Automation Displays of the BAS application package or a plugin that is fully compatible with the
Engineer
Systems BAS application. All Hardware devices must be BTL certified.
Any BAS installed on University properties must provide user interface
functions to responsible staff via the University’s computer network. This will
Q-
BAS & allow the relevant staff to:
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Communication Q 04.07.01 - Program remote controllers from the central BAS control room;
Automation
Engineer - Receive alarm messages, automatically process and convey them to the
Systems
Facilities and Services Division via the University's IT network; and,
- View live and historical trend data from the remote stations.
Within each of the particular networks, the controller must have the ability to
Q-
BAS & broadcast data, to transmit input/output points as global points onto the
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Communication Q 04.07.02 network for use by other controllers, which are able to capture data for
Automation
Engineer internal processing. If one controller fails, it must not affect the other
Systems
controllers’ performance.
Q-
BAS &
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Reporting Q 04.08.01 The BAS software must display live and trend data on demand.
Automation
Engineer
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building The software must allow the operator to select points, groups of points, and
Mechanical Software Requirements Reporting Q 04.08.02
Automation mechanical systems through user friendly graphics functionality.
Engineer
Systems
Reports must include:

- Current set points
- Measured values
- Equipment status,
Q-
BAS & - Metering and logging information
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Reporting Q 04.08.03 - Alarm history
Automation
Engineer - Equipment hours run times
Systems
- PID parameters
- Maintenance instructions
- Points disabled or manually overridden
- Out of hours operation
Q-
BAS &
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Reporting Q 04.08.04 The software must provide graphic pages for all relevant building functions.
Automation
Engineer
Systems
Q- The workstation software must automatically log and timestamp every
BAS &
Building operation that a user performs at a workstation, from logging on and off a
Mechanical Software Requirements Audit Trail Q 04.09
Automation workstation to changing a point value, modifying a program, manually
Engineer
Systems overriding an object, viewing a report, modifying a schedule etc.
The same user accounts must be used for the browser interface and for the
Q- operator workstations. Operators must not be forced to have separate
BAS &
Building passwords. All commands and user activity through the browser must be
Mechanical Software Requirements User Accounts Q 04.10
Automation recorded in the system‘s activity log which can be later searched and
Engineer
Systems retrieved by user, date or both. New user account creation must be strictly
through the BAS Coordinator.
The BAS must have the ability to store logged data both locally in the
Q- controller, (ie: B-AAC controller) and be sent to the nominated SQL database
BAS &
Building on the University’s server farm database, including all input/output points, for
Mechanical Software Requirements Trend Logging Q 04.11.01
Automation a minimum period of two years without manual data handling. Trend data
Engineer
Systems must be easily retrievable for export to Excel spread sheet. The BACnet
Standard approved Logging Object must be used for this.
Q- Each point must have individual time scales for system reporting. The time
BAS &
Building scale must be adjustable in one minute increments. The system must be
Automation capable of logging all inputs & outputs on the system without the need for
Engineer
Systems additional hardware /memory at a later stage.
Q-
BAS & It must also be possible to register the start/stop sequence of any selected
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Trend Logging Q 04.11.03 plant using the trend log, such as: main plant, floor/zone manager, services
Automation
Engineer settings, water temperatures, etc.
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building Trend logging functions must be easy to query, manipulate trend periods, and
Automation adjust from the same graphics page.
Engineer
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Trend Logging Q 04.11.05 The system must have the facility for printing out any display log.
Automation
Engineer
Systems
100

During commissioning the following logs must be configured and graphed as
a minimum, other points logged as required for project based on system
Q- criticality:
BAS &
Building - Sensors e.g. temperature and humidity – 15 minute intervals
Automation - Change of state of plant e.g. fans, pumps, chillers.
Engineer
Systems - Filter differential pressure – monthly
- Energy meters – 15 minute intervals
- Hours run of all main plant - monthly
Whenever abnormal conditions arise, alarms must be generated and the
Q- alarm messages must be displayed on a nominated Workstation / Terminal
BAS &
Building and have the capability to simultaneously generate SMS and email
Mechanical Software Requirements BAS Alarms Q 04.12.01
Automation messages, as appropriate to the application. When an alarm condition is
Engineer
Systems generated, the relevant computer terminals on the system must beep
continuously until the alarm is acknowledged or muted.
Alarm signals must be sorted and printed out at relevant printers with clear
action messages. Alarms to be prioritised by their importance, there are four
levels of alarms; critical, high, medium and low. These priorities are based on
risk, implications of failure and required response time and rectification times.
Priority 1 – Critical, serious implications, instant response time expected.

Critical areas must have fail-safe alarms in the event of power failure.
Examples are fire alarm, emergency eyewash activation, power failure in a
building, transfer switch operation, generator running, generator failure, chiller
or boiler failure on a building that must have closely controlled temperatures
such as IT the Data Centre, research laboratories, critical equipment and
storage. Alarm to be sent via SMS to site ESO and appear on ESO alarm
page. This alarm must associate with the relevant controller off line alarm as
well RED.
Priority 2 – High, very important, could develop into a critical alarm if not
rectified within the four hour response time expected. Must identify fault and
Q- take appropriate action to get rectified urgently. Examples Constant
BAS &
Building temperature rooms, Laboratory equipment , -80’C freezers, steam supply
Automation failure for sterilizer & washer equipment, temperature or humidity issues for
Engineer
Systems animal research areas, room pressures not being maintained (i.e. NANO
clean rooms, DHW temperature failure, central plant failure not defined as
critical, sump pump high alarm. Chilled water temperature alarm, condenser
water alarm, SMS to ESO and appear on ESO alarm page ORANGE.
Priority 3 – Medium, important, a five day rectification time expected. Must

identify fault and take appropriate action to get rectified within this time.
Examples are main plant failure on a non-critical building such as teaching or
administration buildings. Alarm mismatch associated with fan run and fan
status mismatch. appear on ESO alarm page only BLUE.
Priority 4 – Low, information only, a fourteen day response time expected.

Must identify fault and take appropriate action to get rectified within this time
period are dirty filters, fan or pump failed where a standby / reserve unit is
available and has been initiated. Hours run alarms for maintenance. appear
on ESO alarm page only BLACK.
Return to normal GREEN.

Q- Energy and water Alarm: The energy alarm category is to alert University’s
BAS &
Building Engineering & Sustainability department that a system has exceeded the
Automation expected KPIs in terms of energy and water usage. These will be delivered to
Engineer
Systems a nominated workstation or a user profile.
The system must be capable of alarming all inputs & outputs on the system
Q-
BAS & without the need for additional hardware /memory at a later stage. All alarm
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements BAS Alarms Q 04.12.04 limits must be user adjustable without the need access BMS programs (i.e.
Automation
Engineer filter and temperature alarm setpoints must be adjustable from the BMS
Systems
graphic.)
As a minimum the following alarms must be setup at the time of
commissioning:
- Each temperature sensor must set up with alarm information, (Monash will
advise on the initial set point i.e. in many instances this may be set to > 99’c
this enables flexibility later must an alarm be required).
Q-
BAS & - Mismatch alarms for fan/pump status as follows a) if fan is stopped and
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements BAS Alarms Q 04.12.05 time schedule is on and b) if the fan is running and the time schedule is off.
Automation
Engineer - Differential pressure alarms for filters, chilled water and heating hot water
Systems
systems.
- Mismatch alarms for chiller system, a) chiller is enabled and there is no
current draw, alternatively b) there is chiller current draw and the chiller has
not been enabled by the BMS.
- Hours run alarms for all monitored equipment.
Q-
BAS & Utility monitoring data must be exported real time to a SQL database so that it
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Utilities Monitoring Q 04.13 can be imported by 3rd party monitoring software the analysis and monitoring
Automation
Engineer aspects.
Systems
Q- All BAS and Sub-controllers must have the ability to synchronise with the
BAS &
Building Time university’s central BAS time and must be the same throughout the various
Mechanical Software Requirements Q 04.14
Automation Synchronisation campus Building Automation Systems. This is required for accurate alarming
Engineer
Systems and logging.
Q-
BAS & Meters must communicate (via an appropriate BTL listed controller router)
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.01 with the existing University BAS systems via native BACnet/IP. The controller
Automation
Engineer router must utilise the university’s Ethernet network.
Systems
101

Q-
BAS &
Building Any devices communicating over the University’s ethernet network must only
Mechanical Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.02
Automation communicate via BACnet/IP.
Engineer
Systems
Q-
BAS & New meters must have the flexibility to be updated on any of the university’s
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.03 BAS systems (Andover, Alerton, Tridium), using a university appointed BAS
Automation
Engineer service contractor.
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building Metering networks must be connected to BAS via a dedicated controller
Automation router, and must not be shared with other building controls such as HVAC.
Engineer
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building Electricity meters must be connected by High Level Modbus or BACnet
Automation outputs.
Engineer
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building Fluid meter (Gas, water, flow and temperature) must provide pulse low level
Automation interface.
Engineer
Systems
Device names and metering values must be named using the Monash
Q-
BAS & University standard naming convention: Campus, Building Number/Name,
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.07 Location/Plant, Point/Device name, all BACnet points must follow the
Automation
Engineer University’s BAS naming conventions as described in the University BAS
Systems
standards.
Trend logs and graphics must be setup for all new metering. Meter reporting
must be capable of reporting all meters types on a single graph i.e. electricity
Q- meter vs gas meter vs water meter. Reporting must be able to display meter
BAS &
Building trend logs vs plant trend logs. i.e. mechanical meter vs VSD speed.
Automation Reporting must be able to display at least 5 trend logs on the same graph
Engineer
Systems with each trend log assigned a selectable colour and graph scale. Unlimited
time period must also be selectable. Graphs and reporting to be user
configurable.
Q-
BAS & At least 30 days of data must be stored at local controller router level, with
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.09 extended logging exported to an open SQL database, providing at least 2
Automation
Engineer years FIFO. Using maximum 15 minute intervals of logged values.
Systems
Q-
BAS & Following installation all meters must be empirically calibrated and all relevant
Building
Mechanical Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.10 measurements including CT ratios, kWh/pulse and meter programs forwarded
Automation
Engineer to the university BAS Coordinator.
Systems
Q-
BAS &
Building Single line diagrams of the installed metering network must be generated and
Automation forwarded to university BAS Coordinator.
Engineer
Systems
Where building energy display screens are required, a scrolling display must
Q- be provided. 4 pages displaying live building electricity, gas and water
BAS &
Building consumption and a page highlighting environmental initiatives such as rain
Automation water harvesting. Each page must compare current period to an older period
Engineer
Systems i.e. this week's consumption vs last week's consumption and/or this month's
consumption compared to last month's consumption.
The building security concept must be established during the early stages of Monash University Access Control
a project. The Design Team must develop a complete security system design (Electronic) Policy
relevant to the project. The Project Architect must consult with the Project
Manager and the Security Systems Manager on security issues affecting a Monash University Access to
Electrical R- project at the design stage to ensure minimum security department requisites Controlled Areas Policy
General R 01
Engineer Security are covered. Related Security policies include the Monash University:
- Access Control (Electronic) Policy Monash University Security Closed
- Access to Controlled Areas Policy Circuit Television (CCTV) Policy
- Security Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Policy
- Key Policy Monash University Key Policy
The following is a general list of functions of particular concern that require
security consideration:
- Store rooms containing radioactive material or dangerous chemicals
- Computer laboratories, with 24-hour access
- Study areas, with 24-hour acess
- Animal houses
- Lecture theatres
Electrical R- - Areas of substantial intellectual or monetary value (e.g. computer software
General Design Principles R 01.01.01
Engineer Security design, saleable medical research etc.)
- Places handling substantial quantities of money
- Areas in which critical administrative functions are carried out (e.g. office of
The Vice Chancellor, Information Technology Services)
- General administration offices.
- Sensitive waste storage
- Carparks
- Lifts
102

Design principles relevant to security to be included:
- Incorporation of disabled electronic access control facilities into the design
(i.e. to select the most suitable bi-parting electrically operated doors);
- Passenger lift control functions;
Electrical R-
General Design Principles R 01.01.02 - Design of the shell of the building;
Engineer Security
- Design of internal User areas;
- Security of accessible low-level windows etc.
- Combining all high-security functions to one area of a building;
- External lighting design
CCTV must meet the specifications outlined in Section R: Appendix - Security
Electrical R- Closed Circuit Section R: Appendix - Security -
General R 01.02 - Item R1. The University Security Systems Manager must be contacted to
Engineer Security Television (CCTV) Item R1
ensure specification included is the most up to date.
The Tecom (Now Interlogix) V10 Challenger intruder detection and building
Electrical R- Electronic Security
R 02 access control system must be specified for electronic security intruder
Engineer Security Systems
detection and access control to University buildings.
The microprocessor based control unit must be a fully redundant system (that
Electrical R-
Building Access Control Design Criteria R 03.01.01 must remain in operation if the FORCEFIELD network is offline) with a
Engineer Security
distributed processing network topology.
Whilst operating, the system must grant or deny access through a door to a
Electrical R-
Building Access Control Design Criteria R 03.01.02 cardholder based on the presentation of a properly encoded card to an
Engineer Security
authorised card reader at a valid time of day, day of week and card status.
Each individual card transaction, both through entry or egress card readers,
Electrical R-
Building Access Control Design Criteria R 03.01.03 must log as a separate identity at each door, i.e. entry shall be distinguishable
Engineer Security
from egress at the same door.
Electrical R-
Building Access Control Design Criteria R 03.01.04 The system must be wired on a dedicated security local area network (LAN).
Engineer Security
Battery backup must be provided to maintain all memory and the real time
Electrical R-
Building Access Control Design Criteria R 03.01.05 clock calendar for not less than 12 hours should mains power fail. The battery
Engineer Security
must be automatically recharged when mains power is applied.
Challenger Management software must be programmed by the Security
Electrical R- Contractor to control the functions of the various devices, maintain the
Building Access Control Design Criteria R 03.01.06
Engineer Security database, and control access through all doors equipped with card readers
and exit doors.
In general, electronic security must be installed by a specialist University
Electrical R-
Building Access Control Installation R 03.02.01 approved Security Contractor who is FORCEFIELD accredited. See
Engineer Security
Requirement R1.5
Electrical R- The University prefers that the Security Contractor must be a direct
Building Access Control Installation R 03.02.02
Engineer Security subcontractor to the Builder - not to the Electrical Contractor.
Electronic security must be installed by a specialist University approved

Security Contractor, as determined by the University Security Systems
Manager. Approved Security Contractors include:
ADR Security Solutions

52 Roseman Rd
Chirnside Park
Ph: 03 9777 0050
Chubb Electronic Security

Business Development Executive
87 Racecourse Road
North Melbourne
Ph. 9241 5708
Electrical R-
Building Access Control Installation R 03.02.03
Engineer Security Diebold Security
12 International Square
Tullamarine 3043
Ph. 8318 4000
ACES (Access Controlled Engineering Systems)

Mr. Brett Saxon
51 Grove Street
Eltham
Ph. 0418 557 052
SNP Security
3/297 Ingles St
Port Melbourne
Ph. 9647 9200
Electrical R- The specification must require the major Security Contractor to instruct
System Training R 04
Engineer Security University personnel in the operation of the system.
As Built Drawings,
Electrical R- As-built drawings, operating and maintenance manuals are to be provided by
Operation & R 05
Engineer Security the contractor. (Electronic Copy)
Maintenance Manuals
The Security Contractor is to ensure that the security system is completed

and commissioned prior to practical completion. This process should not be
Electrical R-
Notice of Completion Commissioning R 06.01 considered complete until the Security Systems Manager, or his/her
Engineer Security
designate, has signed off that he/she is satisfied with the installed system and
it is ready to operate.
103

The Consultant must be responsible for the witnessing of testing and final
acceptance certification of the completed installation. On satisfactory
Electrical R- completion of the project the Consultant must forward a completed Notice Of Section R: Appendix - Security -
Notice of Completion Witness Testing R 06.02
Engineer Security Completion formand Alarm Verification Record (Section R: Appendix - Item R2
Security - Item R2) to the University Project Manager/Coordinator and the
Security Systems Manager.
Electrical R- The main external entrance to a building must be well lit after dark. External
Peripheral Security External Lighting R 07.01.01
Engineer Security lighting must be controlled by a photoelectric cell not by a time clock.
Where it is intended to install digital recording CCTV cameras, the location or
Electrical R-
Peripheral Security External Lighting R 07.01.02 placement of light fittings are more critical. The security lighting from the
Engineer Security
building must extend to the appropriate Campus Security Light Corridor.
Perimeter doors and other ground level points of potential access must be
Electrical R-
Peripheral Security External Lighting R 07.01.03 well illuminated by security lighting after dark as per the Australian Standards
Engineer Security
(AS/NZS 1158.3.1).
Electrical R- In principle, all people entering and leaving a building must pass through the
Peripheral Security Building Facade R 07.02
Engineer Security same access point. If possible, public access must be limited to one door.
Where double doors are installed, the inactive leaf must be secured with a
lockable Orb panic bolt of no less than 300 mm on the bottom of the door and
a Dalco panic bolt no less than 400 mm on the top of the door. Alternatively
Electrical R-
Peripheral Security Main Entry Doors R 07.03 another Orb lockable panic bolt could be installed at the top of the door no
Engineer Security
less than 500 mm in length, keyed to the external master key system. The
Consultant must arrange for the University Locksmith to install the correct
cylinder prior to installation.
Type A door (full access control) must have the following hardware/features:
- Entry: Proximity card reader installed on the unsecured side of the door
- Egress: Proximity card reader installed on the secured side of the door
- Break glass door release unit on all auto doors.
- Electric door strike, electric mortice lock or magnetic lock
Electrical R- Type A Door (Full
Peripheral Security R 07.04 - Local door alarm sounder (for DOTL and Forced Door alarms)
Engineer Security Access Control)
- Reed switch door monitoring
- Orb lockable deadbolt on fixed leaf (where applicable)
- Ad! Or other University approved Blocker plate installed (where applicable)
- Electric Strikes to be used unless there is a specific requirement to use
Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks.
Type B Door (Partial Access Control) must have the following
hardware/features:
- Entry: Proximity card reader installed on the unsecured side of the door
- Egress: Utilise micro switch in door lock. Electric door strike, electric mortice
lock or magnetic lock or door furniture on the secure side to be free handle
egress
Type B Door
Electrical R- - Electric Strikes to be used unless there is a specific requirement to use
Peripheral Security (Partial Access R 07.05
Engineer Security Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks.
Control)
- Break glass door release unit on all auto doors.
- Local door alarm sounder (for DOTL and forced door alarms) only if
requested or replacing existing.
- Reed switch door monitoring Orb lockable deadbolt for fixed door leaf
(where applicable)
- Ad! Or other University approved Blocker plate installed (where applicable)
Type C Door (Controlled/Monitored) must have the following
hardware/features:
- Local door alarm sounder (for DOTL and forced door alarms) only if
Type C Door requested or replacing existing.
Electrical R-
Peripheral Security (Controlled/Monito R 07.06.01 - Break glass door release unit, not required if free handle to exit
Engineer Security
red) - Reed switch door monitoring
- Orb lockable deadbolt for fixed door leaf (where applicable)
- ADI or other University approved Blocker plate installed (where applicable)
Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks.
Type C Door Each access controlled, controlled/monitored door must have a unique
Electrical R-
Peripheral Security (Controlled/Monito R 07.06.02 address in the system, which must allow separate programming and control
Engineer Security
red) of the door
Type C Door
Electrical R- The function of arming/disarming all doors must be carried out individually via
Peripheral Security (Controlled/Monito R 07.06.03
Engineer Security time zones.
red)
Type C Door
Electrical R-
Peripheral Security (Controlled/Monito R 07.06.04 All doors must be individually monitored for alarms.
Engineer Security
red)
Type C Door
Electrical R- All Full and Partial Access Controlled doors must be controlled by Tecom
Engineer Security (Interlogix) Intelligent 4-door controllers.
red)
Type C Door
Electrical R- Entry/Egress card transactions at each door must log as separate individual
Engineer Security items in the security system.
red)
Type C Door Electric Strikes to be used unless there is a specific requirement to use
Electrical R-
Peripheral Security (Controlled/Monito R 07.06.07 Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks. University Security Systems
Engineer Security
red) Manager will need to approve non Electric Strike Doors
Type C Door All Access Controlled/Monitored Doors must be cabled such that a future
Electrical R-
Peripheral Security (Controlled/Monito R 07.06.08 upgrade to a type B door must not require any cabling between the "intelligent
Engineer Security
red) 4-door Controller" and the future Egress Proximity card reader.
104

Type D Door (24 Hour emergency exit door) must have the following
hardware/features:
- Local door alarm sounder (for DOTL and forced door alarms). Orb lockable
dead bolt for fixed leaf (where applicable)
- No external door furniture;
Type D Door (24
Electrical R- - Electric Strikes to be used unless there is a specific requirement to use
Peripheral Security Hour emergency R 07.07
Engineer Security Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks. University Security Systems
exit door)
Manager will need to approve non Electric Strike Doors
- All door furniture must allow for "hands free" operation;
- Reed switch door monitoring
- Doors must be hung to open out;
- Custom signage
- Ad! Or other University approved Blocker plate installed (Where Applicable)
Type E Door (Monitored Door) must have the following hardware/features:
- Break glass door release unit (where applicable)
- Local door alarm sounder
Electrical R- Type E Door
Peripheral Security R 07.08.01 - Reed switch door monitoring
Engineer Security (Monitored Door)
- AD! Or other University approved Blocker plate installed (Where Applicable)
Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks. University Security Systems
Manager will need to approve non Electric Strike Doors
Each 24-hour emergency door must have a unique address in the security
Electrical R- Type E Door system, which must allow separate monitoring, programming and control of
Peripheral Security R 07.08.02
Engineer Security (Monitored Door) the door. The status of each individual door must be displayed on the main
system computer.
Electrical R- Type E Door
Peripheral Security R 07.08.03 Entry/egress through these doors must be restricted at all times.
Engineer Security (Monitored Door)
The selection of the correct door actuator is vital. Where electronic access
Electrical R- Electro-
Peripheral Security R 07.09.01 control is installed, the system must be programmed to lock/open the main
Engineer Security Mechanical Doors
entry doors on the basis of a User defined time schedule.
Electrical R- Electro-
Peripheral Security R 07.09.02 Proximity card readers must allow access outside normal business hours.
Engineer Security Mechanical Doors
The door actuator must provide:
- 240 volt operator
- Constant rated 5 kg torque capacitor start and run squirrel cage motor.
- Continuously rated motor
- Self-lubricating planetary gearbox with spiral bevel drive
- Microprocessor control with a programmable feature that incorporates solid
state switching of the motor.
- The microprocessor must have a non-volatile memory, which remains intact
during a power failure.
- Automatic reversing if obstructed during closing sequence with fully
adjustable sensitivity setting.
- Automatic stop and retry after adjustable delay if obstructed during opening
sequence.
- Safety "creep" speed facility allowing doors to reduce speed before reaching
location of previously detected obstruction.
Electrical R- Door Actuator - Chain drive with average tensile strength of 1950 kg.
Engineer Security Criteria - Dual sets of safety PE beams
- Audible alarm at the door (for DOTL and forced door alarms)
- Battery backup for a minimum of 50 operations in the event of mains power
failure.
- In the event of an electrical power failure, the battery backup system would
keep the doors locked and secure.
- The ability to physically monitor the doors when open and closed
- Installation of a separate electric lock or rotor lock
- The ability to monitor the status of the electric lock;
- Fail safe mode
- Entry radar detector
- Exit radar detector
- K2 two position spring return key switch keyed to the building master key
system (IN)
- K4 four position key switch (auto/exit/open/locked) keyed to the building
master key system (OUT)
The Consultant must arrange for the University Locksmith to install the
Electrical R- Door Actuator correct cylinder in the K2 (IN) & K4 (OUT) key switches prior to installation. At
Engineer Security Criteria Clayton Campus all external doors are fitted with the designated Lockwood
Twin profile cylinder units.
Electrical R- Door Actuator The inverter system must allow 50 cycles of the door under a power failure
Engineer Security Criteria condition.
The door operator must provide separate individual alarms to the Forcefield
Security Management System and CAMS - Alarm Monitoring System when:
- There is a 240 volt power failure at the door
- Low battery voltage is detected at the door
Electrical R- Door Actuator - There is a fault with the battery charger
Engineer Security Criteria - All alarms must simultaneously communicate direct to the University
Security Control Room and appear on the. CAMS - Alarm Monitoring System
- All alarms are to duel report to both the Forcefield and CAMS systems
- Data network connection to provide Communication on the University
network
The University is equipped with a TECOM (GE) based intrusion alarm
Electrical R- Electronic Intrusion
R 08 system. The system is monitored from the Security Control Room (Building
Engineer Security Alarm System
61).
105

The majority of Challenger panels are connected to security network via
Communication digital dialler and are fully monitored. All Challenger panels should be
Mode with R 08.01.01 programmed to have a daily test signal to the CAMS - Alarm Monitoring
Network Master System. A CAMS Central Station software package controls the Network
Master database.
Communication
Electrical R- Electronic Intrusion The TS 0898 TCP/IP computer interface must be used on all new projects
Mode with R 08.01.02
Engineer Security Alarm System and must be programmed for event driven data transfer.
Network Master
Communication
Electrical R- Electronic Intrusion All challenger RAS must be the eight area TS 080/ unless specified by the
Mode with R 08.01.03
Engineer Security Alarm System University Project Manager or the Security Systems Manager.
Network Master
Electrical R- Electronic Intrusion After Hours Alarm Alarms must simultaneously communicate direct to the Central Control, alarm
R 08.02.01
Engineer Security Alarm System Notification locally at each door and have the ability to print out to a networked printer.
Electrical R- Electronic Intrusion After Hours Alarm

R 08.02.02 All alarms must be a minimum of four-state.
Engineer Security Alarm System Notification
The Consultant/Project manager must arrange for an Austel Licenced

Electrical R- Electronic Intrusion Contractor to install a mode 3-telephone socket adjacent to the challenger
Alarm Line R 08.03.01
Engineer Security Alarm System panel and connect into the university telephone network to facilitate dialler
monitoring on CAMS.
The Consultant/Project Manager must also arrange for an Austel Licenced
Contractor to install a data point adjacent to the Challenger Panel to facilitate
Alarm Line R 08.03.02 connection back to the Forcefield Headend via the University's data network.
Note: It is also required to liaise with the I.T.S Department for all network
connection and advice.
Security intruder detection systems must be fully supported by battery backup
Electrical R- Electronic Intrusion for a minimum period of 12 hours, should normal mains power fail to a
Battery Back-Up R 08.04
Engineer Security Alarm System satellite alarm panel. The Forcefield system must be programmed for weekly
auto battery check.
Padde ES2000/ES9000 Electric Strike
Electric door strikes must be specified as PADDE ES 2000 complete with
dead-latch facility or other University-approved. Door guards must be
specified to prevent tampering with Padde electric strikes. Each door strike
Door Strikes,
Electrical R- Security Equipment must be complete with:
Electric Locks, and R 09.01.01
Engineer Security (Hardware) - Keeper security status monitoring (i.e.: wired for both N/O & N/C)
Magnetic Locks
- Door lock tongue monitoring (i.e.: wired for both N/O & N/C) Each Padde
strike must be configured for fail-safe mode.
- Electric Strikes to be used as the preferred Electronic Hardware unless a
Strike cannot be installed due to unsuitable door/door frame structure.
Electric mortice dead latches must be specified as LOCKWOOD 357.:
1AM2R/L--SC or other University-approved keyed to the University Master
Door Strikes,
Electrical R- Security Equipment key system. (Please note that the Lockwood deadlatch is not suitable for all
Engineer Security (Hardware) applications). Cable transfer devices must be specified as Seadan SSE 4000
Magnetic Locks
or SE4050 stainless steel flexible conduit each with overall lengths of 295mm
and 590mm respectively.
Magnetic locks must be specified as PADDE FR1200B 24 VDC/250 MA or
Door Strikes,
Electrical R- Security Equipment LOCKNETICS range or other University-approved. (The Consultant must
Engineer Security (Hardware) obtain permission from the Project Coordinator/Security Systems Manager
Magnetic Locks
prior to specifying magnetic locks.
Door Strikes, All new control panels must be Tecom TS 0816 Challengers. Challengers
Electrical R- Security Equipment
Electric Locks, and R 09.01.04 attached to the FORCEFIELD access control system must also have an 8
Engineer Security (Hardware)
Magnetic Locks Meg IUM. Firmware version to be 8120 and above
Door Strikes,
Electrical R- Security Equipment All Intelligent User Modules (IUM) attached to the FORCEFIELD system must
Engineer Security (Hardware) be Tecom TS 0884.
Magnetic Locks
Door Strikes, All door controllers must be Tecom TS 0867 Intelligent 4 door controllers with
Electric Locks, and R 09.01.06 the Tecom TS 0329 enclosure. Door controllers attached to the Forcefield
Magnetic Locks Access Control System must also have an 8 Meg IUM.
Door Strikes, All lift controllers must be Tecoll1 TS 0869 Intelligent 4 lift controllers with the
Electric Locks, and R 09.01.07 Tecom TS 0329 enclosure. Door controllers attached to the Forcefield Access
Magnetic Locks Control System must also have an 8 Meg IUM.
Door Strikes,
Electric Locks, and R 09.01.08 All Data Gathering Panels (DGP) must be Tecom TS0820.
Magnetic Locks
Door Strikes, All building perimeter doors must have a minimum of “Type C” configuration
Electric Locks, and R 09.01.09 and connected to the campus wide remote lock down function which is driven
Magnetic Locks by the Security Management System (Forcefield).
All Access cards shall be Mifare Smartcard technology and be compatible
Access Cards,
Electrical R- Security Equipment with the campus security system. The contracted University supplier is
Card Readers and R 09.02.01
Engineer Security (Hardware) Unicard Systems Pty LTD. Not required to be supplied by contractor unless
Exit Devices
specified by Project Manager/coordinator
Mifare 26 bit wiegand contactless card readers must be used on all new
Access Cards, installations. If the installation is part of an existing Andover card reader
Card Readers and R 09.02.02 system then the Security Systems Manager will supply a separate
Exit Devices specification. The contracted University supplier is Unicard Systems Pty LTD
who can supply HID i-class readers with the Monash Encoded key
Break glass release units shall be double-pole resetable type (non-glass)
University approved. They must be installed in a suitable location adjacent to
Access Cards,
Electrical R- Security Equipment the secure side of the door. If the glass is broken in an emergency, the
Card Readers and R 09.02.03
Engineer Security (Hardware) controlled door must:
Exit Devices
- Open automatically (I pole)
- Initiate alarms (2nd pole)
106

Access Cards, Where required the Consultant must specify Stainless Steel Infrared
Card Readers and R 09.02.04 Touchless type for all request-to-exit push buttons Button must illuminate
Exit Devices Green/Red in Colour for all doors.
Duress Hold-up button (hardwired): Where required, the Consultant must
Duress Buttons R 09.03.01 specify Dual Action stainless steel type complete with 2 spare keys or similar
University approved. (Preferred Option)
Duress Hold-up button (wireless): Where required, the Consultant must
Duress Buttons R 09.03.02 specify from the Inovonics Monitored range of equipment or similar University
approved. Must be dual action.
SENTROL 1078 1 "Reed switches must be specified for all doors connected
to the access control or intruder detection systems. Each encapsulated reed
switch must be operated by individual magnets and installed in the door leaf
Door Monitoring R 09.04.01 and doorjamb adjacent to the leading edge. Each switch and end of line
circuitry must be mounted in each doorjamb head. The magnet to operate the
reed switch must be concealed by recessing into the door leaf and the gap
between the reed switch and magnet must not exceed 4.0 mm.
Door status indicators must be specified for all Interlocking doors. Each door
status indicator must consist of:
Electrical R- Security Equipment - Clipsal series 2000 plate
Door Monitoring R 09.04.02
Engineer Security (Hardware) - Green LED (engraved - Door Available).
- Red LED (engraved - Door Unavailable).
The Consultant must specify custom mounting brackets where required.
Door Monitoring R 09.04.03 All local door sounders must be RS 626-141 or other University approved.
All cabling on challenger LAN (Local Area Network) equipment must be

Cabling R 09.05.01 Belden 8723 or equivalent with a separate earth wire (2.5mm2 Green/Yellow)
OR 4MM2FOR LONGER DISTANCES
Electrical R- Security Equipment The cabling from the door controllers to the readers must be shielded 7core
Cabling R 09.05.02
Engineer Security (Hardware) (14/0.20mm2).

Cabling R 09.05.03 Figure 8 cable (Rating 24/0.20mm2) must be used on electric locks.
All Break Glass Units, Egress Buttons, Duress Buttons, Reed Switches,
Cabling R 09.05.04 Sonarlearts, PIR's and Door Status Indicators must use 4-core (14/0.20mm2)
cable
12-volt/24 volt DC battery backup regulated power supply and battery system
must be specified to maintain power to the electric locks and security system
Electrical R- Security Equipment DC Emergency
R 09.06 for a 12 hour period should normal "mains" power be disrupted. The backup
Engineer Security (Hardware) Power Supplies
power supply system must be fully monitored by the FORCEFIELD and
CAMS systems
Electrical R- Security Equipment 240-Volt Power All security panels and other devices must be wired on circuits dedicated to
R 09.07.01
Engineer Security (Hardware) Supplies security.
Electrical R- Security Equipment 240-Volt Power

R 09.07.02 A Lock-dog must be installed on each associated circuit breaker.
Engineer Security (Hardware) Supplies
Electrical R- Security Equipment Passive infra-Red Where required the Consultant must specify from the Aritech/OPTEX range of
R 09.08
Engineer Security (Hardware) Detectors PIR's, or other University approved intruder detectors.
Where required the Consultant must specify from the DALLAS DELTA range
Electrical R- Security Equipment Communication
R 09.09 of equipment (Must check with the Project Manager/ Coordinator to identify if
Engineer Security (Hardware) Systems
VOIP units are required)
All retail tenancies must comply with: Monash Retail Design and Fitout
- the Monash Retail Design and Fitout Guidelines Guidelines
S-
Architect General S 01 - Monash Design and Development Controls - Interiors (DDCI)
Retail
Tenancies must submit concepts and ongoing design development for Monash Design and Development
approvals - no signage is to be installed wihtout prior approvals. Controls - Interiors (DDCI)
Architects to include provisions for cleaners sinks where retail tenants or food
S-
Architect Retail Tenancies Cleaners Sink S 02.01 operators are planned. Hot and cold water, and connection to silt traps or
Retail
sewer to be provided.
Bin washing facilities must be provided for food tenancies. This area to have
hot and cold water provision through a common outlet with a hose connection
S-
Architect Retail Tenancies Bin Wash S 02.03 for washing of bins. The bin wash must be located on an impervious surface
Retail
graded and drained to sewer via an approved interceptor.
Retail food premises shall comply with Australian Standard for the design,
construction and fitout of Food Premises (AS4674 –
2004).
The design and construction of food premises must –
(a) be appropriate for the activities for which the premises are used;
S- (b) provide adequate space for the activities to be conducted on the food
Architect Retail Tenancies Food Safety S 02.04.01
Retail premises and for the fixtures, fittings and equipment used for those activities;
(c) permit the food premises to be effectively cleaned and,
(d) as far as practicable –
(i) exclude dirt, dust, fumes, smoke and other contaminants;
(ii) not permit the entry of pests; and
(ii) not provide harbourage for pests.
107

Prior to undertaking any works at a proposed food premises or at an existing
food premises, approval should be obtained from the relevant Local Council's
Public Health Unit. When submitting plans for approval, they should include:-
(i) Details of the proposed layout of the premises showing the position of all
benches, appliances, equipment, counters and other fixtures.
(ii) Specifications which list all materials to be used, finishes to floors, walls,
ceilings, cupboards and work benches and details/descriptions of all
S- equipment to be used.
Retail (iii) Information relating to the types of food involved, the nature of work to be
carried out in each area and the number of proposed employees. (iv) Where
mechanical ventilation is required additional plans must be submitted which
include:
- (a) a fully dimensional drawing showing end and front elevation
- (b) details relating to the filter capacity, rated motor power and provision for
make up air
- (c) details showing the flue and flue height
Food premises must have sufficient natural or mechanical ventilation to
effectively remove fumes, smoke, steam and vapours from the food premises
Mechanical exhausts systems are required for most cooking equipment (ie.
stoves, deep fryers,
ovens rotisseries etc.) and dishwashers or other washing equipment that
vents steam which is
likely to cause condensation on walls and ceilings i.e. commercial
dishwasher.
These systems shall be installed in accordance with
S-
Architect Retail Tenancies Food Safety S 02.04.03 'Australian Standard 1668.2 - The use of mechanical ventilation and air-
Retail
conditioning in buildings,
Part 2. Mechanical ventilation for acceptable indoor-air quality.
Provisions must also be made for adequate make-up air (replacement air for
air drawn out by the
exhaust system). In cases where inadequate make up air is provided the
system will not operate
correctly resulting in a vacuum affect which can cause either fume problems
and/or doors being
drawn in. This will lead to both pest and draft problems..
Food retail premises must use potable water for all activities that use water
that are conducted on the food premises.
Food premises must have a sewage and wastewater disposal system that –
- will effectively dispose of all sewage and waste water; and
S- - is constructed and located so that there is no likelihood of the sewage and
Retail wastewater
polluting the water supply or contaminating food.
Water efficient cooking appliances shall be installed. For example water
efficient waterless woks, which use less than 80% cooling water than
conventional wok cookers.
Grease traps should be installed as required to prevent solids and greasy
waste from entering the sewerage system. They are to intercept and retain
silt, sand, oil, grease, sludge and other substances. The grease traps protects
both the internal pipes as well as sewerage infrastructure. Locating grease
S-
Architect Retail Tenancies Food Safety S 02.04.05 traps in food preparation areas can result in contamination problems when
Retail
the traps are emptied or in the event of overflow, and should therefore be
located outside the food preparation area and preferably outside the building.
Adequate provision for the storage of used cooking oil must be provided to
enable third party off-site recycling of this material.
Food premises must have facilities for the storage of garbage and recyclable
matter that: - adequately contain the volume and type of garbage and
recyclable matter on the food premises;
-enclose the garbage or recyclable matter,
- keep pests and animals away from it, and
- are designed and constructed so that they may be easily and effectively
cleaned.
Bin storage areas must be provided with washing facilities as per local
bylaws,
S- to enable effective cleaning of all waste storage containers and to discharge
Retail waste water to sewer via approved trade waste treatment apparatus. The bin
storage and wash facility must be:
- Large enough to store all garbage and waste matter, including dump
masters if used
- Provided with hot and cold water through a common outlet with a hose
connection,
- Graded and drained to a silt trap and/or connected to a grease trap, prior to
sewer discharge
- Capable of containing all waste water as a result of the cleaning process,
- If the floor area of the bin wash facility is greater than 20m2, then it must be
undercover as per trade waste agreement requirements.
108

Monash Design and Construction Standards Rev07

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Monash Design and Construction Standards Rev07

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1611103 - Master Copy - Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE) - 4.

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

The MDCS is to be utilised by all parties associated with:

Extracts from the MDCS may be incorporated in specifications, however it

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

The intent is to set a standard for University facilities, however, consultants

All works must be designed in accordance with relevant Australian Standards

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Key Design Criteria must include, though not be limited to:

Lifecycle costing must be undertaken in accordance with The Australian/New

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

All documentation must be provided in electronic formats. For documents

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

C- Foyers & Where requested allow for display facilities to accommodate:

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

The plant must have:

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

C- The provision of adjustable or of varied height benches to accommodate

C- Walls, ceilings and floors to be impermeable to liquids, slip resistant and

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Laboratory effluent, chemical residues from equipment and glassware

The Sustainability Compliance and Integration officer should be made aware

General design to facilitate best practice learning techniques, teaching space

Lecture theatres are also required to adhere to the following conditions:

Facilities for Facilities for Persons with Disabling Conditions:

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

GBCA Green Star - Design & As-

Roof design must be in accordance with:

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

D- Roof to be light in colour to minimise heat gain. Design roof to enhance

The following warranties must be provided:

D- The following plumbing standards must apply:

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

D- The following restrictions apply during gutter design:

D- Ensure design is compatible with roofing system. Provide handrails where

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

For Tilting Overhead Doors:

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Architraves must adhere to the following conditions:

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

The following warranty periods must be provided:

G- All interior materials, paints, finishes, adhesives and sealants to be

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)

G- The display of Containment, Building Permit Notification and Fire Evacuation

G- Fire Evacuation Notices to be location at each access point, lobby areas or